MAYBACH
Order No. 6515 4446 13 Part No. 240 584 38 82 USA Edition B 2007
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Grafik in der Größe 216x79 mm
in den Grafikrahmen importieren!
Service and Literature
Your authorized Maybach Studio has trained technicians and Genuine Maybach Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact your authorized Maybach Studio.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Maybach Studio.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Maybach web-site www.maybach-manufaktur.com or www.maybach.ca.
G
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use
of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Maybach Studio.
We reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator's Manual might differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Press time November 13, 2006
GSP/TID
Printed in Germany
Maybach 57
Maybach 62
Maybach 57 S
Maybach 62 S
Our company congratulates you on the
purchase of your new Maybach.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in Maybach
Manufaktur. Furthermore, it exemplifies
your desire to own an automobile that
will be as easy as possible to operate and
provide years of service.
Your Maybach represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen.
To help assure your driving pleasure and
also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of your time:
앫
Please read this manual carefully,
then return it to your vehicle where it
will be handy for your reference.
앫
Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are
designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Maybach.
앫
Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve
the safety of the vehicle operator and
occupants.
앫
Should you have any questions,
please contact your Maybach Studio
MRM (Maybach Relationship
Manager) or call us at
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
We extend our best wishes for many
miles of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Product information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Operator’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Service and warranty information 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Maybach automobiles . . . . . . . . . 11
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Change of address or ownership . 12
Operating your vehicle outside
the USA or Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Where to find it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Operating safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Proper use of the vehicle . . . . . . . 15
Problems with your vehicle . . . . . . . . 16
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . 17
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . 17
Vehicle data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Information regarding
electronic recording devices. . . . . 18
At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . .
Front center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upper part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lower part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead control panel . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver’s door control panel . . . . . . . . .
Rear passenger compartment . . . . . . .
Maybach 57 (vehicles without
rear center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear
center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 62 without partition* . .
Maybach 62 with partition* . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 57 (vehicles without
rear center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear
center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 62 (vehicles without
rear center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 62 (vehicles with rear
center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
20
22
24
25
25
26
28
29
30
30
32
34
36
38
38
40
42
44
Rear center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 57 (vehicles without
rear center seat*). . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear
center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 62 with power
tilt/sliding sunroof (vehicles
without rear center seat*) . . . . . .
Maybach 62 with power
tilt/sliding sunroof (vehicles with
rear center seat*). . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 62 with
electrotransparent roof*
(vehicles without rear center
seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 62 with
electrotransparent roof*
(vehicles with rear center seat*). .
Rear door control panel . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maybach 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
46
47
48
49
51
52
54
54
55
Contents
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking with the SmartKey . . .
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO** . .
Starter switch positions. . . . . . . . .
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching on headlamps. . . . . . . .
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wipers. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems while driving . . . . . . . . .
Parking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching off headlamps . . . . . . .
Turning off the engine . . . . . . . . .
Releasing seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
58
58
59
60
62
62
64
66
68
68
70
72
73
73
74
74
76
77
77
78
78
79
79
Safety and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Occupant Classification System . . . 88
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 95
Override switch for rear
passenger compartment . . . . . . . 100
Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Electro-hydraulic brake system . . 107
Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . 110
Tow-away alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Controls in detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . .
SmartKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** . .
Checking batteries in the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loss of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** . .
Opening the doors from the
inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing the rear doors
automatically from the inside
(Maybach 62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk emergency release . . . . . .
Valet trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power closing assist for doors
and trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic central locking . . . . . .
Locking and unlocking from
the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting front passenger seat
position from rear . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multicontour seats . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
114
114
117
121
121
122
123
123
124
127
127
128
129
129
131
131
135
136
Contents
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat ventilation*. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing positions in memory . . .
Recalling positions from
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing exterior rear view
mirror parking position . . . . . . .
Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . .
Combination switch . . . . . . . . . .
Corner-illuminating lamps . . . . .
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . .
Interior lighting in the front . . .
Interior lighting in the rear . . . .
Courtesy lighting . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door entry lamps . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument cluster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting instrument cluster
illumination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant temperature gauge . . .
Resetting trip odometer. . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside temperature indicator .
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . .
Multifunction steering wheel . .
138
139
140
141
141
141
142
142
145
146
147
148
149
153
153
153
154
154
155
155
155
155
156
156
157
157
158
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard display menu . . . . . . . .
Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distronic** menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle status message memory
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear selector lever positions . . . .
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic shift program . . . . . . .
One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . .
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode) . . . . . . . . . . .
Good visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp cleaning system . . . . .
Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power folding exterior rear view
mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . .
Automatic climate control. . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
160
162
162
164
166
167
167
169
170
178
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
186
186
188
189
190
191
192
Deactivating the climate control
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating the climate control
system in automatic mode . . . . .
Setting the temperature . . . . . . .
Adjusting air distribution . . . . . .
Adjusting air volume . . . . . . . . . .
Front defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL . . .
Air recirculation mode . . . . . . . .
Charcoal filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residual heat and ventilation. . .
Temperature-controlled glove
box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating rear passenger
compartment settings at the
cockpit control panel. . . . . . . . . .
Rear passenger compartment. . .
Activating the climate control
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating the climate control
system in automatic mode . . . . .
Setting the temperature . . . . . . .
Adjusting air distribution . . . . . .
Adjusting air volume . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residual heat and ventilation. . .
Solar panel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
194
194
195
195
195
195
196
196
198
200
200
201
201
202
206
206
207
207
207
208
208
208
Contents
Power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing the power
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing the power
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summer opening feature . . . . . .
Convenience closing feature . . .
Power tilt/sliding sunroof. . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing the
power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57)
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62)
Synchronizing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62)
Electrotransparent roof* . . . . . . . . .
Operating the
electrotransparent roof . . . . . . .
Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distronic**. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airmatic DC (Dual Control). . . . .
Parktronic system
(Parking assist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Assist System (PAS) . . . .
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo tie-down hooks . . . . . . . .
Loading instructions . . . . . . . . . .
209
209
210
211
211
212
212
213
214
217
218
218
221
221
223
233
237
240
247
247
247
Useful features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Storage compartments. . . . . . . . . 248
Umbrella . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Floormats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Ashtrays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Cigarette lighters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Non-smokers package* . . . . . . . . 263
Folding table*
(standard on Maybach 62;
optional on Maybach 57) . . . . . . . 263
Refrigerator** in rear center
console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Battery charge socket. . . . . . . . . . 267
Rear window curtain . . . . . . . . . . 267
Rear door window curtains* . . . . 269
Partition* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Two-way intercom*
(Maybach 62: standard with
partition*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
External communication
(special order equipment) . . . . . . 276
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . 276
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Garage door opener. . . . . . . . . . . 289
Infrared reflecting windshield . . . 293
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) . . . . .
Driving instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive sensibly – save fuel . . . . . . .
Drinking and driving . . . . . . . . . .
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving instructions . . . . .
Standing water . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger compartment . . . . . . .
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control and operation of radio
transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . .
At the gas station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check regularly and before a
long trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
295
296
297
297
297
297
297
298
299
299
300
300
300
301
301
302
302
303
303
303
304
304
305
305
306
Contents
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission fluid level . . . . . . .
Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system . . . . .
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important guidelines . . . . . . . . .
Tire care and maintenance. . . . .
Direction of rotation . . . . . . . . .
Loading the vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended tire inflation
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire inflation pressure.
Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load identification . . . . . . . . . . .
DOT, Tire Identification
Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum tire load . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum tire inflation
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (U.S. vehicles). . . . . . .
Tire ply material . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and loading terminology . .
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
307
307
309
310
310
311
313
313
313
315
315
319
321
326
329
329
330
331
331
333
333
336
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire speed rating for
winter tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance service indicator
message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up the maintenance
service indicator display. . . . . . . .
Resetting the maintenance
service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning and care of vehicle . . . .
337
337
338
338
339
339
340
341
342
342
Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What to do if … . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps in instrument cluster . . . .
Lamp in center console . . . . . . . .
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display . . . . . . . . .
Where will I find ...? . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit,
luggage bowl, spare wheel. . . . .
Unlocking/locking in an emergency.
Unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . .
Locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening/closing in an emergency . .
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing SmartKey batteries . . . . .
SmartKey/SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing bulbs for front lamps .
License plate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing wiper blades. . . . . . . .
Installing wiper blades . . . . . . . .
353
354
354
362
364
400
400
400
401
401
402
403
403
404
405
405
406
407
408
410
411
411
412
Contents
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the spare wheel . . . . .
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnecting the batteries . . . .
Removing the batteries . . . . . . .
Charging and reinstalling
the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reconnecting the batteries . . . .
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing towing eye bolt. . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aids for replacing fuses . . . . . . .
Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse boxes in engine
compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse box in passenger
compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse box in the trunk . . . . . . . . .
413
413
413
417
419
419
420
420
421
423
424
426
426
426
427
427
428
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Parts service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Warranty coverage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet. . . . . . . . . . . 431
Identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Layout of poly-V-belt drive . . . . . . . . 434
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Rims and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Same size tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Main dimensions and weights. . . . . . 439
Main dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. . . . . . 440
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Engine oils. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Engine oil additives . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . 441
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Premium unleaded gasoline . . . . 442
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Gasoline additives . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Coolants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system. . . . . . 446
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Introduction
Product information
Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using Genuine Maybach
Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved for use on
Maybach vehicles and your model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special suitability for Maybach vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment
for other products and therefore cannot
be held responsible for them, even if in
individual cases an official approval or
authorization by governmental or other
agencies should exist. Use of such parts
and accessories could adversely affect
the safety, performance or reliability of
your vehicle. Please do not use them.
Genuine Maybach Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved
by us for use on Maybach vehicles are
available at your authorized Maybach
Studio where you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible
technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you
to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service
life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow
the instructions and warnings contained
in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage
caused by failure to follow instructions is
not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your
authorized Maybach Studio will be glad
to demonstrate the proper procedures.
10
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore,
information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might
differ from your vehicle.
Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Maybach, including:
앫
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly
from the actual equipment of your vehicle.
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts,
New York, and Vermont Emission
Control System Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts,
New York, and Vermont only)
앫
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws)
If there are any equipment details that
are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized Maybach
Studio will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents
and should be kept with the vehicle.
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Maybach
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled
to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price,
if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to
fix one or more substantial defects or
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts.
During the period of 18 months from
original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18000 miles (approximately 29000 km) on the odometer of
the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if
one or more of the following occurs:
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have
directly notified us in writing of the
need for its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calendar days.
Maintenance
The Maintenance Booklet describes all
the necessary maintenance work which
should be performed at regular intervals.
Always have the Maintenance Booklet
with you when you take the vehicle to
your authorized Maybach Studio for service. The service advisor will record each
service in the booklet for you.
Written notification should not be sent
to a Maybach Studio, it should be addressed to
Maybach Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Three Paragon Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject
to repair two or more times, and you
have directly notified Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC in writing of the need for its
repair,
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Roadside Assistance
The Maybach Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls
to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA)
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada)
will be answered by Maybach Assistance
Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days
a year.
For additional information refer to the
Maybach Roadside Assistance Program
brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio.
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the
Maybach Assistance Center at
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). It is in your
own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.
Operating your vehicle outside the
USA or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
앫
Service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available.
앫
If you sell your Maybach, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it
available to the next operator.
Unleaded gasoline for vehicles with
catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts.
앫
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure
to send in the “Notice of Purchase of
Used Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the
Maybach Assistance Center at
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
Gasoline may have a considerably
lower octane rating, and improper
fuel can cause engine damage.
Certain Maybach models are available
for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult
an authorized Maybach Studio or write
to:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
12
Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to
provide comprehensive support information for you, the vehicle operator. Each
section has its own reference color.
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated in the vehicle’s interior.
Controls in detail
Technical data
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed in your
vehicle. This section expands on the
“Getting started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are
already familiar with the basic functions
of your vehicle, this section will be of
particular interest to you.
All important technical data for your
Maybach can be found in this section.
Operation
Getting started
Here you will find all the information
you need for your first drive. You should
read this section first if this is your first
Maybach vehicle or if you are renting or
borrowing this vehicle.
Safety and Security
Here you will find all the information
you need for the proper operation of
your Maybach.
Practical hints
Indexes
The table of contents and the index are
designed to help you find information
quickly and easily.
The following publications are part of
your vehicle documentation:
앫
this Operator’s Manual
앫
the Maintenance Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehicle.
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Here you will find descriptions of the
safety and security features of your
Maybach.
13
Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
Trademarks:
앫
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark
of Bluetooth SIG Inc.
앫
ESP® is a registered trademark of
DaimlerChrysler.
앫
HomeLink® is a registered trademark
of Prince, a Johnson Controls
Company.
앫
SIRIUS and related marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite Radio Inc.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
*
Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your
Maybach.
** Two asterisks designate standard
equipment which the purchaser of
the vehicle had the option to delete
at the time the vehicle was ordered.
14
Warning!
G
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that may endanger your health or
life, or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
i Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
왘 This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
왘 A number of these symbols appear-
ing in succession indicates a multiplestep procedure.
컄 page
컄컄
This symbol tells you where to
look for further information
on a topic.
This continuation symbol
marks a warning which is continued on the next page.
컄컄
This continuation symbol
marks a procedure which is
continued on the next page.
DISPLAY
Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in
the type shown here.
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Warning!
Warning!
G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software
could cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle’s electronic components
are interconnected, any modifications
made may produce an undesired effect on
other systems. Electronic malfunctions
could seriously impair the operating safety
of your vehicle.
See an authorized Maybach Studio for repairs or modifications to electronic components.
Other improper work or modifications on
the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while
the engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.
G
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires/wheels, for example when
running over an obstacle, road debris or a
pothole, may cause serious damage and
impair the operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect
that damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on your hazard warning
flashers, carefully slow down, and drive
with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio or other
qualified maintenance or repair facility for
further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that
you are familiar with the following information and rules:
앫
the safety precautions in this manual
앫
the “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫
traffic rules and regulations
앫
motor vehicle laws and safety standards
Warning!
G
Various warning labels are attached to
your vehicle. These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of
various risks. You should not remove any
of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels
may cause you and others to be unaware
of certain risks which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.
15
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge
you to immediately contact your Maybach Relationship Manager at an authorized Maybach Studio to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Maybach
Studio management, or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Maybach Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Three Paragon Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
16
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant
to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
Maybach Studio, the Maybach Assistance Center, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
17
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid
system, may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫
for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫
with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫
in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫
for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫
as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system.
18
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Front center console
Overhead control panel
Driver’s door control panel
Rear passenger compartment
Rear seats
Rear center console
Rear door control panel
19
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
Page
1 Exterior lamp switch
73,
142
2 Headlamp washer button
186
앫
High beam
74
앫
Turn signals
74
앫
Windshield wipers
74
4 Cruise control lever
앫
Cruise control
221
앫
Distronic**
223
5 Multifunction steering
wheel
64,
158
6 Horn
Page
8 Lever for Voice Control
System, see separate
operating instructions
9 Starter switch
3 Combination switch
7 Instrument cluster
Item
a Front Parktronic warning
indicator
60
239
b Overhead control panel
28
c Compartment for front
telephone
250,
278
The Roadside Assistance
button • and the Information button ¡ are located in the compartment
for front telephone.
285
Item
Page
d Glove box lid release
249
e Glove box lock
249
f Front center console
25
g Steering wheel adjustment
stalk
65
h Heated steering wheel
switch
276
j Remote trunk opening/closing switch
124
k Parking brake pedal
l Hood lock release
77
307
m Parking brake release
77
n Door control panel
29
22,
154
21
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
22
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
Page
Item
1 Coolant temperature
gauge
155
a A
2 Fuel gauge with fuel
reserve warning lamp
355
3 L
Left turn signal indicator lamp
4 Speedometer
5 v
1
ABS/ESP® warning
lamp
6 l
Distance warning
lamp1
7 K
Right turn signal indicator lamp
Item
High beam headlamp indicator lamp
145
k H
b J
Reset button
154
154
c <
Seat belt telltale
92,
357
l Knob for instrument cluster
illumination
m ?
Engine malfunction
indicator lamp,
USA only
361
±
Engine malfunction
indicator lamp,
Canada only
361
n ;
Brake warning lamp,
USA only
360
3
Brake warning lamp,
Canada only
360
o 1
Supplemental
Restraint System
(SRS) indicator lamp
82,
359
74
156
103,
105,
354
223,
356
74
8 Tachometer
155
9 -
103,
356
Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator
lamp
Page
d Digital clock
(see separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
e Gear selector lever position
and program mode
180
f Main odometer
157
g Trip odometer
155
h Multifunction display
157
j Outside temperature indicator
155
Page
Tire inflation pressure warning lamp
359
Vehicles without Distronic**: Warning lamp
without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is
running.
23
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel
Item
Page
1 Multifunction display
Operating control system
2 Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume:
Press button
158
Page
4 Menu systems:
Press button
è
for next menu
ÿ
for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu:
æ
up/to increase
Press button
ç
down/to decrease
j
for next display
k
for previous display
3 Telephone:
Press button
24
157
Item
s
to take a call
to dial a call
to redial
t
to end a call
to reject an
incoming call
At a glance
Front center console
Front center console
Upper part
Item
Page
Item
1 Hazard warning flasher on/
off switch
147
7 Automatic climate control
2 Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp
110
8 Chrome label for opening
cover of:
3 Central locking switch
129
4 Central unlocking switch
129
5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp
91
6 COMAND (see separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin
Audiovisual System operating instructions)
Page
191
앫
Cup holders
258
앫
Button for opening/closing rear window curtain
267
앫
Button for opening/closing rear door window
curtains*
269
25
At a glance
Front center console
Lower part
Maybach 57 and Maybach 62 without
partition*
i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary.
26
Item
Page
1 KEYLESS-GO** start/stop
button
61,
71
2 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission
70
3 Parking Assist System (PAS)
parallel parking button
244
4 Button for retracting/extending rear seat head restraints
134
5 Parking assist (Parktronic
system) deactivation button
240
6 Two-way intercom* on/off
button (only Maybach 62)
274
Item
Page
7 Chrome label for opening
cover of:
앫
Ashtray
260
앫
Lighter
262
앫
Storage compartment*
263
8 Thumbwheel for setting
distance in Distronic**
230
9 Distance warning function** on/off button
230
a Level control button
236
b Airmatic DC button
233
c Electronic Stability Program
(ESP®) control switch
106
d Program mode selector
switch for automatic transmission
184
At a glance
Front center console
Maybach 62 with partition*
Item
Page
Item
1 KEYLESS-GO** start/stop
button
61,
71
8 Partition* opening/closing
button
2 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission
70
9 Chrome label for opening
cover of:
3 Parking Assist System (PAS)
parallel parking button
244
4 Button for retracting/extending rear seat head restraints
134
5 Parking assist (Parktronic
system) deactivation button
240
6 Two-way intercom on/off
button
274
7 Button for opening/closing
partition* curtain
273
Page
271
앫
Ashtray
260
앫
Lighter
262
앫
Storage compartment*
263
a Thumbwheel for setting
distance in Distronic**
230
b Distance warning function** on/off button
230
c Level control button
236
d Airmatic DC button
233
e Electronic Stability Program
(ESP®) control switch
106
f Program mode selector
switch for automatic transmission
184
i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary.
27
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
d
28
Item
Page
1 Left front reading lamp
on/off
148
2 Rear interior lighting on/off
148
3 Interior lighting control
148
4 Right front reading lamp
on/off
148
5 Front interior lighting
on/off
148
6 Tow-away alarm button
112
7 Rear view mirror
66,
186
8 Garage door opener
289
9 Auto-dimming function on/
off
186
Item
Page
a Hands-free microphone for:
앫
Telephone
277
앫
Tele Aid (emergency call
system)
281
앫
Voice Control System,
see separate operating
instructions
b Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
281
c Switch for opening/closing
power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 57)
212
Switch for opening/closing
power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 62)
214
Switch for operating
electrotransparent roof*
screen
218
At a glance
Driver’s door control panel
Driver’s door control panel
Item
Page
1 Inside door handle
122
2 Memory function (for storing seat, mirror and steering wheel settings)
141
3 Seat adjustment
62
4 Button for folding exterior
mirrors in and out
188
5 Exterior mirror adjustment
66
6 Switches for opening/closing front door windows
209
Item
Page
7 Override switch for rear
passenger compartment
100
8 Switches for opening/closing rear door windows
209
9 Button for opening storage
compartment
250
a Handle for opening storage
compartment
250
b Seat ventilation*
139
c Seat heating
138
29
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Rear passenger compartment
Maybach 57 (vehicles without rear
center seat*)
30
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Item
Page
Item
1 Vanity mirror, left
248
5 Vanity mirror, right
2 Speedometer
156
3 Clock (see separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin
Audiovisual System operating instructions)
156
6 Video monitor, right (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
4 Outside temperature
gauge
155
Page
248
7 Button for opening
multifunction compartment*, right
253
8 Automatic climate control
panel
253
Item
Page
9 Button for opening storage
compartment/drawer
252
a Button for opening
multifunction compartment*, left
253
b Video monitor, left (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
31
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center
seat*)
32
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Item
Page
Item
1 Vanity mirror, left
248
5 Vanity mirror, right
2 Speedometer
156
3 Clock (see separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin
Audiovisual System operating instructions)
156
6 Video monitor, right (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
4 Outside temperature
gauge
155
Page
248
7 Button for opening
multifunction compartment*, right
253
8 Automatic climate control
panel
206
Item
9 Vehicles with rear center
seat*: control panel for rear
functions in rear center
console
a Button for opening
multifunction compartment*, left
Page
47
253
b Video monitor, left (separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System
operating instructions)
33
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Maybach 62 without partition*
34
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Item
Page
1 Vanity mirror, left
248
2 Speedometer
156
3 Clock (see separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin
Audiovisual System operating instructions)
156
4 Outside temperature
gauge
155
5 Vanity mirror, right
248
Item
Page
6 Video monitor, right (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
Item
Page
a Button for opening storage
compartment/drawer
252
Vehicles with rear center
seat*: control panel for rear
functions in the storage
compartment/drawer
49,
52
7 Button for opening upper
storage compartment
253
8 Button for opening
multifunction compartment*, right
253
b Button for opening
multifunction compartment*, left
9 Automatic climate control
panel
206
c Video monitor, left (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
253
35
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Maybach 62 with partition*
36
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Item
Page
1 Vanity mirror, left
248
2 Speedometer
156
3 Clock (see separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin
Audiovisual System operating instructions)
156
4 Outside temperature
gauge
155
5 Vanity mirror, right
248
Item
Page
6 Video monitor, right (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
Item
Page
a Button for opening storage
compartment/drawer
252
Vehicles with rear center
seat*: control panel for rear
functions in the storage
compartment/drawer
49,
52
7 Button for opening upper
storage compartment
253
8 Storage pocket, right
254
b Storage pocket, left
9 Automatic climate control
panel
206
c Video monitor, left (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
254
37
At a glance
Rear seats
Rear seats
Maybach 57 (vehicles without rear
center seat*)
38
At a glance
Rear seats
Item
Page
1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator
238
2 Button for opening upper
storage compartment with
insert for two champagne
flutes
255
3 Chrome label for opening
DVD player, AUX sockets
and headphone jacks (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
255
4 Chrome label for opening
CD changer compartment
(see separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
255
Item
5 Chrome label for opening
middle storage compartment
6 Door control panel, left
Page
255
54
7 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
for headphones
251
8 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
251
9 Center armrest with
Item
a Rear center console
Page
46
b Rear-cabin cup holder
258
c 12-V socket
266
d Adjustment switch for left
multicontour seat
137
e Folding table*
263
f Folding table*
263
g Adjustment switch for right
multicontour seat
137
앫
Storage compartment
for telephone
280
h Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
251
앫
Storage compartment
underneath
255
251
앫
Refrigerator** underneath
265
j Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
for headphones
k Door control panel, right
54
39
At a glance
Rear seats
Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center
seat*)
40
At a glance
Rear seats
Item
1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator
Page
238
2 Rear center backrest
앫
앫
앫
DVD player compartment, CD changer compartment, AUX sockets
and headphone jacks located behind backrest
(see separate COMAND
and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating
instructions)
256
Storage compartment
between the rear outer
seats located behind
backrest
256
Center armrest with
storage compartment
for telephone (backrest
folded down)
280
Item
앫
Page
Vehicles with rear center seat*: Center armrest with storage
compartment (backrest
folded down) for
앫
telephone and
앫
control panel for
rear functions
3 Door control panel, left
280
47
54
4 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
for headphones
251
5 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
for ashtray
251
6 Cup holder
259
Item
Page
7 Adjustment switch for left
multicontour seat
137
8 12-V socket
266
9 Switch for rear center seat
head restraints
135
a Cup holder
259
b Adjustment switch for right
multicontour seat
137
c Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
for ashtray
251
d Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
for headphones
251
e Door control panel, right
54
41
At a glance
Rear seats
Maybach 62 (vehicles without rear
center seat*)
42
At a glance
Rear seats
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator
238
6 Door control panel, left
255
7 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
for headphones
251
2 Button for opening upper
storage compartment with
insert for two champagne
flutes
8 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
251
3 Chrome label for opening
DVD player, AUX sockets
and headphone jacks (see
separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
255
9 Button for opening storage
compartment
4 Chrome label for opening
CD changer compartment
(see separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions)
255
5 Chrome label for opening
middle storage compartment
255
55
Item
d Rear center console
Page
46
e Rear-cabin cup holder
258
f 12-V socket
266
g Folding table
264
h Folding table
264
251
j Adjustment switch for right
multicontour seat
137
a Storage compartment
251
251
b Adjustment switch for left
multicontour seat
137
k Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
for headphones
c Center armrest with
280
l Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
251
m Button for opening storage
compartment
251
n Storage compartment
251
앫
Storage compartment
for telephone
앫
Storage compartment
underneath
255
앫
Refrigerator** underneath
265
o Door control panel, right
55
43
At a glance
Rear seats
Maybach 62 (vehicles with rear center
seat*)
44
At a glance
Rear seats
Item
1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator
Page
238
2 Rear center backrest
앫
앫
앫
DVD player compartment, CD changer compartment, AUX sockets
and headphone jacks located behind backrest
(see separate COMAND
and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating
instructions)
256
Storage compartment
between the rear outer
seats located behind
backrest
256
Center armrest with
storage compartment
for telephone (backrest
folded down)
280
Item
앫
Page
Vehicles with rear center seat*: Center armrest with storage
compartment (backrest
folded down) for
Item
Page
8 Storage compartment
251
9 Cup holder
259
a 12-V socket
266
앫
280
b Switch for rear center seat
head restraints
135
telephone and
앫
control panel for
rear functions
49,
52
c Cup holder
259
3 Door control panel, left
55
d Adjustment switch for right
multicontour seat
137
4 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
for headphones
251
e Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
for headphones
251
5 Handle for opening left
door storage compartment
for ashtray
251
f Handle for opening right
door storage compartment
for ashtray
251
6 Adjustment switch for left
multicontour seat
137
g Button for opening storage
compartment
251
7 Button for opening storage
compartment
251
h Storage compartment
251
j Door control panel, right
55
45
At a glance
Rear center console
Rear center console
Maybach 57 (vehicles without rear
center seat*)
Item
Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off
149
2 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
281
3 Right reading lamp on/off
149
4 Ambient lighting on/off
149
Rear interior lamps on/off
149
5 Thumbwheel for dimming
ambient lighting
149
6 Cover of compartment
with:
Example with rear door window curtains*
i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary.
46
앫
Ashtray
260
앫
Lighter
262
앫
Storage compartment*
263
Item
Page
7 Button for opening/closing
rear right side door window curtain*
269
8 Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain (only if
equipped with rear door
window curtains*)
267
9 Button for opening/closing
rear left side door window
curtain*
269
a Rear interior lamps on/off
149
Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain (only if
not equipped with rear
door window curtains*)
267
b Central unlocking switch
129
c Central locking switch
129
At a glance
Rear center console
Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center
seat*)
Control panel for rear functions* in rear
center console
i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary.
Item
Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off
149
2 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
281
3 Right reading lamp on/off
149
4 Ambient lighting on/off
149
Rear interior lamps on/off
149
5 Thumbwheel for dimming
ambient lighting
149
6 Rear interior lamps on/off
149
Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain (only if
not equipped with rear
door window curtains*)
Control panel for rear window curtains*
in rear armrest compartment
267
Item
7 Central locking switch
129
8 Central unlocking switch
129
Page
1 Button for opening/closing
rear right side door window curtain*
269
2 Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain (only if
equipped with rear door
window curtains*)
267
3 Button for opening/closing
rear left side door window
curtain*
269
47
At a glance
Rear center console
Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding
sunroof (vehicles without rear center
seat*)
Item
Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off
151
2 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
281
3 Right reading lamp on/off
151
4 Ambient lighting on/off
151
5 Headliner lamps and pillar
uplights on/off
151
6 Thumbwheel for dimming
ambient lighting and headliner lamps and pillar uplights
151
7 Two-way intercom* volume
thumbwheel
274
8 Cover of compartment
with:
i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary.
48
앫
Ashtray
260
앫
Lighter
262
앫
Storage compartment*
263
9 Switch for opening/closing
power tilt/sliding sunroof
216
Item
Page
a Switch for raising/lowering
power tilt/sliding sunroof
216
b Button for opening/closing
rear right side door window curtain*
269
c Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain
267
d Button for opening/closing
rear left side door window
curtain*
269
e Button for opening/closing
partition*
271
f Button for opening/closing
partition* curtain
271
g Two-way intercom*
on/off button
274
h Rear interior lamps on/off
151
j Central unlocking switch
129
k Central locking switch
129
At a glance
Rear center console
Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding
sunroof (vehicles with rear center
seat*)
Control panel for rear functions* in storage compartment/drawer
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
281
7 Two-way intercom*
on/off button
274
2 Right reading lamp on/off
151
8 Rear interior lamps on/off
151
3 Ambient lighting on/off
151
9 Central locking switch
129
4 Headliner lamps and pillar
uplights on/off
151
a Central unlocking switch
129
b Left reading lamp on/off
151
5 Thumbwheel for dimming
ambient lighting and headliner lamps and pillar uplights
151
6 Two-way intercom* volume
thumbwheel
274
c Remote control (see separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System
operating instructions)
i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary.
49
At a glance
Rear center console
Control panel for rear functions* in rear
armrest compartment
i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary.
50
Item
Page
1 Switch for opening/closing
power tilt/sliding sunroof
216
2 Switch for raising/lowering
power tilt/sliding sunroof
216
3 Button for opening/closing
rear right side door window curtain*
269
4 Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain
267
Item
Page
5 Button for opening/closing
rear left side door window
curtain*
269
6 Button for opening/closing
partition*
271
7 Button for opening/closing
partition* curtain
271
At a glance
Rear center console
Maybach 62 with electrotransparent
roof*(vehicles without rear center
seat*)
Item
Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off
151
2 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
281
3 Right reading lamp on/off
151
4 Ambient lighting on/off
151
5 Roof lighting on/off
151
6 Thumbwheel for dimming
ambient lighting or roof
lighting
151
7 Two-way intercom* volume
thumbwheel
274
8 Cover of compartment
with:
앫
Ashtray
260
앫
Lighter
262
앫
Storage compartment*
263
9 Switch for opening/closing
electrotransparent roof*
screen
219
Item
Page
a Switch for making electrotransparent roof*
opaque/transparent
219
b Button for opening/closing
rear right side door window curtain*
269
c Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain
267
d Button for opening/closing
rear left side door window
curtain*
269
e Button for opening/closing
partition*
271
f Button for opening/closing
partition* curtain
271
g Two-way intercom*
on/off button
274
h Rear interior lamps on/off
151
j Central unlocking switch
129
k Central locking switch
129
i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary.
51
At a glance
Rear center console
Maybach 62 with electrotransparent
roof* (vehicles with rear center seat*)
Control panel for rear functions* in storage compartment/drawer
i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary.
52
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
281
7 Two-way intercom*
on/off button
274
2 Right reading lamp on/off
151
8 Rear interior lamps on/off
151
3 Ambient lighting on/off
151
9 Central locking switch
129
4 Roof lighting on/off
151
a Central unlocking switch
129
5 Thumbwheel for dimming
ambient lighting or roof
lighting
151
b Left reading lamp on/off
151
6 Two-way intercom* volume
thumbwheel
274
c Remote control (see separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System
operating instructions)
At a glance
Rear center console
Control panel for rear functions* in rear
armrest compartment
Item
Page
1 Switch for opening/closing
electrotransparent roof*
screen
219
2 Switch for making electrotransparent roof*
opaque/transparent
219
3 Button for opening/closing
rear right side door window curtain*
269
Item
Page
4 Button for opening/closing
rear window curtain
267
5 Button for opening/closing
rear left side door window
curtain*
269
6 Button for opening/closing
partition*
271
7 Button for opening/closing
partition* curtain
271
i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary.
53
At a glance
Rear door control panel
Rear door control panel
Item
Maybach 57
1
54
Page
1 Selection switch for right
front passenger seat adjustment1
135
2 Selection switch for right
rear seat adjustment1
135
3 Memory button for storing
rear seat positions
141
4 Inside door handle
122
5 Seat ventilation*
139
6 Seat heating
138
7 Seat adjustment
132
8 Switches for opening/closing rear door window
209
These switches are located on the right rear passenger side only.
At a glance
Rear door control panel
Maybach 62
Item
1
Page
1 Selection switch for right
front passenger seat adjustment1
135
2 Selection switch for right
rear seat adjustment1
135
3 Memory button for storing
rear seat positions
141
4 Inside door handle
122
5 Switch for moving seat to
fully reclined position
133
6 Seat ventilation*
139
7 Seat heating
138
8 Switch for moving seat to
upright position
133
9 Seat adjustment
133
a Switches for opening/closing rear door window
209
These switches are located on the right rear passenger side only.
55
56
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
57
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking
왘 Press unlock button Œ on the
Unlocking with the SmartKey
SmartKey.
The “Getting started” section provides
an overview of the vehicle’s most basic
functions. First-time Maybach owners
should pay special attention to the information given here.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in
the doors move up. The anti-theft
alarm system is disarmed.
왘 Get in the vehicle and insert the
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls
in detail” section will provide you with
further information. The corresponding
page references are located at the end of
each segment.
SmartKey in the starter switch.
For more information, see “SmartKey”
(컄 page 114).
SmartKey with remote control
1
2
3
4
 Panic button (컄 page 102)
Š Opening button for trunk
ΠUnlock button
‹ Lock button
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
58
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO**
With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can
lock and unlock the vehicle without using the remote control buttons on the
SmartKey and start the engine without
inserting the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Warning!
G
i To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no
further than approximately 3 feet (1 meter)
away from the door.
i If the vehicle has been parked for more
than 72 hours, you must pull an outside door
handle in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO
function.
왘 Grasp an outside door handle.
왘 Get in the vehicle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in
the doors move up. The anti-theft
alarm system is disarmed.
For more information, see “ SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO**” (컄 page 117).
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
59
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions
Warning!
G
0
For removing SmartKey
! If the SmartKey can still not be turned, the
1
Power supply for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment
battery may not be sufficiently charged.
2
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
SmartKey
3
Ignition (power supply for all electrical consumers) and driving position.
All lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal
indicator lamps unless activated) in
the instrument come on. If a lamp in
the instrument cluster fails to come
on when the ignition is switched on,
have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the
engine or comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster”
(컄 page 354).
Starting position
i When you switch on the ignition, the in-
Starter switch
60
dicator and warning lamps (except high beam
headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. The indicator and
warning lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps
if activated) should go out when the engine is
running. This indicates that the respective systems are operational.
i The SmartKey can only be removed from
the starter switch with the gear selector lever
in position P.
앫
Check the starter battery and charge it if
necessary (컄 page 417).
앫
Get a jump start (컄 page 421).
To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a
completely discharged battery, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
For information on starting the engine
using the SmartKey, see “Starting with
the SmartKey” (컄 page 71).
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is inside the vehicle, pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the
gear selector lever corresponds to turning the SmartKey to the various starter
switch positions.
If you firmly depress the brake pedal during pressing KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, the engine starts automatically.
i The function of the SmartKey overrules
the KEYLESS-GO function.
Getting started
Unlocking
Position 1
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
once.
This supplies power for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment.
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button
앫
once again, the ignition (position 2) is
switched on
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
앫
twice, the power supply is again switched
off
1 USA only
2 Canada only
Ignition (or position 2)
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is
set to P.
왘 Do not depress the brake pedal.
Position 0
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0 (as with SmartKey
removed).
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
twice.
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button once, the power supply is again
switched off.
i When you switch on the ignition, the indicator and warning lamps (except high beam
headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. The indicator and
warning lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps
if activated) should go out when the engine is
running. This indicates that the respective systems are operational.
For information on starting the engine
using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO**”
(컄 page 71).
This supplies power for all electrical
consumers.
All lamps in the instrument cluster
(except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) come on. If a
lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
come on when the ignition is
switched on, have it checked and
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster remains on after
starting the engine or comes on while
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster” (컄 page 354).
61
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
Warning!
G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel,
and rear view mirror adjustments, as well
as fastening of seat belts, must be done before the vehicle is put into motion.
the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a seat
belt system and kinematic electronic controls that are designed to maintain proper
support and restraint-system effectiveness
in all seat settings in the event of a collision
or similar situation.
Warning!
Seats
Warning!
G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. Adjusting the seat while driving could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the
seat back in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If
you slide under it, the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That
could cause serious or fatal injuries. The
seat backrest and seat belts provide the
best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and seat belts are properly positioned on the body.
Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear
cabin) can be used in a reclined position
with seat belts properly fastened while the
vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in
62
G
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 68).
Observe the following points:
앫
Adjust the backrest until your arms are
slightly angled when holding the steering wheel.
앫
Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to
reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far to the
rear as possible, consistent with ability
to properly operate controls.
앫
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports
the back of the head at eye level.
앫
Never place hands under the seat or
near any moving parts while a seat is
being adjusted.
Failure to do so could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the
starter switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle,
the power seats can be operated when the
respective door is open. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Getting started
Adjusting
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear
seats whenever possible. Regardless of
seating position, children 12 years old and
under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended
for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see “Children in the
vehicle” (컄 page 95).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint.
Seat adjustment
The seat adjustment switches are located
on each door.
! When moving the seat, make sure there
are no items in the footwell or behind the
seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘 Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 1.
i Depending on the set height of the head
restraint, the seat fore and aft position is automatically pre-set.
Seat height
왘 Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow 2.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Seat height
Seat cushion tilt
Seat backrest tilt
Seat cushion depth
Head restraint height
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
Seat cushion tilt
왘 Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow 3 until your upper legs are
lightly supported.
Seat backrest tilt
왘 Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 4.
컄컄
or
왘 Open the respective door.
i The memory function (컄 page 140) lets
you store settings for the seat positions together with the settings for the steering
wheel and rear view mirrors.
63
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat cushion depth
Head restraint tilt
Steering wheel
컄컄 왘 Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 5 until your legs
are supported comfortably.
Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. Adjusting the steering wheel
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Head restraint height
왘 Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow 6.
Warning!
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back
of the head at eye level. This will reduce
the potential for injury to the head and
neck in the event of an accident or similar
situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
64
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle.
G
For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.
G
Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint.
왘 Push or pull on the lower edge of the
head restraint cushion.
i Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that it is as close to the head as possible.
For more information, see “Seats”
(컄 page 131).
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle,
the steering wheel adjustment feature can
be operated when the driver’s door is
open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel adjustment
Adjusting steering column up or down
Easy-entry/exit feature
왘 Move the stalk up or down in direc-
This feature allows for easier entry into
and exit from the vehicle. When entering
and exiting the vehicle, the steering
wheel is in its uppermost position.
tion of arrow 2.
Make sure your legs can move freely and
that all of the displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible.
For more information, see “Heated
steering wheel” (컄 page 276).
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the CONVENIENCE
submenu of the control system
(컄 page 177).
Warning!
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out
2 Adjusting steering column, up or
down
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
G
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
or
To stop steering wheel movement, do one
of the following:
왘 Open the driver’s door.
앫
Move steering wheel adjustment stalk
(컄 page 64).
앫
Press seat adjustment switch
(컄 page 63).
앫
Press one of the memory position buttons or the memory button M
(컄 page 140).
i The memory function (컄 page 140) lets
you store settings for the steering wheel together with settings for the rear view mirrors
and seat positions.
Adjusting steering column in or out
왘 Move stalk forward or backward in
direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is
reached with your arms slightly bent
at the elbow.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door
and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
65
Getting started
Adjusting
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel will return to its
last set position when you
앫
close the driver’s door with the ignition switched on
or
앫
insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO**
start/stop button (컄 page 61) once
with the driver’s door closed.
i The last set steering wheel position is
stored when
앫
the ignition is switched off
앫
the position is stored in memory
(컄 page 140)
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel tilts upwards
when you:
앫
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch,
or
앫
66
open the driver’s door with the
SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop
button in position 1 (컄 page 60).
i If the current position for the steering
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the
steering wheel will no longer be able to move
upward when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted when the engine is started.
Warning!
G
Let the system complete the adjustment
procedure before setting the vehicle in
motion. All steering wheel adjustment
must be completed before setting the vehicle in motion. Driving off with the steering wheel still adjusting could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Mirrors
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.
Warning!
G
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
! Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and
by applying plenty of water.
i The memory function (컄 page 140) lets
you save the rear view mirror settings together with the settings for the steering wheel and
seat positions.
Getting started
Adjusting
! For information on how to reposition the
Interior rear view mirror
exterior mirror housing when it was forcibly
pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
pushed rearward (hit from the front),
see “Power folding exterior rear view
mirrors” (컄 page 188).
왘 Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror.
For more information, see “Rear view
mirrors” (컄 page 186).
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.
Exterior rear view mirrors
Warning!
For more information, see “Rear view
mirrors” (컄 page 186).
G
With the exterior rear view mirrors folded
in when driving the vehicle, you cannot
observe surrounding traffic conditions and
which could result in an accident. Before
driving the vehicle, make sure the exterior
rear view mirrors are folded out.
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror button
3 Adjustment button
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Press button 1 for the driver’s side
G
exterior rear view mirror or button 2
for the passenger-side exterior rear
view mirror.
Exercise care when using the passengerside exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in
mirror are closer than they appear. Check
your interior rear view mirror or glance
over your shoulder before changing lanes.
왘 Push adjustment button 3 up, down,
Warning!
left, or right according to the desired
setting.
67
Getting started
Driving
Driving
Warning!
G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of
all obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
pedals still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between
the pedals. You could then no longer
brake or accelerate. This could lead to accidents and injury.
Fastening the seat belts
Warning!
G
Due to the considerably larger interior
compared to other vehicles, for occupants
in the rear of the vehicle not properly
wearing their seat belts, the risk of injury
in an accident is significantly increased.
They are much more likely to be thrown
around in the vehicle in slight frontal impacts or even during emergency braking
maneuvers.
68
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your passengers are properly restrained, even those
sitting in the rear.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident. You and your passengers
should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury
or death is lessened if you are wearing
your seat belt. The airbags can only provide the protection they were designed to
afford if the occupants are wearing their
seat belts (컄 page 82).
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear
seats whenever possible. Regardless of
seating position, children 12 years old and
under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of
the child. For additional information,
see “Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 95).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint.
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at
a time.
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the
seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision.
Warning!
G
Read and observe the additional warning
notices printed in the “Safety and Security” section (컄 page 85).
belt across the top of your shoulder
and the lap portion across your hips.
왘 Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 un-
til it clicks.
왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion
to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
If you slide under it, the seat belt would
apply force at the abdomen or neck. That
could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The seat backrest and seat belt provide the
best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the seat belt is
properly positioned on the body.
Proper use of seat belts:
Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear
cabin) can be used in a reclined position
with seat belts properly fastened while the
vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in
the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a seat
belt system and kinematic electronic controls that are designed to maintain proper
support and restraint-system effectiveness
in all seat settings in the event of a collision
or similar situation.
Keep the door storage compartments
closed while the vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to
catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt.
왘 Place the shoulder portion of the seat
1
2
3
4
Seat belt outlet
Latch plate
Buckle
Release button
앫
Do not twist the seat belt when fastening.
앫
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it
should not touch the neck or pass under the arm).
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips (over hip joint) and
not across the abdomen.
앫
Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than
컄컄
one person at a time.
왘 Pull the seat belt smoothly from the
seat belt outlet 1.
69
Getting started
Driving
컄컄 앫
Do not fasten a seat belt around a
person and another object at the
same time. When using a seat belt to
secure infant restraint or toddler restraint or children in booster seats,
always follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
앫
Check your seat belt during travel to
make sure it is properly positioned.
앫
Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this
when wearing loose clothing.
Warning!
G
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
Automatic transmission
Starting the engine
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive with at least
one window fully open.
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
P
Park position with gear selector lever
lock
R Reverse gear
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in
the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the seat belt.
N Neutral
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the seat belts.
For more information, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 178).
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be replaced. Contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
70
D Drive position
Getting started
Driving
Starting with the SmartKey
왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is
set to P.
왘 Do not depress the accelerator.
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 3 and hold until
the engine starts (컄 page 60).
i You can also use the “touch-start” function. Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it again immediately. The engine then
starts automatically.
You can start your vehicle without the
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the
gear selector lever.
왘 Firmly depress the brake pedal during
In order to start the engine with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
앫
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be located in the vehicle.
앫
All the doors must be closed.
The gear selector lever lock is released.
once.
The engine starts.
For more information, see “Turning off
the engine with KEYLESS-GO**”
(컄 page 79).
Starting difficulties
For more information, see “Turning off
the engine with the SmartKey”
(컄 page 78).
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘 If you are starting the engine with
Starting with KEYLESS-GO**
Warning!
the starting procedure.
the SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0 and repeat
starting procedure.
G
As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave children unattended in the vehicle, as they could
otherwise accidentally start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle.
왘 If you are starting the engine with
KEYLESS-GO**, close any doors that
may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO**.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1 USA only
2 Canada only
i If the SmartKey’s battery is discharged,
you cannot start the vehicle using the
KEYLESS-GO function. Use the SmartKey instead.
왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is
set to P.
or
왘 Start the engine with the SmartKey as
radio signals from another source
may be interfering with the SmartKey
컄컄
with KEYLESS-GO**.
왘 Do not depress the accelerator.
71
Getting started
Driving
컄컄 왘 Repeat the starting procedure
(컄 page 70). Remember that extend-
ed starting attempts can drain the
battery.
왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 421).
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in
the fuel supply system.
왘 Notify an authorized Maybach
Parking brake
Warning!
Warning!
G
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the rear wheels
to lock up. You could lose control of the
vehicle and cause an accident. In addition,
the vehicle’s brake lights do not light up
when the parking brake is engaged.
Studio.
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could release the parking brake,
which could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
왘 Release the parking brake by pulling
on handle 1.
The warning lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster goes out.
1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal
72
Getting started
Driving
! If you hear a warning signal and the mes-
Driving off
왘 Firmly depress brake pedal.
The gear selector lever lock is released.
왘 Move gear selector lever to
position D or R.
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on
the brake pedal.
! In order to avoid damaging the transmission,
앫
wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion
앫
place the gear selector lever in position P
or R only when the vehicle is stopped.
왘 Release the brake pedal.
왘 Carefully depress the accelerator ped-
sage RELEASE PARKING BRAKE appears in the
multifunction display when driving off, you
have forgotten to release the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
! Do not run cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine
speeds may shorten the service life of the engine.
Switching on headlamps
Low beam headlamps
The exterior lamp switch is located on
the dashboard to the left of the steering
wheel.
i Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the
locking knobs drop down.
The automatic door lock feature can be deactivated (컄 page 176).
You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to
do so.
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine performance and causes premature
brake and drivetrain wear.
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This
could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS
will not prevent this type of loss of control.
Exterior lamp switch
1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B.
The low beam headlamps and the
green indicator lamp C in the exterior lamp switch come on.
al.
For more information, see “Driving instructions” (컄 page 297).
73
Getting started
Driving
High beam
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Turn signals
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Combination switch
Combination switch
Combination switch
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
1 Turn signal, right
2 Turn signal, left
왘 Push combination switch in direction
왘 Press combination switch in direction
1 Single wipe
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
2 Switching on windshield wipers
of arrow 1.
of arrow 1 or 2.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
The high beam headlamps and the
high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
come on (컄 page 22).
The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp L or K in the instrument cluster flashes (컄 page 22).
! Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on a windshield might scratch the glass
and/or damage the windshield wipers blades
when wiping occurs on a dry windshield. If it
is necessary to operate the windshield wipers
in dry weather conditions, always operate the
windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid (컄 page 75).
For more information on headlamps,
see “Lighting” (컄 page 142).
The combination switch resets automatically after major steering wheel movements.
i To signal minor directional changes such
as changing lanes, press combination switch
only to point of resistance and release. The
corresponding turn signals will flash three
times.
74
Getting started
Driving
Switching on windshield wipers
왘 Turn the combination switch to the
desired position depending on the intensity of the rain.
0
Windshield wipers off
I
Intermittent wiping
II
Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed
Intermittent wiping
! Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield
cleaning. Windshield wipers will operate in
the presence of water sprayed on the windshield, and windshield wipers may be damaged as a result.
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt
on the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects may cause the windshield wipers to wipe
in an undesired fashion. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the
windows. You should therefore switch off the
windshield wipers when weather conditions
are dry.
Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield.
왘 Turn the combination switch to posi-
tion I.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by
the rain sensor.
i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when
the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
opened. This protects persons getting into or
out of the vehicIe from being sprayed.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when
앫
i To prevent smears on the windshield or
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with
windshield washer fluid every now and then
even when it is raining.
! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediately.
앫
all doors are closed
앫
and
앫
the gear selector lever is in position D or R
앫
the wiper setting is changed using the
combination switch
Single wipe
왘 Press the combination switch briefly
in direction of arrow 1 to the resistance point.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘 Press the combination switch in direc-
tion of arrow 1 past the resistance
point.
The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid.
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
or
or
앫
For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a
safe location and
turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button
(컄 page 61) and open the driver’s
door (with the driver’s door open,
starter switch is in position 0, same as
with SmartKey removed from the
starter switch)
before attempting to remove any blockage.
앫
Remove blockage.
앫
Turn the windshield wipers on again.
If windshield wipers fail to function at all in
the combination switch position I:
앫
Set the combination switch to the next
higher wiper speed.
앫
Have the windshield wipers checked at
the nearest authorized Maybach Studio.
75
Getting started
Driving
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 311).
Problems while driving
The engine runs erratically and misfires
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘 Do not start the engine under any cir-
앫
An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫
The engine electronics may not be
operating properly.
왘 Notify local fire and/or police author-
앫
Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged
it.
If the extent of the damage cannot be
determined:
왘 Give very little gas.
왘 Have the problem repaired by an au-
thorized Maybach Studio as soon as
possible.
The coolant temperature is above 248°F
(120°C)
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
soon as possible and turn off the engine. Allow engine and coolant to
cool off.
왘 Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (컄 page 310).
왘 If problem persists, call
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
76
In case of accident
cumstances.
ities.
왘 Notify an authorized Maybach
Studio.
If no damage can be determined on the
앫
major assemblies
앫
fuel system
앫
engine mount:
왘 Start the engine in the usual manner.
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Warning!
Slowly release brake pedal.
Parking brake
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
앫
Warning!
Turn the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO** to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button
(컄 page 61).
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to
keep in mind that a considerably higher
degree of effort is necessary to brake or
steer the vehicle.
Warning!
앫
앫
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO** with you and lock
vehicle when leaving.
G
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the rear wheels
to lock up. You could lose control of the
vehicle and cause an accident. In addition,
the vehicle’s brake lights do not light up
when the parking brake is engaged. Make
sure not to endanger any other road users
when you engage the parking brake.
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
damage to the vehicle drivetrain, as a result of vehicle movement, before turning
off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal
컄컄
77
Getting started
Parking and locking
컄컄 왘 Step firmly on parking brake
pedal 2.
Warning!
When the engine is running, the
warning lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster will be illuminated.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could release the parking brake
and/or move the gear selector lever from
position P, either of which could result in
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in
position P is dangerous. Also, when parked
on an incline, position P alone may not
prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly
hitting people or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 70).
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
Turning off the engine
Warning!
G
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle has come to a complete stop. With
the engine not running, there is no power
assistance or the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in
mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle.
왘 Place the gear selector lever in
Switching off headlamps
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 73).
position P.
i Always set the parking brake in addition
to shifting to position P.
For more information, see “Lighting”
(컄 page 142).
On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the
curb.
Turning off the engine with the
SmartKey
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
i The SmartKey can only be removed from
the starter switch with the gear selector lever
in position P.
78
Getting started
Parking and locking
i With the SmartKey removed and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not switched off.
Turning off the engine with
KEYLESS-GO**
왘 Place the gear selector lever in P.
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (컄 page 61) until the engine
shuts off.
With the driver’s door closed, the
starter switch is now in position 1.
With the driver‘s door open, the
starter switch is set to position 0,
same as SmartKey removed from the
starter switch. The immobilizer is activated.
i In an emergency you can turn off the engine while driving by pressing and holding the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button for approximately 3 seconds.
i If you hear a warning signal, you have
tried to turn off the engine while the gear selector lever is not in P.
Place the gear selector lever in P.
Releasing seat belts
왘 Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 69).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the
latch plate.
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so
that the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot
get caught or pinched in the door or in the
seat mechanism. This can damage the seat
belt and impair the effectiveness of the seat
belt, and/or cause damage to the door and/or
door trim panel. Such damage is not covered
by the Maybach Limited Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact
an authorized Maybach Studio.
Locking
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the
door openings when closing the doors. Be
especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
왘 Exit the vehicle and close all doors
and the trunk.
79
Getting started
Parking and locking
i If you hear a warning signal you have for-
Locking with KEYLESS-GO**
gotten to switch off the headlamps before
opening the driver’s door.
In addition the message TURN OFF LIGHTS appears in the multifunction display.
Switch off the headlamps.
Locking with the SmartKey
왘 After exiting the vehicle, press lock
button ‹ on the SmartKey
(컄 page 58).
With the trunk and all doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see “SmartKey”
(컄 page 114).
1 Lock button
왘 After exiting the vehicle, press lock
button 1 on the outside door handle
or on the trunk lid (컄 page 126).
With the trunk and all doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see “ SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO**” (컄 page 117).
80
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
81
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are
앫
Seat belts (컄 page 92)
앫
Child restraints (컄 page 95)
앫
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH) (컄 page 99)
Additional protection potential provide
앫
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
with
i For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint
systems for infants and children, see “Children
in the vehicle” (컄 page 95).
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running.
This facilitates early detection of malfunctions. The 1 indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up when the
ignition is switched on and goes out no
later than a few seconds after the engine
has been started.
앫
Airbags (컄 page 83)
The SRS components are in operational
readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is
not lit when the engine is running.
앫
Airbag control unit (with crash
sensors)
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫
Emergency tensioning device
(ETD) for seat belts (컄 page 95)
앫
fails to go out after approximately
4 seconds after the engine was
started
앫
does not come on at all
앫
comes on after the engine was
started or while driving
Airbag system components with
앫
Front passenger front airbag off indicator lamp (컄 page 91)
앫
Front passenger seat with Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 88)
Although independent systems, their
protective effects work in conjunction
with each other.
82
Warning!
G
Modifications to or work improperly conducted on restraint systems (such as seat
belts and anchors, emergency tensioning
devices, seat belt force limiters or airbags)
or their wiring, as well as tampering with
interconnected electronic systems, can
lead to the restraint systems no longer
functioning as intended.
Airbags or emergency tensioning devices,
for example, could deploy inadvertently or
fail to deploy in accidents although the deceleration threshold for airbag deployment is exceeded. Therefore, never modify
the restraint systems. Do not tamper with
electronic components or their software.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Maybach Studio immediately to have the
system checked; otherwise the SRS may not
be activated when needed in an accident,
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
In addition, improper repair work on
the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended airbag
deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
If it is necessary to modify an airbag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact your local authorized Maybach
Studio or call our Maybach Assistance
Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach
(1-866-367-6292) for details.
Airbags
Warning!
Warning!
G
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal
impacts (front airbags), side impacts (side
impact airbags and window curtain airbags) or rollovers (head protection window curtain airbags). However, no system
available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the airbags temporarily
releases a small amount of dust from the
airbags. This dust, however, is neither injurious to your health, nor does it indicate a
fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause
some temporary breathing difficulty for
people with asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get
out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. If you have any breathing difficulty but
cannot get out of the vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening
a window or door.
G
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
airbags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in
a properly seated position and to wear
your seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the seat backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure it
is properly positioned on your body.
Since the airbag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and
hands on steering wheel position will help
to keep you at a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of
position or too close to the airbag can be
seriously injured or killed by an airbag as it
inflates with great force in the blink of an
eye:
앫
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the
seat backrest.
컄컄
83
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 앫
앫
Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper
operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver’s
breastbone to the center of the airbag
cover on the steering wheel must be at
least 10 in (25 cm) or more. You should
be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorized
Maybach Studio.
앫
Do not lean with your head or chest
close to the steering wheel or dashboard.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator’s Manual.
앫
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front airbag inflates.
앫
Adjust the front passenger seat as far
as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied.
84
Occupants, especially children, should
never lean their heads in the area of
the door where the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the airbag be
triggered. Always sit nearly upright,
properly use the seat belts and appropriate size infant or child restraint system.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
Warning!
G
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in
the rear seat.
There is a possibility for a side impact airbag related injury if occupants, especially
children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a front side impact
airbag and/or rear side impact airbag
which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury,
please follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where
the front side impact airbag and/or the
rear side impact airbag inflates. This
could result in serious injuries or death
should the front side impact airbag
and/or the rear side impact airbag be
deployed.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
(2) Always sit as upright as possible,
properly use the seat belts, and for
children 12 years old and under, use an
appropriately sized infant or toddler
restraint or booster seat recommended
for the size and weight of the child.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have both rear
mounted seat side impact airbags deactivated, then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so
at an authorized Maybach Studio at an additional cost.
Please contact your local authorized
Maybach Studio or call our Maybach
Assistance Center at
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA), or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
i Airbags are designed to activate only in
certain frontal impacts (front airbags), side
impacts (side impact airbags and window curtain airbags) which exceed preset thresholds
and in certain rollovers (window curtain airbags). Only during these events will they provide their supplemental protection.
The driver and passengers should always wear
their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for
airbags to provide their supplemental protection.
In case of other types of impacts and impacts
below airbag deployment thresholds, airbags
will not deploy. The driver and passenger will
then be protected to the extent possible by a
properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the
best possible protection in a rollover.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of
the airbags in order to avoid wearing your
seat belt.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning device and airbag
Warning!
G
앫
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that
were highly stressed in an accident
must be replaced and their anchoring
points must also be checked. Use only
seat belts installed or supplied by an
authorized Maybach Studio.
앫
Airbags and emergency tensioning
devices (ETDs) are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An airbag or ETD that was activated must be
replaced.
앫
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, seat covers, badges etc. over
the steering wheel hub, front passenger front airbag cover, outboard sides
of the seat backrests, door trim panels,
or door frame trims, and installation of
additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and
wiring. Keep area between airbags
and occupants free from objects (e.g.
packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
앫
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They could tear.
It is important to your safety and that of your
passengers that you replace deployed airbags
and repair any malfunctioning airbags to
make sure that the vehicle will continue to
provide supplemental crash protection for
occupants.
컄컄
85
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 앫
Do not make any modification that
could change the effectiveness of the
seat belts.
앫
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this
may severely weaken them. In a crash
they may not be able to provide adequate protection.
앫
Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles
over the door. These items may turn
into projectiles and cause head and
other injuries when window curtain
airbag is deployed.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat.
Always keep both feet on the floor in
front of the seat.
앫
Airbag system components will be hot
after an airbag has inflated. Do not
touch.
앫
앫
86
In addition, improper repair work on
the SRS creates a risk of rendering
the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on
the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio.
For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the airbag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Maybach Studio.
앫
Given the considerable deployment
speed and the textile structure of the
airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other, potentially more serious
injuries resulting from airbag deployment.
Warning!
Front airbags
G
Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by us for use on Maybach
vehicles. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of
the side impact airbags. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for availability.
When you sell your vehicle, we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an
SRS by alerting them to the applicable
section in the Operator’s Manual.
1 Driver front airbag
2 Front passenger front airbag
Driver’s and front passenger front airbags are deployed:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
앫
independently of the side impact
airbags
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i The front airbags in this vehicle have been
Side impact airbags
Window curtain airbags
1 Front side impact airbags
2 Rear side impact airbags
1 Front window curtain airbag
2 Rear window curtain airbag
The side impact airbags are deployed:
The side window curtain airbags are deployed:
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows
the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on the rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed by the airbag control unit.
On the front passenger side, the front airbag
deployment is additionally influenced by the
passenger’s weight category as identified by
the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 88).
The lighter the front passenger side occupant,
the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for the second stage inflation of the
airbag.
The airbags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
The front passenger front airbag will
only be deployed if:
앫
앫
앫
the system senses that the front passenger seat is occupied
앫
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
independently of the front airbags
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console is not
lit (컄 page 91)
The side impact airbags are not deployed
in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.
the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
The front passenger side impact airbag
will only deploy if the system senses that
the front passenger seat is occupied.
앫
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
independently of the front airbags
앫
in certain vehicle rollovers
The window curtain airbags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed
the system’s deployment threshold.
87
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant Classification System
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
automatically turns the front passenger
front airbag on or off based on the classified occupant weight category determined by weight sensor readings from
the front passenger seat.
i The system does not deactivate the front
passenger side impact airbag, the window
curtain airbag and the emergency tensioning
device.
Occupants must sit properly belted in a
position that is as upright as possible
with their back against the seat backrest
and feet on the floor to be correctly classified. If the occupant’s weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle
(e.g. by leaning on armrests), the OCS
may not be able to properly approximate
the occupant’s weight category.
Furthermore, the occupant weight may
appear to increase or decrease due to objects hanging on the seat, other passengers pushing on the seat, objects lodged
underneath the seat or stuffed between
seat and middle console or between seat
and door or due to objects applying pressure on the back of the seat. Always
make sure that the seat has clearance in
all directions at all times.
88
i If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take
the vehicle to your authorized Maybach
Studio.
Only seat accessories approved by Maybach
may be used.
Both driver and the front passenger
should always use the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication of whether or not the front passenger is properly positioned.
Warning!
G
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the
front passenger seat, have the front passenger re-position himself or herself in the
seat until the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp goes out, or check whether
objects are caught under or around the
seat.
More information about airbag display
messages (컄 page 369).
In the event of a collision, the airbag control unit will not allow front passenger
front airbag deployment when the OCS
classified the front passenger seat occupant as being up to or less than the weight
of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or if the front passenger seat is sensed as being empty.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being
up to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child restraint, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine
is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front airbag is
deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is classified as being empty, the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
will illuminate when the engine is started
and remain illuminated, indicating that
the front passenger front airbag is deactivated.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being
heavier than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint or as being a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small
adult), the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately
6 seconds when the engine is started and
then, depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp illuminated,
the front passenger front airbag is deactivated. With the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp out, the front passenger
front airbag is activated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as an
adult or someone larger than a small individual, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately
6 seconds when the engine is started and
then go out, indicating that the front passenger front airbag is activated.
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp is illuminated, the front passenger
front airbag is deactivated and will not be
deployed.
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp is not illuminated, the front passenger front airbag is activated and will be deployed:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫
independently of the side impact
airbags
If the front passenger front airbag is deployed, the rate of inflation will be influenced by:
앫
the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the airbag control
unit
앫
front passenger’s weight category as
identified by the Occupant
Classification System (OCS).
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear
seats whenever possible. Regardless of
seating position, children 12 years old and
under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt,
the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower
anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Always sit nearly upright, properly use the
seat belts and for children 12 years old and
under, use an appropriately sized infant or
toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
컄컄
child.
89
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 Children can be killed or seriously injured
by an inflating airbag. Note the following
important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
앫
Your vehicle is equipped with airbag
technology designed to turn off the
front passenger front airbag in your
vehicle when the system senses the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child
or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the
front passenger seat.
앫
A child in a rear-facing child restraint
on the front passenger seat will be
seriously injured or even killed if the
front passenger front airbag inflates in
a collision which could occur under
some circumstances, even with the
airbag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to completely
eliminate this risk is to never place a
child in a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat. We therefore strongly
recommend that you always place a
child in a rear-facing child restraint in
the back seat.
90
앫
앫
If you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to
do so, make sure that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front airbag is deactivated.
Should the indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation.
Periodically check the indicator lamp
while driving to make sure the lamp is
illuminated. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp goes out or remains
out, do not transport a child on the
front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or
even killed if the front passenger front
airbag inflates.
If you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible, use the proper child
restraint recommended for the age,
size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle’s
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. For children larger than the typical 12-monthold child, the front passenger front
airbag may or may not be activated
(컄 page 86).
i Deployment of the driver front airbag
does not mean that the front passenger front
airbag also should have deployed.
The Occupant Classification System
(컄 page 88) may have determined:
앫
that the seat was empty or occupied by
the weight up to or less than that of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard child restraint - both instances where
the system suppresses deployment of the
front passenger front airbag even though
the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front
airbag
앫
that the seat was occupied by a small individual (such as a young teenager or a
small adult) or a child weighing more than
the weight of a typical 12-month-old child
in a standard child restraint - instances
where the system may suppress deployment of the front passenger front airbag
even though the impact met the criteria
and was of sufficient severity to deploy
the driver front airbag
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp is located on the upper part of the
front center console.
Warning!
G
If the 1 indicator lamp and the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
are lit at the same time, there is a malfunction in the Occupant Classification System.
The front passenger front airbag will be
deactivated in this case.
In order to ensure proper operation of the
airbag system and OCS:
앫
1 Indicator lamp
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp 1 will be illuminated, except with
the SmartKey removed or in starter
switch position 0 (컄 page 60).
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
앫
Do not place more than 4.4 lb (2 kg)
into the ruffled storage bag on the
back of the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the OCS may not be able to
properly approximate the occupant
weight category.
앫
Do not place objects under and/or
around the front passenger seat.
앫
Do not hang anything from or attach
any items to the seats.
앫
Do not stuff objects such as books between the middle console and the
front passenger seat.
앫
Do not move the front passenger seat
backwards against stiff objects.
앫
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the
seat backrest.
앫
Do not lean on the armrests or lift
yourself from the seat by using the
handle over the door as this may cause
the OCS to be unable to correctly approximate the occupant weight category.
앫
Only have the seat repaired or replaced by an authorized Maybach
Studio.
Self-test Occupant Classification System
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button once or
twice, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp located in the center console
illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly sitting on the front passenger seat
and the system senses the occupant as
being an adult, the PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp will illuminate and go
out after approximately 6 seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
senses the front passenger seat as being
empty, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate and not go
out.
91
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp should not illuminate, the system is
not functioning. You must see an authorized Maybach Studio before seating any
child on the front passenger seat.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 369).
Warning!
G
Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the Occupant
Classification System. The bottom of the
child seat must make full contact with the
passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly
mounted child seat could cause injuries to
the child in case of an accident, instead of
increasing protection for the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
Seat belts
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states, the District of Columbia, the
U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts
fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
For more information on fastening seat
belts, see “Getting started” (컄 page 68).
i For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint
systems for infants and children, see “Children
in the vehicle” (컄 page 95).
Warning!
G
Due to the considerably larger interior
compared to other vehicles, for occupants
in the rear of the vehicle not properly
wearing their seat belts, the risk of injury
in an accident is significantly increased.
They are much more likely to be thrown
around in the vehicle in slight frontal impacts or even during emergency braking
maneuvers.
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in
the rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident. You and your passengers
should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury
or death is lessened if you are properly
wearing your seat belt. Airbags can only
protect as they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.
92
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the
seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If
you slide under it, the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That
could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The seat backrest and seat belt provide the
best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the seat belt is
properly positioned on the body.
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt.
Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear
cabin) can be used in a reclined position
with seat belts properly fastened while the
vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in
the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a seat
belt system and kinematic electronic controls that are designed to maintain proper
support and restraint-system effectiveness
in all seat settings in the event of a collision
or similar situation.
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must
also be checked.
Keep the door storage compartments
closed while the vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to
catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Warning!
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫
Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.
앫
Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts
help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents,
including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver front
airbag, front passenger front airbag,
side impact airbags, window curtain
airbags for side windows), ETD (seat
belt emergency tensioning device),
and front seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted
occupants in certain frontal (front airbags and ETD) and side (side impact,
window curtain airbags and ETD) impacts which exceed preset deployment
thresholds and in certain rollovers
컄컄
(window curtain airbags).
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
Warning!
G
Only use seat belts which have been approved for Maybach vehicles.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to failure of the seat
belts.
G
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Maybach Studio.
93
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 앫
Never wear the shoulder belt under
your arm, against your neck or off your
shoulder. In a crash, your body would
move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The shoulder belt would also
apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or
spleen.
앫
Never wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc.,
as these might cause injuries.
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the lap belt is positioned across
your abdomen, it could cause serious
injuries in a crash.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than
one person at a time. Do not fasten a
seat belt around a person and another
person or other objects.
앫
Seat belts should not be worn twisted.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full
width of the seat belt to manage impact forces. The twisted seat belt
against your body could cause injuries.
94
앫
Pregnant women should also always
use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt
portion should be positioned as low as
possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard or on the seat.
Always keep both feet on the floor in
front of the seat.
Enhanced seat belt reminder system
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < will always illuminate for
6 seconds to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
when the engine is started, an additional
warning chime will also sound for a maximum of 6 seconds or until the driver’ s
seat belt is fastened.
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
front passenger’s seat belt (with the
front passenger seat occupied) is not fastened with front doors closed,
앫
the seat belt telltale < remains illuminated for as long as either the
driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt
is not fastened.
앫
and if the vehicle speed once exceeds
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt
telltale < starts flashing and a
warning chime sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of
60 seconds or until the driver’s and
the front passenger’s seat belt are
fastened.
If you and/or your passenger release
the seat belt during driving, the seat
belt telltale < starts flashing and
the warning chime sounds.
If the driver’s or the front passenger’s
seat belt remains unfastened after
60 seconds, the warning chime stops
sounding, the seat belt telltale <
stops flashing but continues to be illuminated.
After a vehicle standstill the warning
chime is reactivated and the seat belt
telltale < is flashing again if the
vehicle speed once exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h).
The seat belt telltale < will only go
out if both the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt (with the front passenger
seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is
opened.
For more information, see “Practical
hints” (컄 page 357).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts for the front and rear outer seats are equipped with emergency
tensioning devices and seat belt force
limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases:
앫
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding the system deployment threshold
앫
in certain vehicle rollovers
앫
if the restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly, see
1 indicator lamp (컄 page 82).
In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the seat belts in
such a way that the seat belts fit more
snugly against the body. Seat belt force
limiters reduce the force exerted by the
seat belts on occupants during a crash.
i The ETDs for the front seats will only activate if the respective front seat belt is fastened (latch plate properly inserted into
buckle).
The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate
with or without the respective seat belt fastened.
When activated, emergency tensioning
devices remove slack from the seat belts.
Seat belt force limiters reduce the force
exerted by the seat belts on occupants
during a crash.
Warning!
G
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you
in the vehicle:
왘 Secure the child using an infant or
child restraint appropriate to the age
and size of the child.
왘 Make sure the infant or child is prop-
erly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
An emergency tensioning device (ETD)
that was activated must be replaced.
When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at your authorized Maybach Studio.
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
An automatic comfort-fit feature for
front seats reduces the retracting force
of the seat belts when they are in normal
use.
Warning!
G
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. The children could
앫
injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
앫
be seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or
cold
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
metal parts, for example, could become
very hot, and the child could be burned on
these parts.
If children open a door, they could
앫
injure other persons
앫
get out of the vehicle and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic 컄컄
95
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment or trunk unless
they are firmly secured in place. For more
information, see “Loading” (컄 page 247)
and “Useful features” (컄 page 248).
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
앫
strong braking maneuvers
앫
sudden changes of direction
앫
an accident
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle
and let seat belt retract completely. The
seat belt can again be used in the usual
manner.
Warning!
G
Never release the seat belt buckle while
the vehicle is in motion, since the special
seat belt retractor will be deactivated.
i For more information on child seats with
Infant and child restraint systems
mounting fittings for tether anchorages
(컄 page 98).
We recommend all infants and children
be properly restrained at all times while
the vehicle is in motion.
For information on LATCH-type child seat anchors (컄 page 99).
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the
District of Columbia, the U.S. territories
and all Canadian provinces.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child
restraint instructions for mounting. Then
pull the shoulder belt out completely
and let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting sound can be heard to
indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The seat belt is now
locked. Push down on child restraint to
take up any slack.
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured in
accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions for the child restraint, that
complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards 213 and 225 and
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 210.2.
96
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with these standards can be found on the instruction
label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant or child restraint
system, be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s instructions for
installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant
or child restraints.
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear
seats whenever possible. Regardless of
seating position, children 12 years old and
under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt,
the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower
anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Always sit nearly upright, properly use the
seat belts and for children 12 years old and
under, use an appropriately sized infant or
toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured
by an inflating airbag. Note the following
important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
앫
Your vehicle is equipped with airbag
technology designed to turn off the
front passenger front airbag in your
vehicle when the OCS senses the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child
or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the
front passenger seat.
앫
A child in a rear-facing child restraint
on the front passenger seat will be
seriously injured or even killed if the
front passenger front airbag inflates in
a collision which could occur under
some circumstances, even with the airbag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to completely
eliminate this risk is to never place a
child in a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat. We therefore strongly
recommend that you always place a
child in a rear-facing child restraint in
the back seat.
앫
If you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to
do so, make sure that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front airbag is deactivated.
Should the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp not illuminate or go out
while the restraint is installed, please
check installation. Periodically check
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp while driving to make sure the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp is illuminated. If the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp goes out or
remains out, do not transport a child
on the front passenger seat until the
system has been repaired. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat will be seriously injured
or even killed if the front passenger
front airbag inflates.
앫
If you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible, use the proper child
restraint recommended for the age,
size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle’s
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. For
children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger front airbag may or may not be activated (컄 page 86).
97
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
Installing infant and child restraint
systems
This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
the rear seating positions.
Head restraint must be positioned such
that the top tether strap can pass freely
between the head restraint and top of
seat back.
왘 Make sure the tether strap is not
twisted.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint.
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
seat belt positioning for children over 41 lb
until they reach a height where a lap/
shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
the seat belt to prevent the child restraint
from becoming a projectile in the event of
an accident.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; even if the children are secured in
a child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause serious
personal injury.
98
1 Cover of top anchorage ring
왘 Bring the rear seat backrest to a fully
upright position (컄 page 131).
왘 Open cover 1 to access anchorage
ring.
왘 Guide tether strap between head re-
straints and top of seat back.
2 Hook
3 Anchorage ring
왘 Securely fasten hook 2, which is part
of the tether strap, to anchorage
ring 3.
i For safety, please make sure the hook 2
has attached to the ring 3 beyond the safety
catch, as illustrated.
Once the top tether anchorage hook is
attached, the child restraint itself can be
secured. Tighten the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왘 Close cover after removing the tether
strap.
Warning!
Warning!
G
Never adjust the rear seat position after installing the child restraint. Adjusting the
rear seat position after installing the child
restraint could damage the child restraint
and/or introduce undesirable slack into the
webbing and loosen or misposition the
child restraint, lessening the effectiveness
of the child restraint and thus increasing
the chance or severity of injury in an accident.
G
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children
over 41 lb until they reach a height where
a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
booster.
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions.
To enable the child seat to perform its protective function,
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type
앫
the rear seat backrest must be fully upright (컄 page 131)
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) type anchors (at each of the
outer rear seats) for the installation of a
LATCH child seat with the matching anchor fittings.
앫
the seat cushion must be tilted fully
downwards (컄 page 131).
The child seat must be firmly attached to
the right and left side anchors 2
(컄 page 100).
Warning!
G
Never adjust the rear seat position after installing the child restraint. Adjusting the
rear seat position after installing the child
restraint could damage the child restraint
and/or introduce undesirable slack into the
webbing and loosen or misposition the
child restraint, lessening the effectiveness
of the child restraint and thus increasing
the chance or severity of injury in an accident.
i Vehicles with a rear center seat*:
Make sure the seat belt for the center seat can
operate freely with a child seat installed.
i Non-LATCH type child seats may also be
used and can be installed using the vehicle’s
seat belt system. Install child seat according to
the manufacturer’s instructions.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may
come loose during an accident which could
result in serious injury or death to your
child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats
or child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in
a child restraint system.
99
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The LATCH-type anchors are located between the seat cushion and the backrest.
t.
Override switch for rear passenger
compartment
You can disable select functions in the
rear passenger compartment for added
safety (for instance when you have children riding in the rear passenger compartment).
The override switch is located in the
driver’s door.
You can disable the following functions
in the rear passenger compartment:
앫
rear door windows operation
(컄 page 209)
앫
1 Indicates the position of the anchors
2 Anchor
cigarette lighter in the rear
(컄 page 262)
앫
왘 Bring the rear seat backrest to a fully
upright position (컄 page 131).
adjusting the front passenger seat
position from the rear (컄 page 135)
앫
왘 Adjust the seat cushion tilt fully
downwards (컄 page 131).
12-V socket in the rear center console
(컄 page 266)
앫
closing the partition* from the rear
(컄 page 271)
왘 Install child seat according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
100
1 Deactivating override switch
2 Activating override switch
Activating override switch
왘 Press switch 2.
The functions in the rear are disabled.
i The rear door windows can still be operated with the switches located in the driver’s
door.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Deactivating override switch
왘 Press switch 1.
The functions in the rear are enabled
again.
Warning!
G
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the
window opening.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
For information, see “Power windows”
(컄 page 209).
101
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
Panic alarm
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
왘 Press  button again.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
왘 Insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
1 Â Panic button
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
102
Activating
왘 Press and hold  button for at
least 1 second.
An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate briefly.
Deactivating
or
KEYLESS-GO** in the starter switch.
or
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop
button (컄 page 61).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information
on the following driving safety systems:
앫
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
앫
BAS (Brake Assist System)
앫
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
앫
Electro-hydraulic brake system
Warning!
Braking
ABS
G
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
앫
Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫
Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫
Following another vehicle too closely
The ABS, BAS, ESP® and electro-hydraulic
brake system cannot reduce this risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
i In winter operation, the ®maximum effec-
tiveness of the ABS, BAS, ESP and electro-hydraulic brake system is only achieved with
winter tires (M + S tires), or snow chains as required.
Warning!
G
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead.
Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces
braking effectiveness.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure so that the
wheels do not lock during braking. This
allows you to maintain the ability to
steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even to light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch
on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running.
If the ABS activates during braking, the
ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster dial flashes. Because of
the electro-hydraulic brake system, you
will not feel any pulsation in the brake
pedal.
왘 Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal.
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by
the ABS, namely braking power and the
ability to steer the vehicle.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v flashes
whenever the ABS is activated which can
be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to
take extra care while driving.
Emergency brake maneuver
왘 Keep continuous full pressure on the
brake pedal.
103
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS
and the ESP® are also switched off.
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the
wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability and extending
the braking distance.
Warning!
G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, following another
vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS
equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
For more information on ABS, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 354).
104
BAS
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance.
왘 Apply continuous full braking pres-
sure until the emergency braking situation is over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal.
The BAS is then deactivated.
Warning!
G
If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning normally, but without the additional brake boost available
that BAS would normally provide in an
emergency braking maneuver. Therefore,
the braking distance may increase.
Warning!
G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The
BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
ESP®
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is running and monitors the vehicle’s traction
(force of adhesive friction between the
tires and the road surface) and handling.
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is
spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
applying brakes to the appropriate
wheel and by limiting engine output, the
ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. The
ESP® is especially useful while driving off
and on wet or slippery road surfaces. The
ESP® also stabilizes the vehicle during
braking and steering maneuvers.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster flashes when the ESP®
is engaged.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when
the engine is running.
Warning!
G
Never switch off the ESP® when you see
the ABS/ ESP® warning lamp v flashing
in the instrument cluster. In this case proceed as follows:
in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
! Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine must be turn off (SmartKey in
starter switch position 0 or 1 or
KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button in position 0
or 1) when
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
앫
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
앫
the parking brake is being tested on a
brake test dynamometer
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
앫
the vehicle is being towed with the front/
rear axle raised.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
Active braking action through the ESP® may
otherwise seriously damage the brake system.
The ESP® cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.
i The ESP® will only function properly if
you use wheels of the recommended tire size
(컄 page 436).
Warning!
G
The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded. The
ESP® cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP®
equipped vehicle must never be exploited
For more information on ESP®, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 354)
and (컄 page 368).
Electronic traction system
The electronic traction system is a component of the ESP®.
The electronic traction system improves
the vehicle’s ability to utilize available
traction, especially under slippery road
conditions by applying the brakes to a
spinning wheel.
105
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
When you switch off the ESP®, the electronic traction system is still enabled.
Warning!
G
If you are driving too fast, the electronic
traction system cannot reduce the risk of
an accident.
The electronic traction system cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle.
To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn
off the ESP® in driving situations where it
would be advantageous to have the
drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as:
앫
you cannot activate the cruise control
or the Distronic** system
앫
the cruise control or the Distronic**
system switch off if currently activated
앫
when driving with snow chains
앫
in deep snow
앫
in sand or gravel
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
more drive wheels are spinning, the ABS/ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrument cluster
flashes. However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the vehicle.
Warning!
Switching off the ESP®
Warning!
106
The ESP® switch is located on the lower
part of the front center console.
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will
not stabilize the vehicle when it is starting
to skid or a wheel is spinning.
G
The ESP® should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of
the system will reduce vehicle stability in
driving maneuvers.
G
When you switch off the ESP®
앫
the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
앫
the engine output is not limited,
which allows the drive wheels to spin
and thus cut into surfaces for better
grip
앫
the traction control will still apply the
brakes to a spinning wheel
앫
the ESP® continues to operate when
you are braking
1 ESP® switch
왘 With the engine running, press
ESP® switch 1 until the ABS/ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrument
cluster comes on.
The ESP® is switched off.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
When the ABS/ESP® warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off. Vehicle stability in standard
driving maneuvers reduces.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP®.
! Avoid spinning of a drive® wheel for an ex-
tended period with the ESP switched off.
This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Maybach
Limited Warranty.
Switching on the ESP®
왘 Press ESP® switch 1 until the ABS/
ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with the ESP® switched on.
Electro-hydraulic brake system
The electro-hydraulic brake system combines a hydraulic brake circuit with electronically controlled brake servo
assistance. You have increased braking
safety and improved braking comfort.
Warning!
G
Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated in the instrument cluster, for example
by the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada
only) red brake warning lamp. Refer to the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 360). Also
read and observe the messages in the instrument cluster display (컄 page 364).
Warning!
G
The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake
system operation and switch it into its
emergency operation mode. In such a case,
the red brake warning lamp (컄 page 360)
and warning messages in the instrument
cluster come on while driving (see
page 378 to page 381). To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater
brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected
braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may only
be applied to the front wheels. Stopping
distance is increased!
If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that
the vehicle be transported with all wheels
off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar
must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing
methods and the vehicle requires towing
with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not
to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle”
(컄 page 423).
107
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
The electro-hydraulic brake system is automatically activated when you:
앫
unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or the KEYLESS-GO**
앫
open the driver’s or passenger door
앫
turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1
앫
in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**, press
the start/stop button (컄 page 61) on
gear selector lever once
앫
depress the brake pedal
앫
release the parking brake
i If the electro-hydraulic brake system is activated when the brake pedal is first depressed, you may feel a reduced pedal
resistance and longer pedal travel than normal. When releasing the pedal, you may also
feel the brake pedal pulsate and you may hear
a sound which is caused by the activation of
the electro-hydraulic brake system pump. This
is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Pedal travel returns to normal when you
release the brake pedal and depress it again
and the sound soon ceases.
If you experience a reduced pedal resistance
and longer pedal travel while driving and the
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 360) illuminates and/or warning messages appear in the
instrument cluster (see page 378 to page 381),
the brake system is malfunctioning. Follow
108
the instructions of the warning message(s)
and have the brake system checked immediately.
Warning!
G
Have brake pad replacement and other
work on the electro-hydraulic brake system carried out by qualified technicians
only. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for further information. The electrohydraulic brake system must be deactivated prior to working on the system. High
pressure is intermittently built up in the
system as part of its automatic self-test. In
addition, the system is automatically activated when the vehicle is unlocked by remote control, when the driver’s or
passenger door is opened, when the starter switch is in position 1, when the brake
pedal is depressed or when the parking
brake is released. Failure to deactivate the
system prior to maintenance will cause
brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to
leak, which may result in injuries (contusions and acid burns). Extended brake pistons may also cause injury.
The electro-hydraulic brake servo assistance switches off automatically:
앫
approximately 20 seconds after you
locked the vehicle from outside
앫
approximately 2 minutes after you
앫
turned the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 or removed
the SmartKey
앫
pressed the KEYLESS-GO** start/
stop button (컄 page 61) to turn
off the engine or power supply
and opened the driver’s door
(with driver’s door open, the starter switch is set to position 0, same
as SmartKey removed from starter
switch)
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Note on driving with the electro-hydraulic brake system
앫
Following extended periods of only
minor loads to your brake system,
you should occasionally apply the
brakes when traveling at high speeds.
This improves the grip of the brake
pads.
Warning!
앫
Only components approved by us for
use on Maybach vehicles (e.g. brake
pads) should be installed on your vehicle. Brake pads not approved by us
for use on Maybach vehicles may impair the safety of your vehicle.
G
Be very careful not to endanger other road
users when you apply the brakes.
앫
After driving on wet or snow-covered
roads, you should apply your brakes
firmly before parking your vehicle.
This produces heat which serves to
dry the brake disks and help prevent
corrosion.
앫
On long and steep grades, shift to a
lower gear (gear range 1, 2 or 3) to
prevent the brakes from overheating
and to reduce brake wear.
앫
After hard braking, it is advisable to
drive on for some time so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes
faster.
109
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Activating
With the SmartKey
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the start-
er switch.
With KEYLESS-GO**
왘 Turn off the engine by means of the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄 page 61).
왘 Open the driver’s door.
Deactivating
Anti-theft alarm system
Once the alarm system has been armed,
a visual and audible alarm is triggered
when someone opens
앫
a door
앫
the trunk
앫
the hood
the immobilizer.
In case the engine cannot be started (yet the
vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not
operational. Contact an authorized Maybach
Studio or call
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
110
The indicator lamp located below the
hazard warning flasher switch in on the
upper part of the front center console.
The alarm will stay on even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
앫
the vehicle is opened with the mechanical key
앫
someone opens a door from the inside
앫
someone opens the trunk with the
emergency release button
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
i Starting the engine will also deactivate
Arming the alarm system
i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system
provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to
and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available.
1 Indicator lamp
왘 Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO**.
The turn signal lamps flash three
times to indicate that the alarm system is activated. The indicator
lamp 1 flashes to indicate that the
alarm system is armed.
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
times, one of the following elements may not
be properly closed:
Canceling the alarm
앫
a door
앫
왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
the trunk
Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again.
Disarming the alarm system
왘 Unlock your vehicle.
The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is disarmed.
i The alarm system will rearm automatically
again after approximately 40 seconds if no
door was opened.
With the SmartKey
switch.
or
왘 Press Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey.
With KEYLESS-GO**
왘 Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
Tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual and audible alarm will be triggered
when someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system
provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to
and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available.
Arming the tow-away alarm
왘 Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey
or
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (컄 page 61).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
or KEYLESS-GO**.
The tow-away alarm is automatically
armed after about 30 seconds.
Disarming the tow-away alarm
To prevent triggering the tow-away
alarm feature, switch off the tow-away
alarm before towing the vehicle, or
when parking on a surface subject to
movement, such as a ferry or auto train.
The button is located on the overhead
control panel.
111
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Canceling the alarm
With the SmartKey
왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
or
왘 Press Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey.
With KEYLESS-GO**
왘 Grasp an outside door handle.
1 Tow-away alarm off button
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
왘 Switch off the ignition and remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch.
i You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm if
the ignition is switched on.
왘 Press button 1.
The indicator lamp in the button
comes on briefly.
왘 Exit the vehicle and lock it with the
SmartKey or (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO**) with the lock button
at each outside door handle or trunk
lid.
i When you unlock your vehicle, the towaway protection disarms automatically.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until
you lock your vehicle again.
112
or
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (컄 page 61).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Automatic climate control
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Electrotransparent roof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
113
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section, you
will find detailed information on how to
operate the equipment installed on your
vehicle. If you are already familiar with
the basic functions of your vehicle, this
section will be of particular interest to
you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the
basic functions of the vehicle, refer to
the “Getting started” section of this
manual. The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each
segment.
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control
and a removable mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each
SmartKey unit.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk
앫
the fuel filler flap
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is advisable to only unlock the
vehicle when you are in close proximity
to it.
For more information on locking and unlocking, see “Getting started”
(컄 page 58) and (컄 page 77).
SmartKey with remote control
1
2
3
4
5
6
 Panic button (컄 page 102)
‹ Lock button
Š Opening button for trunk
Mechanical key locking tab
ΠUnlock button
Battery check lamp
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.
114
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is
possible for children to open a locked door
from the inside, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
앫
Have the vehicle batteries and their connections checked (컄 page 417).
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an
authorized Maybach Studio.
(1) This device may not cause interference,
and
Factory setting
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Global unlocking
왘 Press button Œ.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i When you unlock the vehicle, the electrohydraulic brake system is activated
(컄 page 107).
i You can also open and close the windows
and the tilt/sliding sunroof using the
SmartKey.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:
! If you can no longer lock or unlock the ve-
앫
hicle with the SmartKey, then either the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the
SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle batteries are drained.
neither a door nor the trunk is
opened
앫
the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch
앫
the central locking switch is not activated
앫
Check the batteries in the SmartKey and
replace them if necessary (컄 page 405).
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door (컄 page 401) and the trunk
(컄 page 402).
앫
Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s
door (컄 page 401) and the trunk
(컄 page 127).
115
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global locking
Selective setting
Global locking
왘 Press button ‹.
If you frequently travel alone, you may
wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
왘 Press button ‹.
With the trunk and all doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds
until battery check lamp 6
(컄 page 114) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as
follows:
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘 Press button Œ once.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knob in the driver’s door
moves up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
Global unlocking
왘 Press button Œ twice.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
116
With the trunk and all doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Restoring to factory setting
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds
until battery check lamp 6 flashes
twice.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO
come with two SmartKeys with
KEYLESS-GO, each with remote control
and a removable mechanical key.
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and
or serious personal injury.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys with
KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help
distinguish each SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO unit.
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
validity of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is checked every time you
grasp an outside door handle.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid, your vehicle unlocks
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk
앫
the fuel filler flap
G
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
1
2
3
4
5
6
 Panic button (컄 page 102)
‹ Lock button
Š Opening button for trunk
Mechanical key locking tab
ΠUnlock button
Battery check lamp
i When any outside door handle other than
the driver’s outside door handle is grasped,
the vehicle is centrally unlocked.
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to
high levels of electromagnetic radiation.
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
117
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference,
and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i When you unlock the vehicle, the electrohydraulic brake system is activated
(컄 page 107).
i You can also open and close the windows
and the tilt/sliding sunroof using the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
! If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO,
then either the batteries in the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO are discharged, the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or the vehicle batteries are drained.
앫
Check the batteries in the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO and replace them if necessary
(컄 page 405).
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door (컄 page 401) and the trunk
(컄 page 402).
앫
Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s
door (컄 page 401) and the trunk
(컄 page 127).
앫
Have the vehicle batteries and their connections checked (컄 page 417).
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
앫
You can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(컄 page 114).
앫
You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions
(e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
locking with button ‹).
앫
Always carry the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
앫
Never store the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO together with:
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
앫
Electronic items such as a mobile
phone or another SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO
앫
Metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil
Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.
118
앫
To lock or unlock the vehicle, the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located outside the vehicle within approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
trunk lid.
앫
If the vehicle has been parked for
more than 72 hours, you must pull an
outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
앫
앫
In order to start the engine with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
앫
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be located in the vehicle.
앫
The brake pedal must be firmly
depressed. Do not depress the accelerator.
앫
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
positioned farther away from the vehicle, the system may no longer recognize the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO. The vehicle then cannot
be locked or the engine started via
the KEYLESS-GO system.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
removed from the vehicle (e.g. if passenger exits the vehicle with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO).
앫
when pressing the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button or trying to lock
the vehicle with the outside door
handle the message KEY NOT
DETECTED appears in the multifunction display
앫
with the engine running, the message KEY NOT DETECTED appears in
the multifunction display while
driving off.
Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
or change its present location immediately (e.g. place it on the front passenger seat or insert it in shirt
pocket).
앫
If you have started the engine with
the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
you can turn it off again with:
앫
the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
앫
the SmartKey inserted in the starter switch, when gear selector lever in position P
앫
Remember that the engine can be
started by anyone with a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside
the vehicle.
Possibility 1: (One SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, one
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside
the vehicle): If you leave the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO behind
when exiting and locking the vehicle,
no message appears in the multifunction display.
Possibility 2: (One SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, no
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside
the vehicle): When exiting and trying
to lock the vehicle, the message KEY
STILL IN VEHICLE appears in the multifunction display. The vehicle will
not be locked.
119
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting
Global locking
Global unlocking
왘 Press the lock button on an outside
door handle (컄 page 80) or trunk lid
(컄 page 121).
왘 Grasp an outside door handle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:
앫
앫
neither a door nor the trunk is
opened
the central locking switch is not activated
With the trunk and all doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
i You can also lock the vehicle using the
KEYLESS-GO lock button on the trunk lid
(컄 page 121) or KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch (컄 page 126).
Selective setting
i The vehicle could be inadvertently unlocked if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle and
If you frequently travel alone, you may
wish to reprogram the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO so when you grasp the driver’s outside door handle only the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap unlocks.
앫
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
앫
an outside door handle is splashed with
water, or
you attempt to clean an outside door handle.
simultaneously for about 5 seconds
until battery check lamp 6
(컄 page 117) flashes twice.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
then function as follows:
120
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘 Grasp the driver’s outside door han-
dle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knob in the driver’s moves up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
Global unlocking
왘 Grasp any outside door handle other
than the driver’s outside door handle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
Global locking
왘 Press the lock button on an outside
door handle (컄 page 80).
With the trunk and all doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
i You can also lock the vehicle using the
KEYLESS-GO lock button on the trunk lid
(컄 page 121) or KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch (컄 page 126).
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Restoring to factory setting
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds
until battery check lamp 6
(컄 page 117) flashes twice.
Global locking using KEYLESS-GO lock
button on the trunk lid
Checking batteries in the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
왘 Press button Œ or ‹.
Battery check lamp 6 (컄 page 117)
comes on briefly to indicate that the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO batteries are in order.
! If battery check lamp 6 does not come on
briefly during check, then the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged.
Replace the batteries (컄 page 405).
You can obtain the required batteries at any
authorized Maybach Studio.
i If the batteries are checked within signal
range of the vehicle, pressing button Πor
‹ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly.
Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO**
If you lose a SmartKey, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you
should do the following:
왘 Have the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO deactivated by an authorized Maybach Studio.
왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey,
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the
mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.
왘 If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced.
Your authorized Maybach Studio will be
glad to supply you with a replacement.
1 KEYLESS-GO lock button on trunk lid
왘 Press lock button 1.
With the trunk and all doors closed,
all turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
i You can also lock the vehicle using the
lock button on an outside door handle
(컄 page 80) or KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch (컄 page 126).
121
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
i If the vehicle has previously been locked
using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, opening a door from the inside will trigger the
anti-theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
앫
Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO**
start/stop button (컄 page 61).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
inside the vehicle.
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
i If you hear a warning signal you have forgotten to switch off the headlamps before
opening the driver’s door.
In addition the message TURN OFF LIGHTS appears in the multifunction display.
Switch off the headlamps.
122
Front doors
왘 Pull on door handle 2 on the respec-
tive front door to open door.
If door was locked, locking knob 1
will move up.
Rear doors
왘 Pull up locking knob 1 on the re-
spective rear door to unlock door.
왘 Pull on door handle 2 on the respec-
tive rear door to open door.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the rear doors automatically
from the inside (Maybach 62)
You can close the rear doors automatically.
Warning!
The remote rear door closing switch is
above the rear door.
Opening the trunk
Warning!
G
Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, such as blocked visibility,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. These fumes are damaging to your
health.
G
Only drive with the doors closed. Otherwise, one or more of the doors could open
while the vehicle is in motion, putting you
and/or others at risk.
You can open the trunk from the inside
if the vehicle is stationary.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the
door opening when closing the door. Be
especially careful when small children are
around.
In case of danger, release the remote rear
door closing switch to stop the closing procedure.
1 Remote rear door closing switch
왘 Pull switch 1 until the door is com-
pletely closed.
왘 If necessary, pull the door into its lock
by hand.
A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft
(1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
! The trunk lid swings open automatically.
Always make sure there is sufficient overhead
clearance.
왘 Release switch 1 to interrupt proce-
dure.
i You can also close the rear doors by hand.
123
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the trunk from the outside
Opening the trunk from the inside
Closing the trunk
Warning!
G
Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, such as blocked visibility,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. These fumes are damaging to your
health.
i Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
1 Handle
1 Remote trunk opening/closing switch
왘 Press and hold button Š on the
왘 Pull switch 1 until the trunk lid
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** until the trunk unlocks and begins to open.
or
왘 Pull on handle 1.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO**:
The vehicle must be unlocked.
! To stop the opening procedure, press
button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO**.
i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately (컄 page 127).
124
begins to open.
The trunk opens. You will see the
symbol Ê in the multifunction display until you close the trunk.
! To stop the opening procedure, press or
pull trunk opening/closing switch 1.
i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately (컄 page 127).
i If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after
closing it. All turn signal lamps flash three
times to confirm locking.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: To prevent a
possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk will
open automatically if a SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** is recognized inside the vehicle
or in the trunk.
The vehicle is only locked when the turn signals flash three times. If you are carrying a second SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** with you,
you can still lock the vehicle.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been
piled too high) in the upper motion sequence,
the closing procedure is stopped and the
trunk re-opens slightly.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk from the inside
Warning!
Closing the trunk from the outside
automatically
G
Warning!
Maintain sight of trunk area while operating the remote trunk opening/closing
switch. Monitor the closing procedure
carefully to make sure no one is in danger
of being injured. To interrupt the closing
procedure, release the remote trunk opening/closing switch.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle,
the remote trunk opening/closing switch
can be operated. Therefore, do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result
in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
1 Remote trunk opening/closing switch
왘 Press and hold switch 1 until the
symbol Ê disappears from the multifunction display and the trunk is
closed.
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
do one of the following:
앫
press button Š on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
앫
press or pull the remote trunk opening/closing switch 1 (on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel)
앫
press the KEYLESS-GO** locking/closing switch 1 (컄 page 126)
앫
pull the trunk lid handle
To interrupt the closing procedure:
왘 Release the remote trunk opening/
closing switch.
i You can also close the trunk by hand.
G
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch, the trunk closing switch can
be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
125
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
You can close the trunk separately.
Closing the trunk and locking the vehicle
from the outside (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO**)
You can close the trunk and lock the vehicle simultaneously.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO**
1 Trunk closing switch
1 Trunk closing switch
왘 Press switch 1 briefly.
The trunk closes.
i You can also close the trunk by hand.
1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
왘 Make sure you have the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO with you.
왘 Press switch 1 briefly.
With all doors closed, the locking
knobs in the doors move down and
the trunk starts to close automatically.
All turn signal lamps flash three times
to confirm locking once the trunk has
closed completely. The anti-theft
alarm system is armed.
i You can also close the trunk by hand.
126
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Trunk emergency release
With the emergency release button, the
trunk can be opened from inside the
trunk.
Illumination of the emergency release
button:
앫
The button flashes for 30 minutes after opening the trunk.
앫
The button flashes for 60 minutes after closing the trunk.
Valet trunk
i To deny any unauthorized person access
to the trunk, e.g. when you valet park the vehicle, lock it separately with the mechanical
key. Leave only the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO** less its mechanical key
with the vehicle.
i The emergency release button does not
unlock the trunk if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected.
i If the vehicle has previously been locked
using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, opening the trunk from the inside using the emergency release button will trigger the antitheft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
1 Emergency release button
왘 Briefly press emergency release
button 1.
The trunk unlocks and opens slightly.
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
1 Neutral position
2 Locked
앫
왘 Close the trunk (컄 page 124).
왘 Push up the trunk lid to fully open.
i The emergency release button unlocks
the trunk while the vehicle is standing still or
in motion.
Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button (컄 page 61).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
inside the vehicle.
왘 Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (컄 page 401).
왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.
왘 Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 2 and remove the mechanical key in that position to lock the
trunk.
127
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
The trunk remains locked even when the
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
i You can only cancel the separate trunk
locking mode by means of the mechanical
key.
왘 Turn the mechanical key counter-
clockwise to neutral position 1
(컄 page 127) and remove the mechanical key in that position to unlock the trunk.
You can now open the trunk
(컄 page 123).
Power closing assist for doors and
trunk lid
It is not necessary to slam the door or
trunk lid closed. A pneumatic power assist mechanism draws doors and trunk lid
closed quietly and automatically once
the door or trunk lid has been latched.
When the pneumatic power-assisted
mechanism has stopped, doors and/or
trunk can be re-opened.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the
door or trunk opening when closing a door
or the trunk. Be especially careful when
small children are around.
128
Power closing assist for doors
왘 Press the doors gently past the initial
engage position into the lock.
The doors close automatically.
Warning!
G
Only drive with the doors closed. Otherwise, one or more of the doors could open
while the vehicle is in motion, putting you
and/or others at risk.
Power closing assist for trunk lid
왘 Press the trunk lid gently into its lock.
The trunk closes automatically.
In case of danger, pull the respective inside
or outside door handle, or pull on trunk lid
handle.
Warning!
To prevent personal injury, never activate
the closing assist mechanism by tampering
with the door or trunk lid latch.
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
G
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Automatic central locking
The doors and the trunk automatically
lock when the ignition is switched on
and the wheels are turning at speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
Locking and unlocking from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
i The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact exceeds a
preset threshold.
The vehicle locks automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning
at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h) or more. You could therefore lock
yourself out when the vehicle
앫
is pushed or towed
앫
is on a test stand
You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system
(컄 page 176).
Warning!
G
Driver’s switches
1 Central locking switch
2 Central unlocking switch
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
trunk from inside using the central locking switch. This can be useful, for example, if you want to lock the vehicle
before starting to drive.
The fuel filler flap will not be locked or
unlocked with the central locking or unlocking switch, respectively.
Your vehicle is equipped with locking
and unlocking switches for the driver
and rear seat passengers.
Rear seat passengers’ switches (example illustration from Maybach 57)
1 Central locking switch
2 Central unlocking switch
129
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking
왘 Press central locking switch 1.
If all doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
Unlocking
왘 Press central unlocking switch 2.
The vehicle unlocks.
i You can open a locked door from inside
Rear seat passenger switches (Maybach 57
with rear center seat*)
at any time. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
1 Central locking switch
2 Central unlocking switch
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, it will
not unlock using the central unlocking
switch 2.
130
Rear seat passenger switches (Maybach 62
with rear center seat*)
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
central locking switch 1:
1 Central locking switch
2 Central unlocking switch
앫
and the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** is set to factory settings,
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a
door is opened from the inside
앫
and the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** is set to selective settings,
only the door opened from the inside is
unlocked
Controls in detail
Seats
Seats
For more information on seat adjustment, see “Adjusting” (컄 page 62).
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
Rear seats
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the
seat back in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If
you slide under it, the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That
could cause serious or fatal injuries. The
seat backrest and seat belts provide the
best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and seat belts are properly positioned on the body.
Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear
cabin) can be used in a reclined position
with seat belts properly fastened while the
vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in
the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a seat
belt system and kinematic electronic controls that are designed to maintain proper
support and restraint-system effectiveness
in all seat settings in the event of a collision
or similar situation.
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 68).
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back
of the head at eye level. This will reduce
the potential for injury to the head and
neck in the event of an accident or similar
situation.
The seats can also be operated with the respective door is open. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Head restraint tilt
For information on front seat head restraint adjustment, see “Adjusting”
(컄 page 64).
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle.
Maybach 57
1 Head restraints
2 Head restraint side cushions
131
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear seat adjustment (Maybach 57)
왘 Open the respective door.
i To adjust settings for the right rear passenger seat, make sure the right rear passenger seat adjustment button is selected
(컄 page 135).
왘 Press switch up or down in direction
i The memory function (컄 page 140) lets
you store settings for the seat positions.
Head restraint tilt
i The rear center seat* cannot be adjusted.
! When moving the seat, make sure there
Maybach 62
are no items in the footwell or behind the
seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats.
왘 Adjust the side cushions of the head
direction of arrow 2.
Seat backrest tilt
왘 Press switch forward or backward in
removal and installation of the head restraints.
왘 In addition to adjusting the head re-
straint tilt using the corresponding
power control on the rear door control panel, the angle of the head restraint can also be adjusted manually.
Push or pull on the lower edge of the
head restraint cushion.
i The functions for adjusting backrest tilt
and seat fore and aft are linked functions.
When the seat is adjusted fore and aft, the
backrest tilt is adjusted simultaneously, and
vice versa.
1
2
3
4
5
Head restraint height
Head restraint tilt
Seat backrest tilt
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Seat cushion tilt
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
or
132
왘 Press switch forward or backward in
i Tilt the seat backrest to the rear for easier
restraints by hand.
that it is as close to the head as possible.
of arrow 1.
direction of arrow 3 until your arms
are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
1 Head restraints
2 Head restraint side cushions
i Adjust the head restraint in such a way
Head restraint height
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘 Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 4.
Seat cushion tilt
왘 Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow 5 until your upper legs are
lightly supported.
Controls in detail
Seats
왘 Press and hold switch 1 until seat is
Rear seat adjustment (Maybach 62)
in desired position.
i To adjust settings for the right rear pas-
To stop the seat adjustment procedure, release switch 1.
senger seat, make sure the right rear passenger seat adjustment button is selected
(컄 page 135).
왘 To adjust seat to upright position,
i The memory function (컄 page 140) lets
press switch 2.
you store settings for the seat positions.
왘 Press and hold switch 2 until seat is
! When moving the seat, make sure there
in desired position.
are no items in the footwell or behind the
seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats.
i The rear center seat* cannot be adjusted.
To stop the seat adjustment procedure, release switch 2.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
a
Fully reclined position
Upright position
Head restraint height
Head restraint tilt
Seat backrest tilt
Seat cushion depth
Seat cushion tilt
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Leg rest length
Leg rest tilt
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
or
왘 Open the respective door.
Fully reclined/upright position
왘 To adjust seat to fully reclined posi-
tion, press switch 1.
Head restraint height
왘 Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow 3.
Head restraint tilt
왘 Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 133).
Seat backrest tilt
왘 Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 5 until your arms
are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
i The functions for adjusting backrest tilt
and seat fore and aft are linked functions.
When the seat is adjusted fore and aft, the
backrest tilt is adjusted simultaneously, and
컄컄
vice versa.
133
Controls in detail
Seats
컄컄 Seat cushion depth
왘 Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 6 until your legs
are supported comfortably.
Seat cushion tilt
왘 Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow 7 until your upper legs are
lightly supported.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘 Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 8 (컄 page 133).
Extending and retracting the rear seat
head restraints
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear seat head restraints in the extended
position when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct
the retracting/extending operation of the
head restraints.
Retracting rear seat head restraints
왘 Press switch 1.
The rear seat head restraints retract.
Extending rear seat head restraints
왘 Press switch 1 again.
The rear outer seat head restraints
extend to your last set position.
or
Leg rest length
왘 Adjust the head restraints with the
왘 Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow 9 (컄 page 133) to adjust
seat adjustment switches in the rear
passenger compartment.
the leg rest length.
i When you fasten your seat belt in the
rear, the respective rear outer seat head restraint extends to your last set position.
Leg rest tilt
왘 Press switch up or down in direction
of arrow a (컄 page 133) to adjust
i The rear center seat* head restraint cannot be extended using the switch in the front
center console. Use the switch on the lower
right side of the rear center seat.
the leg rest tilt.
1 Switch for rear seat head restraints
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
134
i You can only retract the rear seat head restraints when no rear seat passenger is wearing a seat belt.
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear center seat* head restraint adjustment
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.
Setting front passenger seat position
from rear
This function lets you adjust the position
of the front passenger seat from the
right rear passenger seat.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back
of the head at eye level. This will reduce
the potential for injury to the head and
neck in the event of an accident or similar
situation.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
1 Extending
2 Retracting
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
or
왘 Open a rear door.
왘 Press switch 1 and hold it.
The rear seat head restraint extends
until you release the switch.
왘 Press switch 2 and hold it.
The rear seat head restraint retracts
until you release the switch.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle,
the rear center seat head restraint can be
operated when a rear door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
1
2
3
4
5
6
Front passenger seat adjustment
Right rear passenger seat adjustment
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Seat cushion tilt
Seat backrest tilt
Head restraint height
135
Controls in detail
Seats
Warning!
G
When adjusting the front passenger seat,
make sure the seat, if occupied, is as far
from the passenger front airbag as possible.
Otherwise, the passenger could be
seriously or even fatally injured in the
event of an accident or braking maneuver.
Make sure no one can be caught or injured
while the seat is being adjusted.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle,
the power seats can be operated when the
respective door is open. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
! Do not move the front passenger seat
completely forward if objects are stored in the
front passenger-side footwell.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
or
왘 Open the right rear passenger door.
왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 135).
136
왘 Adjust passenger seat to desired position using switches 3 (컄 page 135)
through 6 (컄 page 135).
왘 To adjust right rear passenger seat,
press button 2 (컄 page 135).
i If you simultaneously operate an adjustment switch in the rear and on the front passenger side, no adjustment will take place.
i Maybach 62:
If the rear seat is in reclined position, the adjustment of the front passenger’s
앫
seat backrest and
앫
longitudinal position
Multicontour seats
The multicontour seat has a movable
seat cushion and inflatable air cushions
built into the seat backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion movement, seat backrest cushion height and curvature can be
continuously varied with switches on the
right side of the seat on the driver side,
or the left side of the seat on the passenger side.
i Vehicles with rear center seat*: The rear
center seat is not a multicontour seat.
toward the rear is restricted.
i Adjusting the front passenger seat position from the rear is not possible if you activate the override switch (컄 page 100).
Driver’s seat/front passenger seat
1
2
3
4
Lumbar region support
Shoulder region support
Side bolster adjustment
Massage function (PULSE)
Controls in detail
Seats
The switches for the rear seats on
Maybach 57 are located on the inner side
of the seat.
The switches for the rear seats on
Maybach 62 are located on the outer side
of the seat.
Shoulder region support
왘 Press æ or ç on switch 2.
The air cushion inflates or deflates.
Side bolster adjustment
왘 Adjust the side bolsters so that they
provide good lateral support using
switch 3.
i When the engine is turned off, the last
cushion setting is retained in memory, and the
cushion is automatically adjusted to this setting when the engine is restarted.
Massage function (PULSE)
Rear seats (Maybach 57)
Rear seats (Maybach 62)
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Lumbar region support
Shoulder region support
Side bolster adjustment
Massage function (PULSE)
Lumbar region support
Shoulder region support
Side bolster adjustment
Massage function (PULSE)
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
Lumbar region support
왘 Press k or j on rocker
switch 1.
This selects the air cushion you wish
to adjust.
You can reduce muscle tension during
long trips by periodically using the massage function.
왘 Press button 4.
The indicator lamp on button 4
comes on. The air cushions in the lumbar region inflate and deflate rhythmically.
i The massage function switches off automatically after approximately 8 minutes. The
indicator lamp goes out.
왘 Press æ or ç on rocker
switch 1.
The air cushion inflates or deflates.
137
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching on seat heating
Seat heating
The red indicator lamps in the switch
show the heating level selected.
왘 Press switch 1.
Three red indicator lamps in the
switch come on.
Level
3
왘 Continue pressing switch 1 until de-
Three indicator lamps on
(highest level).
sired seat heating level is reached.
Switching off seat heating
After approximately
5 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 2.
2
Two indicator lamps on.
After approximately
10 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 1.
1
One indicator lamp on
(lowest level).
After approximately
20 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched off.
off
No indicator lamp on.
i The rear center seat* cannot be heated.
138
왘 Press switch 1 repeatedly until all inExample illustration from Maybach with seat
ventilation*
1 Seat heating switch
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
dicator lamps in the switch go out.
i If one or all of the lamps on the seat heating switch are flashing, there is insufficient
voltage due to too many electrical consumers
are turned on. The seat heating switches off
automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat ventilation*
The blue indicator lamps in the switch
show the ventilation level selected:
Level
3
Three indicator lamps on
(highest level).
2
Two indicator lamps on.
1
One indicator lamp on
(lowest level).
off
No indicator lamp on.
Switching on seat ventilation
Switching off seat ventilation
왘 Press switch 1.
왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 139) repeat-
Three blue indicator lamps in the
switch come on.
왘 Continue pressing switch 1 until the
desired seat ventilation level is
reached.
i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat
can be activated using summer opening feature (컄 page 211).
edly until all indicator lamps go out.
i If one or all of the lamps flash on the seat
ventilation switch, there is insufficient voltage
due to too many electrical consumers being
switched on. The seat ventilation switches off
automatically.
The seat ventilation will switch back on again
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
i The rear center seat* cannot be ventilated.
1 Seat ventilation switch
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
139
Controls in detail
Memory function
Memory function
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver
should check and adjust the seat height,
seat position fore and aft, and seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The
head restraint should also be adjusted
for proper height. See also the section on
airbags (컄 page 83) for proper seat positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the inside and
outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision.
With the memory function you can store
up to five different settings.
Each stored position on the driver’s side
includes the following settings:
앫
Driver’s seat, backrest and head restraint position
앫
Multicontour seat: previously saved
setting
앫
Steering wheel position
앫
Interior rear view mirror position
앫
Exterior rear view mirrors position
Warning!
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and 210.2.
G
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Each stored position on the front passenger side and in the rear passenger compartment includes the following
settings:
140
앫
Front and rear outer seats, backrest
and head restraint positions
앫
Multicontour seats: previously saved
settings
The memory button and stored position
buttons are located on the respective
door.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
1 Memory button M
2 Memory position buttons 1 - 5
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
or
왘 Open the respective door.
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing positions in memory
왘 Adjust the seats, steering wheel and
mirrors to the desired position
(컄 page 62).
왘 On the driver’s side: adjust the steering wheel (컄 page 64) and the rear
view mirrors (컄 page 66) to the de-
sired position.
왘 Press memory button M.
왘 Release memory button M and push
memory position button 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
within 3 seconds.
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position
For easier parking you can adjust the passenger exterior rear view mirror so that
you can see the right rear wheel as soon
as you engage reverse gear R.
For information on activating the parking position, see “Activating exterior
rear view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 187).
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.
왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on
(컄 page 60).
왘 Press button 1.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
왘 Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
with button 2 so that you see the
rear wheel and the road curb.
왘 Press memory button 3.
왘 Within 3 seconds, press bottom of ad-
justment button 2.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.
All the settings are stored at the selected position.
i If the mirror does move, repeat the above
steps. After the setting is stored, you can
move the mirror again.
Recalling positions from memory
! Do not operate the power seats using the
memory button if the seat backrest is in an extremely reclined position. Doing so could
cause damage to front or rear seats.
First move seat backrest to an upright position.
왘 Press and hold memory position
button 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 until the seat,
steering wheel and mirrors have fully
moved to the stored positions.
i Releasing the button immediately stops
movement to the stored positions.
1 Exterior rear view mirror (passengerside)
2 Adjustment button
3 Memory button M
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
141
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
Exterior lamp switch
For information on how to switch on the
headlamps and use the turn signals,
see “Switching on headlamps”
(컄 page 73) and “Turn signals”
(컄 page 74).
2 ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn
left one stop)
3 M Off
i If you drive in countries where vehicles
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 144)
drive on the other side of the road than the
country where the vehicle is registered, you
must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams. Relevant information can
be obtained at an authorized Maybach
Studio.
i The active Bi-Xenon headlamps monitor
your steering angle and driving speed, then
automatically shift their beams to either side
to better follow the curvature of the road
ahead, increasing usable illumination over
conventional headlamps.
1 ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left
two stops)
4 U Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 144)
Exterior lamp switch
5 C Parking lamps (also side
marker lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps, instrument panel lamps)
6 B Low beam headlamps or high
beam headlamps when the
combination switch is pushed
forward. The tail lamps, license plate lamps, side marker lamps, parking lamps and
instrument panel lamps also
come on.
7 ‡ Front fog lamps
8 † Rear fog lamp
142
Controls in detail
Lighting
i If you hear a warning signal you have forgotten to switch off the headlamps before
opening the driver’s door.
Warning!
In addition the message TURN OFF LIGHTS appears in the multifunction display.
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
Switch off the headlamps.
앫
the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses
bright ambient light, for example light
from oncoming traffic.
앫
the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions.
Manual headlamp mode
The low beam headlamps and parking
lamps can be switched on and off with
the exterior lamp switch.
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi-
tion B.
Automatic headlamp mode
The following lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light:
앫
Low beam headlamps
앫
Tail and parking lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
G
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U.
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/
stop button pressed once, only the
parking lamps and the side marker
lamps will switch on and off automatically.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the license plate lamps,
and the side marker lamps will switch
on and off automatically.
i USA only:
With the automatic headlamp mode activated
you can switch on the high beam headlamps
in low ambient lighting conditions.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible
for the operation of the vehicle’s lights at
all times.
143
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
Canada only
USA only
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
The daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
tivated and the exterior lamp switch in
position M or U, you cannot switch on
the high beam headlamps.
By default, the daytime running lamp
mode is deactivated. Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system, see “Setting daytime
running lamp mode (USA only)”
(컄 page 173).
The high beam flasher is available at all times.
i With the daytime running lamp mode ac-
For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
switch in position B to permit activation of
the high beam headlamps.
tivated and the exterior lamp switch in
position M, you cannot switch on the high
beam headlamps.
When the engine is running, and you
shift from a driving position to
position N or P, the low beam headlamps
will switch off with a 3-minute delay.
The high beam flasher is available at all times.
position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps are switched on.
In low ambient light conditions, the
following lamps will switch on additionally:
앫
tail and parking lamps
앫
license plate lamps
앫
side marker lamps
i With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the engine running, you cannot
switch off the low beam headlamps manually.
For nighttime driving you should turn
the exterior lamp switch to position B
to permit activation of the high beam
headlamps.
i With the daytime running lamp mode ac-
When the engine is running, and you
앫
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C, the parking lamps and
the side marker lamps switch on additionally.
앫
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B, the manual headlamp
mode has priority over the daytime
running lamp mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on (컄 page 407).
144
For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
switch in position B or U to permit activation of the high beam headlamps.
When the engine is running, and you
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C or B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime
running lamp mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
on (컄 page 142).
Controls in detail
Lighting
Locator lighting and night security
illumination
Locator lighting and night security
illumination are described in the control
system section under “Setting locator
lighting” (컄 page 173) and “Setting
night security illumination”
(컄 page 174).
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps
왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch to
왘 Switch on the low beam
headlamps B (컄 page 73).
first stop.
왘 Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
The front fog lamps switch on.
The front fog lamps remain lit.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄 page 142).
The rear fog lamp switches off.
Combination switch
왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch.
Warning!
G
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, only switch from position U
to B with the vehicle at a standstill in
a safe location. Switching from U to
B will briefly switch off the headlamps.
Doing so while driving in low ambient
lighting conditions may result in an accident.
i Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on.
Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction
with low beam headlamps. Consult your State
or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation.
The front fog lamps switch off.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)
왘 Switch on the low beam
headlamps B (컄 page 73).
왘 Pull out exterior lamp switch to sec-
ond stop.
Combination switch
The front fog lamps and the rear fog
lamp switch on.
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄 page 142).
i Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
exterior lamp switch in position U. For
switching on the fog lamps, turn exterior
lamp switch to position B first.
145
Controls in detail
Lighting
High beam
왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B (컄 page 142).
왘 Push the combination switch in direc-
Corner-illuminating lamps
The corner-illuminating lamps improve
illumination of the area in the direction
into which you are turning.
tion of arrow 1 to switch on the high
beam.
The corner-illuminating lamps will operate with the engine running and with:
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on.
앫
왘 Pull the combination switch in direc-
tion of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
goes out.
High beam flasher
왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 2.
Driving forward
Switching on corner-illuminating lamps
왘 Switch on the left or right turn signal
(컄 page 74), depending on whether
you are turning left or right.
The respective corner-illuminating
lamp comes on and illuminates the
area in the direction into which you
are turning.
the exterior lamp switch in
position B (컄 page 142)
or
앫
the exterior lamp switch in
position U (컄 page 142)
or
앫
or
왘 Turn steering wheel in desired direc-
tion.
the daytime running lamp mode activated (컄 page 173)
i With the automatic headlamp mode activated: The corner-illuminating lamps will only
come on in low ambient lighting conditions.
i If you are driving faster than 25 mph
(40 km/h) or have the front fog lamps
switched on, the corner-illuminating function
is not available.
The corner-illuminating lamp on the
side of your steering direction comes
on.
i If you have switched on the turn signal for
one side but turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction, the corner-illuminating lamp
comes on for the side indicated by the turn
signal.
The corner-illuminating lamp remains lit for a
maximum of 3 minutes. Afterward, it goes out
even if the turn signal is still switched on.
i The corner-illuminating lamps
temporarily come on on both sides of the
vehicle if you turn the steering wheel in one
direction and then again in the other
direction shortly thereafter.
146
Controls in detail
Lighting
i The corner-illuminating lamps will come
Driving in reverse
on automatically depending on the steering
angle, even if you did not switch on either
turn signal.
Switching on corner-illuminating lamps
If the corner-illuminating lamps came on automatically, they will also go out automatically depending on the steering angle.
Switching off the corner-illuminating
lamps
The combination switch for the turn signal resets automatically after major
steering wheel movements. This will
switch off the corner-illuminating lamps
if they were activated by switching on
the left or right turn signal.
The corner-illuminating lamp opposite to your steering direction comes
on.
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter
switch or with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle.
Switching off corner-illuminating lamps
The hazard warning flasher switches on
automatically when an airbag deploys.
왘 Place the gear selector lever in
position R.
왘 Place the gear selector lever out of
position R.
The respective corner-illuminating
lamp goes out.
The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the upper part of the front center console.
If the turn signal should stay on after
making the turn, the turn signal and corner-illuminating lamp can be switched
off by returning the combination switch
to its original position.
i There may be a brief delay before the corner-illuminating lamps switch off.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
147
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on hazard warning flasher
왘 Press the hazard warning flasher
switch 1.
Interior lighting in the front
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
All turn signals flash.
i The interior lighting is factory-set to automatic mode.
Deactivating
i With the hazard warning flasher activat-
왘 Press automatic control switch 3.
ed and the combination switch set for either
left or right turn, only the respective left or
right turn signal will operate when the
ignition is switched on.
The interior lighting remains
switched off in darkness, even when
you:
Switching off hazard warning flasher
왘 Press hazard warning flasher
switch 1 again.
i If the hazard warning flasher has been
activated automatically, press hazard warning
flasher switch 1 once to switch it off.
Automatic control
1
2
3
4
5
Left front reading lamp on/off
Rear interior lighting on/off
Automatic control on/off
Front interior lighting on/off
Right front reading lamp on/off
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫
open a door
Activating
왘 Press automatic control switch 3.
The interior lighting switches on in
darkness when you:
! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
앫
unlock the vehicle
Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the
engine turned off could result in a discharged
battery.
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫
open a door
The interior lighting switches off automatically following a preset time delay
(컄 page 175).
For more information, see “Setting interior lighting delayed switch-off”
(컄 page 175).
148
Controls in detail
Lighting
i If a door remains open, the interior lighting switches off automatically after approximately 5 minutes.
Manual control
Switching front reading lamps on and
off
The front reading lamps are integrated
into the interior rear view mirror.
왘 Press front reading lamp switch 1
Switching front interior lighting on and
off
왘 Press front interior lighting switch 4.
The front interior lighting switches
on.
or 5 to switch on the desired front
reading lamp.
Interior lighting in the rear
The control panel is located between the
rear seats.
! Leaving an interior light switch in the ON
position for extended periods of time with the
engine turned off could result in a discharged
battery.
왘 Press front reading lamp switch 1
or 5 again to switch off the respective front reading lamp.
왘 Press front interior lighting switch 4
again.
The front interior lighting switches
off.
Switching rear interior lighting on and
off
왘 Press rear interior lighting switch 2.
The rear interior lighting switches on.
왘 Press rear interior lighting switch 2
again.
The rear interior lighting switches
off.
Maybach 57 with rear door window curtains*
1
2
3
4
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Ambient lighting on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting
5 Rear interior lighting on/off
149
Controls in detail
Lighting
Maybach 57 with rear door window curtains*
(vehicles with rear center seat*)
Maybach 57 without rear door window curtains*
Maybach 57 without rear door window curtains* (vehicles with rear center seat*)
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Ambient lighting on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting
5 Rear interior lighting on/off
150
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Rear interior lighting on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting
5 Ambient lighting on/off
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Rear interior lighting on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting
5 Ambient lighting on/off
Controls in detail
Lighting
Maybach 62 with tilt/sliding sunroof
1
2
3
4
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Headliner lamps on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting and headliner lamps
5 Ambient lighting on/off
6 Rear interior lighting on/off
Maybach 62 with tilt/sliding sunroof (vehicles
with rear center seat* in storage compartment/drawer)
1
2
3
4
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Headliner lamps on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting and headliner lamps
5 Ambient lighting on/off
6 Rear interior lighting on/off
Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof*
1
2
3
4
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Roof lighting on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting/roof lighting
5 Ambient lighting on/off
6 Rear interior lighting on/off
151
Controls in detail
Lighting
Rear reading lamps
Headliner lamps
왘 Press respective switch 1 or 2
In Maybach 62 with tilt/sliding sunroof,
the headliner lamps can be illuminated.
at X symbol to switch the corresponding rear reading lamps on.
왘 Press respective switch 1 or 2
at X symbol again to switch the
corresponding rear reading lamps
off.
Ambient lighting
Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof*
(vehicles with rear center seat* in storage
compartment/drawer)
1
2
3
4
Left rear reading lamp on/off
Right rear reading lamp on/off
Roof lighting on/off
Thumbwheel for dimming ambient
lighting/roof lighting
5 Ambient lighting on/off
6 Rear interior lighting on/off
The ambient lighting switches on and off
automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
You can switch on or off ambient lighting manually.
왘 Press the switch at the ð symbol to
switch the ambient lighting on.
왘 Press the switch at the ð symbol to
switch the ambient lighting off.
Manual control
Dimming ambient lighting, headliner
lamps and roof lighting*
Rear interior lighting
왘 Turn thumbwheel 4 until the cur-
왘 Press the switch at the ò symbol to
switch the rear interior lighting on.
왘 Press the switch at the ò symbol
again to switch the rear interior lighting off.
152
rent ambient lighting has reached
the desired intensity.
왘 Press switch 3 to switch the headlin-
er lamps on.
왘 Press switch 3 to switch the headlin-
er lamps off.
Electrotransparent roof lighting*
In Maybach 62 with an electrotransparent roof, the roof lining can be illuminated when the screen is closed.
왘 Press switch 3 to switch the roof
lighting on.
왘 Press switch 3 to switch the roof
lighting off.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Courtesy lighting
For better orientation in the dark, courtesy lamps will illuminate the interior of
your vehicle as follows.
With the automatic control activated:
앫
the inside door handles
앫
the driver’s and passenger footwells
앫
rear passengers’ footwells
(only Maybach 62)
With the automatic control activated
and the starter switch position 1
see “Starter switch positions”
(컄 page 60):
앫
the inside door handles
앫
the center console
Door entry lamps
For better orientation in the dark, the
corresponding door entry lamps will
switch on in darkness when you open a
door and the automatic control is activated.
Trunk lamp
The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is
opened.
If the trunk lid remains open, the trunk
lighting switches off automatically after
approximately 10 minutes.
The door entry lamps will switch off
when the corresponding door is closed.
i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for
approximately 5 minutes.
i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the exterior headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately 5 minutes.
153
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument cluster, see “At a glance”
(컄 page 22).
If you open a door or press reset
button J without turning on the ignition or the light, the multifunction display is only illuminated for
approximately 30 seconds.
Adjusting instrument cluster illumination
You can change the instrument cluster
settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of the control system
(컄 page 172).
Warning!
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.
1 Reset button J
The instrument cluster is activated when
you:
앫
open a door
앫
switch on the ignition (컄 page 60)
앫
press reset button J
앫
switch on the exterior lamps
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions,
such as speed or outside temperature,
warning/ indicator lamps, malfunction/
warning messages or the failure of any systems. Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Visit an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
1 Knob for instrument cluster illumination
Use the knob for instrument cluster illumination 1 to adjust the illumination
brightness for the instrument cluster.
i The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to suit
ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will also
be adjusted automatically when you switch on
the vehicle’s exterior lamps.
왘 Press the knob for instrument cluster
illumination.
The knob will pop out.
154
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
! Excessive coolant temperature trigger a
warning in the multifunction display
(컄 page 384).
To brighten illumination
왘 Turn the knob clockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination
will brighten.
To dim illumination
왘 Turn the knob in the instrument clus-
ter counterclockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination
will dim.
Coolant temperature gauge
Warning!
앫
앫
G
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may
have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be
seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away
from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get
out of the vehicle and do not stand near
the vehicle until the engine has cooled
down.
The engine should not be operated with the
coolant temperature above 248° F (120°C), i.e.
in the red zone of the coolant temperature
gauge. Doing so may cause serious engine
damage which is not covered by the Maybach
Limited Warranty.
i During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature
may rise close to 248°F (120°C), i.e. close to the
red zone of the coolant temperature gauge.
Resetting trip odometer
왘 Make sure you are viewing the trip
odometer display (컄 page 157).
왘 If it is not displayed, press
button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until
the trip odometer appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 157).
왘 Press and hold reset button J
(컄 page 154) in the instrument clus-
ter until the trip odometer is reset.
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed.
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds,
as it may result in serious engine damage that
is not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking.
Outside temperature indicator
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the
road surface is free of ice. The road may
still be icy, especially in wooded areas or
on bridges.
The outside temperature is indicated in
the instrument cluster for the driver
(컄 page 23) and in the roof lining
for the rear seat passengers
(컄 pages 31, 33, 35 or 37).
155
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during
idling or slow driving. Therefore, the accuracy of the displayed temperature can
only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor, not
by comparison to external displays (e.g.
bank signs etc.).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving
your garage), you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate
temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling
or slow driving.
156
Speedometer
The speed is indicated in the instrument
cluster for the driver (컄 page 23) and in
the roof lining for the rear seat passengers (컄 pages 31, 33, 35 or 37).
The segments in the speedometer of the
instrument cluster show you which speed
range is available to you.
앫
Cruise control operation:
Segments come on from the stored
speed to the maximum speed.
앫
Distronic** operation:
One or two segments come on in the
range for the stored speed.
Clock
The time is indicated in the instrument
cluster for the driver in the tachometer
display (컄 page 23) and in the roof lining
for the rear seat passengers
(컄 pages 31, 33, 35 or 37).
You can adjust the clock using the
COMAND system. Refer to the separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual
System operating instructions.
Controls in detail
Control system
Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1 or the
KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button is
pressed once (컄 page 61). The control
system enables you to
앫
call up information about your vehicle
앫
change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the multifunction display,
and much more.
i The displays for the audio systems (radio,
CD player) will appear in English, regardless of
the language selected.
Warning!
G
Multifunction display
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions
permit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
1 Trip odometer
2 Main odometer
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
157
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
1 Multifunction display
Operating control system
2 Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume:
Press button
æ
up/to increase
ç
down/to decrease
3 Telephone:
Press button
s
to take a call
to dial a call
to redial
t
to end a call
to reject an incoming call
4 Menu systems:
Press button
è
for next menu
ÿ
for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu:
Press button
158
j
for next display
k
for previous display
Depending on the selected menu
(컄 page 160), pressing the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction
display.
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus,
each containing a number of functions
or submenus.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD
operations under AUDIO, for example).
These functions serve to call up relevant
information or to customize the settings
for your vehicle.
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and
the functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
앫
If you press button è or ÿ
repeatedly, you will pass through
each menu one after the other.
앫
If you press button k or j
repeatedly, you will pass through
each function display, one after the
other, in the current menu.
In the SETTINGS menu, instead of functions you will find a number of submenus
for calling up and changing settings. For
instructions on using these submenus,
see “Settings menu” (컄 page 170).
The number of menus available in the
system depends on which optional
equipment is installed in your vehicle.
The menus are described on the following pages.
159
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus
160
This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.
The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1
Standard
display
Menu 2
Audio
Menu 3
Telephone
Menu 4
Navigation
Menu 5
Distronic**
Menu 6
Menu 7
Menu 8
Trip computer Vehicle status mes- Settings
sage memory1
(컄 page 162) (컄 page 162) (컄 page 164) (컄 page 166) (컄 page 167) (컄 page 167)
Commands/submenus
Calling up
Selecting
Loading
maintenance radio station phone book
service display
Checking tire Selecting
inflation
satellite rapressure
dio station*
Showing
Calling up
route guidsettings
ance instructions, current
direction
traveled
Searching
for name in
phone book
(컄 page 169)
(컄 page 170)
Fuel consump- Calling up vehicle
Resetting to
tion statistics
malfunction, warn- factory setsince start
ing and system sta- tings
tus messages stored
in memory
Fuel consumption statistics
since the last
reset
Instrument
cluster
submenu
Checking en- Operating
gine oil level the CD player
Resetting fuel
consumption
statistics
Lighting
submenu
Digital
speedometer
Distance to
empty
Vehicle
submenu
Convenience
submenu
1
The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
i The headings used in the menus table are
designed to facilitate navigation within the
system and are not necessarily identical to
those shown in the control system displays.
The first function displayed in each menu will
automatically show you which part of the system you are in.
161
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu
In basic mode, the multifunction display
shows the trip odometer and the main
odometer. This is known as the standard
display.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Calling up maintenance service
display
339
Checking tire inflation pressure
321
Checking engine oil level
309
Calling up digital speedometer
162
Audio menu
The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently have turned on.
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in
the multifunction display.
The following functions are available:
Function
Calling up digital speedometer
1 Trip odometer
2 Main odometer
In case you see another display:
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
until the digital speedometer appears
in the multifunction display.
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the multifunction display.
until the standard display appears.
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
to select the functions in the standard
display menu.
Current vehicle speed
162
Page
Selecting radio station
163
Selecting satellite radio station
(USA only)
163
Operating the CD player
163
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting radio station
왘 Turn on COMAND and select radio.
Refer to the separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned station in the multifunction display.
Selecting satellite radio channel
(USA only)
The SIRIUS satellite radio is treated as a
radio application.
왘 Turn on COMAND and select the cor-
responding key on the COMAND
control panel. Refer to the separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
Operating the CD player
왘 Turn on COMAND and select CD. Re-
fer to the separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played are shown in the multifunction display.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned
channel in the multifunction display.
1 Waveband
2 Station frequency
1 Current track
2 Indicates CD mode
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
i You can only store new stations using the
corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to
the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
1 Channel name or number
2 SAT mode and preset number
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired channel is found.
i A subscription to satellite radio service
until the desired track is selected.
i You can only choose a CD using
COMAND. Refer to the separate COMAND
and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating
instructions.
provider is required for satellite radio operation. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio
for details.
For more information, refer to the separate
COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System
operating instructions.
163
Controls in detail
Control system
Select MP3-CD track
Telephone menu
Warning!
왘 Turn on COMAND and select MP3-CD.
Refer to the separate COMAND and
Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the MP3-CD currently being played are shown in the
multifunction display.
Warning!
G
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving. For your safety and
the safety of others, we recommend that
you pull over to a safe location and stop
before making or taking a telephone call.
If you choose to use the telephone while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when weather,
road and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile telephone while driving a
vehicle.
1 Current track
2 Indicates MP3-CD mode
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e.
without being connected to an external
antenna) from inside the vehicle while the
engine is running. Doing so could lead to a
malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/
or personal injury.
You can use the functions in the PHONE
menu to operate your telephone, provided it is connected to a hands-free system
and switched on.
Logging-on to a network
왘 Switch on the telephone and
COMAND.
왘 Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until you
see the PHONE menu in the multifunction display.
i Level of information displayed will vary
depending on the information contained on
the MP3-CD.
Which messages will appear in the multifunction display depends on whether
your telephone is switched on or off:
앫
164
If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is: PLEASE
TURN PHONE ON.
Controls in detail
Control system
앫
앫
If the telephone is switched on:
Dialing a number from the phone book
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the multifunction display reads NO SERVICE.
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from
the phone book.
If the telephone is on:
왘 Log on to the network (컄 page 164).
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, READY appears in the multifunction display.
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
i If you press and hold button j or k
for longer than 1 second, the system scrolls
rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again.
If you do not want to use the telephone, press
button t.
왘 Press button s.
until you see the PHONE menu in the
multifunction display.
왘 Press button j or k.
The system dials the selected phone
number.
앫
If you have just switched on the
phone, the control system transmit
the phone books of the SIM card
(GSM) or the phone books of the mobile phones (GSM or CDMA).
Page
This can take several minutes, depending on how many entries each
phone book contains. When you
press button j or k during the
download of the phone book the
message LOADING PHBOOK! appears in
the multifunction display for approximately 3 seconds.
Dialing a number from the
phone book
165
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
Redialing
166
until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
Answering a call
166
Ending a call
166
The standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can
operate it using the control system.
You may carry out the following functions:
Function
If the connection is successful and this
feature is supported by your network
provider, the name of the party you
are calling (if stored in your phone
book) and the duration of the call
will appear in the display.
1 Name of the party you are calling
앫
If no connection is made, the control
system stores each dialed number in
the redial memory.
The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical
order.
165
Controls in detail
Control system
Redialing
Answering a call
The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the need to search through your
entire phone book.
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the multifunction display you will see the
message, or if available, the caller ID
(name and number):
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the PHONE menu in the
multifunction display.
Navigation menu
The NAV menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see NAV in the multifunction
display.
앫
If COMAND is switched off, the message NAVI OFF is shown in the multifunction display.
앫
With COMAND switched on but route
guidance not activated, the direction
of travel and, if available, the name
of the street currently traveled on appear in the multifunction display.
앫
With COMAND switched on and
route guidance activated, the direction of travel and maneuver instructions appear in the multifunction
display.
왘 Press button s.
In the multifunction display you see
the first number in the redial memory.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
i If you do not want to use the telephone,
i The caller’s number appears only if it is
transmitted.
press button t.
The caller’s name appears only if the number
and the name are stored in the phone book.
왘 Press button s.
왘 Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
You have answered the call. In the
multifunction display you see the
length of the call positioned above
the number.
Ending a call or reject an incoming call
왘 Press button t.
You have ended the call. In the multifunction display you will again see
the standby message.
166
Please refer to the separate COMAND
and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System manual for instructions on how to activate
the route guidance system.
Controls in detail
Control system
Distronic** menu
Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the
current settings for your Distronic system. What information is shown in the
multifunction display depends on
whether the Distronic system is active or
inactive.
Distronic deactivated
Distronic activated
When Distronic is deactivated, you will
see the standard display.
When you activate Distronic, you will see
the set speed for about 5 seconds in the
Distronic display. The following display
then appears:
Please refer to the “Driving systems” section of this manual (컄 page 223) for instructions on how to activate Distronic.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following
two pictures in the multifunction display.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
ahead
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning function
1 Distronic activated
Trip computer menu
Use the trip computer menu to call up
statistical data on your vehicle. The following information is available:
Function
Page
Fuel consumption statistics since
start
168
Fuel consumption statistics since
last reset
168
Resetting fuel consumption
statistics
168
Distance to empty
168
167
Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption statistics since start
앫
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
During this period, the data from the
previous journey can be incorporated as
follows:
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
왘 Press reset button J (컄 page 154) in
until the message FROM START appears in the multifunction display.
The statistics will be incorporated.
i Each time you call up the trip computer,
the last function used appears as the first display.
a duration of 2 minutes
the instrument cluster.
i If you do not press reset button J, the
consumption statistics will be reset to 0.
Fuel consumption since last reset
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
1
2
3
4
Distance driven since start
Time elapsed since start
Average fuel consumption since start
Average speed since start
until the message SINCE RESET appears in the multifunction display.
앫
a distance of approximately
1.25 miles (2 kilometers)
or
168
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the reading that you
want to reset in the multifunction
display.
왘 Press and hold reset button J
(컄 page 154) in the instrument clus-
ter until the value is reset to 0.
Distance to empty
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message RANGE appears in
the multifunction display.
The calculated remaining driving
range based on the current fuel tank
level appears in the multifunction display.
Incorporating statistics from the previous journey in the consumption statistics
When you restart the engine, the
FROM START display flashes for:
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average fuel consumption since last
reset
4 Average speed since last reset
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle status message memory
menu
Use the vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the system. Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on
conditions or system status the vehicle’s
system has recorded.
The vehicle status message memory
menu only appears if there are any messages stored.
Warning!
G
Malfunction and warning messages are
only indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply
a reminder with respect to the operation
of certain systems and do not replace the
owner’s and/or driver’s responsibility to
maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by
having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by
bringing the vehicle to an authorized
Maybach Studio to address the malfunction and warning messages (컄 page 364).
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle status message memory
menu does not appear, then there
are no messages stored.
Vehicle status messages have been recorded
왘 Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be displayed in order. See the “Practical
hints” section for malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 364).
i The vehicle status message memory will
be cleared when you switch off the ignition.
You will then only see high-priority messages
in the multifunction display. These are highlighted in red color (컄 page 364).
If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded, the number
of messages appears in the multifunction
display:
1 Number of messages
169
Controls in detail
Control system
Settings menu
In the SETTINGS menu there are two
functions:
앫
앫
The function TO RESET PRESS R BUTTON
FOR 3 SEC., with which you can reset
all the settings to the original factory
settings.
A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the message SETTINGS appears
in the multifunction display.
Resetting all settings
170
Due to safety reasons, resetting all of the settings while driving will not reset all of the values in the LIGHTING or the VEHICLE submenu.
Submenus in the Settings menu
170
Submenus in the Settings menu
Instrument cluster submenu
172
왘 Press button j.
Lighting submenu
172
Vehicle submenu
176
Convenience submenu
177
Function
Page
The various submenus appear in the
multifunction display.
Resetting all settings
You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.
왘 Press reset button J (컄 page 154) in
the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press reset button J again to confirm.
왘 Press reset button J again.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
i The settings you have changed will not be
reset unless you confirm the action by pressing reset button J a second time. After approximately 5 seconds, the SETTINGS menu
appears again.
왘 Press button æ or ç.
The selection marker moves to the
next submenu.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Scroll down with button ç, scroll
up with button æ.
With the selection marker on the desired
submenu, use button j to access the
individual functions within that submenu. Once within the submenu, you
can use button j to move to the next
function or button k to move to the
previous function within that submenu.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
170
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus.
Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
LIGHTING
VEHICLE
CONVENIENCE
(컄 page 172)
(컄 page 172)
(컄 page 176)
(컄 page 177)
Selecting speedometer display Setting daytime running lamp Setting automatic locking
mode
mode (USA only)
Selecting language
Setting locator lighting
Activating easy-entry/exit
feature
Setting station selection mode Setting fold-in function for exterior rear view mirrors
Setting ambient lighting
Setting night security illumination
Setting interior lighting delayed switch-off
171
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button æ or ç to set
Instrument cluster submenu
Access the INST. CLUS. submenu via the
SETTINGS menu. Use the INST. CLUS.
submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings. The following functions are available:
Function
Page
speedometer unit to MILES or KM.
Selecting language
왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the INST.
CLUS. submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
Selecting speedometer display
mode
172
until the message LANGUAGE appears
in the multifunction display.
Selecting language
172
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Selecting speedometer display mode
왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the INST.
CLUS. submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message DISPLAY VALUES IN
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘 Press button æ or ç to select
the language to be used for the multifunction display messages.
Available languages:
172
앫
German
앫
English
앫
French
앫
Italian
앫
Spanish
Lighting submenu
Access the LIGHTING submenu via the
SETTINGS menu. Use the LIGHTING submenu to change the lamp and lighting
settings on your vehicle. The following
functions are available:
Function
Page
Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only)
173
Setting locator lighting
173
Setting ambient lighting
174
Setting night security illumination
174
Setting interior lighting delayed
shut-off
175
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally:
i This function is not available in countries
앫
Parking lamps
where the daytime running lamp mode is
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the LIGHTING
submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message LIGHTING CIRCUIT
HEADLAMP MODE appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘 Press button æ or ç to select
manual operation (MANUAL)or daytime
running lamp mode (CONSTANT).
For more information on the daytime
running lamp mode, see “Lighting”
(컄 page 144).
Setting locator lighting
With the locator lighting feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in
position U, the following lamps will
switch on during darkness when the vehicle is unlocked using button ‹ on
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO**:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
The following message appears in the multifunction display:
앫
Exterior rear view mirror lamps
LIGHTING
CANNOT BE
COMPLETELY RESET
TO FACTORY SETTINGS
WHILE DRIVING.
The locator lighting switches off when
the driver’s door is opened.
i For safety reasons, resetting the LIGHTING
submenu to factory settings (컄 page 170)
while driving will not deactivated the daytime
running lamp mode.
If you do not open a door after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the
lamps will switch off automatically after
approximately 40 seconds.
왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the LIGHTING
컄컄
submenu.
With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch at position M or U, the low beam
headlamps are switched on when the engine is running.
173
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message LOCATOR LIGHTING
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Setting ambient lighting
Use this function, you can adjust the
brightness of the ambient lighting.
왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the LIGHTING
submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message AMBIENT LIGHTING
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Setting night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed switch-off feature)
Use this function to set whether you
would like the exterior lamps to remain
on for 15 seconds during darkness after
exiting the vehicle and all doors closed.
With the headlamps delayed switch-off
feature activated and the exterior lamp
switch in position U before the engine
is turned off, the following lamps will
switch on when the engine is turned off:
앫
Parking lamps
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
앫
Tail lamps
the locator lighting function ON.
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U when exiting the vehicle (컄 page 142).
The locator lighting feature is activated.
왘 Press button æ or ç to select the
desired brightness of the ambient
lighting.
The setting LEVEL 1 represents the
darkest level and setting LEVEL 5 the
brightest level.
The ambient light is switched off at
setting OFF.
If after turning off the engine you do not
open a door or do not close an opened
door, the lamps will automatically switch
off after 60 seconds.
왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the LIGHTING
submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message HEADLAMPS DELAYED
SWITCH-OFF appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
174
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
ton on the gear selector lever
(컄 page 61).
Setting interior lighting delayed
switch-off
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
the headlamps delayed switch-off
feature ON or OFF.
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U before turning off the
engine (컄 page 142).
The headlamps delayed switch-off
feature is activated.
You can temporarily deactivate the
headlamps delayed switch-off feature:
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message INTERIOR LIGHTING
DELAYED SWITCH-OFF appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Use this function to set whether you
would like the interior lighting to remain
on for 10 seconds during darkness after
you have removed the SmartKey from
the starter switch.
왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the LIGHTING
submenu.
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
the interior lighting delayed
switch-off feature ON or OFF.
왘 Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
왘 Then turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 2 and back to 0.
The headlamps delayed switch-off
feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
175
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle submenu
Setting automatic locking
Setting station selection mode
Access the VEHICLE submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the VEHICLE submenu
to make general vehicle settings. The
following functions are available:
Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking. With
the automatic central locking system activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at
vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h).
Use the STATION SEARCH USING function
to select the manual or memory station
selection mode for the radio
(컄 page 163).
Function
Page
Setting automatic locking
176
Setting station selection mode
176
왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the VEHICLE
submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message AUTOMATIC DOOR
LOCK appears in the multifunction display.
왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the VEHICLE
submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message STATION SEARCH
USING. appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘 Press button æ or ç to select the
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK ON or OFF.
176
desired station selection mode. You
can select:
앫
FREQUENCY
앫
MEMORY selects next stored station
Controls in detail
Control system
Convenience submenu
Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the
SETTINGS menu. Use the CONVENIENCE
submenu to change the settings for a
number of convenience features. The
following functions are available:
Function
Page
Activating easy-entry/exit
feature
177
Setting fold-in function for
exterior rear view mirrors
177
Press seat adjustment switch
(컄 page 63).
앫
Press one of the memory position buttons or the memory button M
(컄 page 140).
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door
and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to
the CONVENIENCE submenu.
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature
(컄 page 65).
Warning!
앫
G
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message EASY-ENTRY FEATURE
ACTIVATE appears in the multifunction display.
앫
folded in when you lock your vehicle
앫
folded out when you unlock your vehicle
왘 Move the selection marker to
the CONVENIENCE submenu using
button æ or ç.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message FOLD IN MIRRORS
WHEN LOCKING appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch the
To stop steering wheel movement, do one
of the following:
Move steering adjustment stalk
(컄 page 64).
Using this function, you can set the exterior rear view mirrors to be automatically
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
앫
Setting fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors
automatic fold-in setting for the mirrors ON or OFF.
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch the
easy-entry/exit feature ON or OFF.
177
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission
For more information on driving with an
automatic transmission see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 70).
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its
gear shifting process to your individual
driving style by continually adjusting the
shift points up or down. These shift point
adjustments are performed based on
current operating and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its shift program.
i During the brief warm-up, the transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to
operating temperature.
Warning!
G
Gear selector lever
The gear selector lever is located on the
lower part of the front center console.
Make sure that absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of
all obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
pedals still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between
the pedals. You could then no longer
brake or accelerate. This could lead to accidents and injury.
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
P
Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
i The current gear selector lever position P,
R, N or D appears in the tachometer display
(컄 page 180).
178
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone
or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake
pedal.
Shifting procedure
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending
on:
앫
the gear selector lever position D
(컄 page 180) with gear ranges
(컄 page 182)
앫
the selected program mode (C/S)
(컄 page 183)
앫
the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 181)
앫
the vehicle speed
! Allow engine to warm up under low load
use. Do not place full load on the engine until
the operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P
only when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on slippery
road surfaces. This may cause serious damage
to the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
When the gear selector lever is in
position D, you can influence transmission shifting by:
앫
limiting the gear range
앫
changing gears manually
179
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever positions
The current gear selector lever position
appears in the tachometer display.
Effect
ì
Park position
ë
Gear selector lever position
when the vehicle is parked.
Place gear selector lever in
park position P only when
vehicle is stopped. The park
position is not intended to
serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always set the
parking brake in addition to
placing the gear selector lever
in park position P to secure the
vehicle.
1 Current gear selector lever position
The SmartKey can only be
removed from the starter
switch with the gear selector
lever in park position P. With
the SmartKey removed, the
gear selector lever is locked in
park position P.
í
Reverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
180
Effect
Neutral
No power is transmitted from
the engine to the drive axle.
When the brakes are released,
the vehicle can be moved
freely (pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage neutral
position N while driving.
If the ESP® is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Move gear selector lever to
neutral position N only if the
vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
ê
Drive
The transmission shifts automatically. All forward gears
are available.
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with gear selector lever in
neutral position N can result in transmission
damage that is not covered by the Maybach
Limited Warranty.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Warning!
G
Stopping
Driving tips
Accelerator position
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in park
position P is dangerous. Also, park
position P alone is not intended to or
capable of preventing your vehicle from
moving, possibly hitting people or objects.
When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic
lights:
Your driving style influences the
transmission’s shifting behavior:
왘 Leave the transmission in gear.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to park position P (컄 page 72).
Kickdown
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
왘 Press the accelerator past the point of
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
More throttle
Later upshifting
왘 Hold the vehicle with the brake.
When you stop for a longer period of
time with the engine idling and/or on a
hill:
왘 Set the parking brake.
왘 Move gear selector lever to park
position P.
resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the
transmission shifts into a lower gear.
왘 Ease on the accelerator when you
Warning!
G
have reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could move the gear selector
lever from park position P, which could
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
181
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Maneuvering
When you maneuver in tight areas, e.g.
when pulling into a parking space:
왘 Control the vehicle speed by
gradually releasing the brakes.
왘 Accelerate gently.
왘 Never abruptly step on the accelera-
tor.
Working on the vehicle
Warning!
Gear ranges
With the gear selector lever in drive
position D, you can select a gear range
for the automatic transmission to
operate within.
You can limit the gear range by pressing
the gear selector lever to the left (D-),
and reverse the gear range limit by
pressing the gear selector lever to the
right (D+) (컄 page 184).
Effect
é
The transmission shifts through
fourth gear only.
è
The transmission shifts through
third gear only.
With this selection you can use
the braking effect of the engine.
ç
The selected gear range appears in the
tachometer display.
The transmission shifts through
second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving
G
When working on the vehicle, set the parking brake and move gear selector lever to
park position P. Otherwise the vehicle
could roll away.
æ
앫
on steep downgrades
앫
in mountainous regions
앫
under extreme operating
conditions
The transmission operates in
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
1 Current gear range
182
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic shift program
The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the front
center console.
The selected program mode appears in
the tachometer display.
왘 Press program mode selector switch
repeatedly until the letter of the
desired program mode appears in the
tachometer display.
Select C for comfort driving:
앫
Traction and driving stability are
improved on icy roads.
앫
Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine
then operates at lower rpms and
the wheels are less likely to spin.
Select S for standard driving:
1 Current program mode
Program mode selector switch
C Comfort
For comfort driving
S Sport
For standard driving
앫
Upshifts occur earlier.
! Never change the program mode when
the gear selector lever is out of park
position P. This could result in a change of
driving characteristics for which you may not
be prepared.
i The last selected program mode (C or S) is
switched on when the engine is restarted.
183
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
One-touch gearshifting
With the gear selector lever in drive
position D, you can limit or extend the
gear range.
! Allow engine to warm up under low load
use. Do not place full load on the engine until
the operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P
only when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on slippery
road surfaces. This may cause serious damage
to the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
The transmission will shift to the next
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
limits the gear range of the transmission (컄 page 180).
i To avoid overrevving the engine when
downshifting, the transmission will not shift
to a lower gear if the engine’s max. speed
would be exceeded.
G
Canceling gear range limit
왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D+ direction until D reappears
in the tachometer display
(컄 page 180).
The transmission will shift from the
current gear range directly to gear
range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever
Extending gear range
the right in the D+ direction.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This
could result in drive wheel slip and
reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS
will not prevent this type of loss of control.
184
the left in the D– direction.
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to
Limiting gear range
Warning!
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to
The transmission will shift to the next
higher gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the transmission.
i If you press on the accelerator when the
engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit
selected.
in the D– direction.
The transmission will automatically
select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration.
This will involve shifting down one or
more gears.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode)
If vehicle acceleration becomes less responsive or sluggish or the transmission
no longer shifts, the transmission is most
likely operating in limp-home
(emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only second gear and reverse gear
can be selected.
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
왘 Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Wait at least 10 seconds before
restarting.
왘 Restart the engine.
왘 Move the gear selector lever to
position D (for second gear) or
position R.
왘 Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Maybach Studio as soon
as possible.
185
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility
For information on the windshield wipers, see “Windshield wipers”
(컄 page 74).
Headlamp cleaning system
The button is located on the left side of
the dashboard.
i The headlamps will automatically be
cleaned when you have
앫
switched on the headlamps
and
앫
operated the windshield wipers with
windshield washer fluid fifteen times
When you switch off the ignition, the counter
resets.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 446).
Rear view mirrors
For information on setting the rear view
mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 66).
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when
왘 Press button 1.
앫
the auto-dimming function is activated (컄 page 187)
앫
the ignition is switched on
1 Headlamp washer button
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
and
앫
186
incoming light from headlamps falls
on the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror
The rear view mirror will not react if
앫
reverse gear is engaged
앫
the interior lighting is turned on
Warning!
G
The auto-dimming function does not react
if incoming light is not aimed directly at
sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side do
not react, for example, if the rear window
curtain is closed.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
you may not be able to observe traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
Warning!
G
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
! Electrolyte drops coming into contact
Deactivating
with the vehicle paint finish can be completely
removed only while in the liquid state by applying plenty of water.
Warning!
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
parking position so that the passengerside exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored position.
G
Exercise care when using the passengerside exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in
mirror are closer than they appear. Check
your interior rear view mirror or glance
over your shoulder before changing lanes.
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Press button 1.
The green indicator lamp in
button 1 goes out.
Activating
왘 Press button 1 again.
The green indicator lamp in
button 1 comes on.
i The setting will remain stored even when
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view
컄컄
mirror
you remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
187
Controls in detail
Good visibility
컄컄 왘 Make sure you have stored a parking
Power folding exterior rear view
mirrors
position for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror (컄 page 141).
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
Warning!
왘 Press button 2 for the passenger-
side exterior rear view mirror.
With the exterior rear view mirrors folded
in when driving the vehicle, you cannot
observe surrounding traffic conditions and
which could result in an accident. Before
driving the vehicle, make sure the exterior
rear view mirrors are folded out.
왘 Place the gear selector lever in re-
verse gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward to
the stored position.
The exterior rear view mirror returns to
its previously stored driving position:
앫
10 seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R
앫
immediately once you exceed a vehicle speed of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h)
앫
immediately when you press the button for driver’s side exterior rear view
mirror 1
G
Folding the exterior rear view mirrors in
and out manually
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate
if they are not completely folded out.
The button is located on the driver’s
door.
! Before you drive the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, fold the exterior mirrors
in. Otherwise they may be damaged.
Folding exterior rear view mirrors in and
out automatically
When the corresponding function in the
control system is activated (컄 page 177):
1 Button for folding exterior mirrors in
and out
앫
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
앫
The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold in as soon as the vehicle
is locked from the outside.
The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold out as soon as the vehicle is unlocked and the driver’s or
passenger door are subsequently
opened.
왘 Briefly press button 1.
The mirrors fold in.
i If you are driving at more than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), you will not be able
to fold the exterior mirrors in.
왘 Press button 1 again.
The mirrors fold out.
188
Controls in detail
Good visibility
! If an exterior mirror housing is forcibly
Glare from the front
pushed forward (hit from the rear), reposition
it manually by applying firm pressure until it
snaps back into place.
Glare from the front and sides
! Close the vanity mirror cover (if open) before you disengage sun visor 1 from
mounting 2 and pivot it to the side.
If an exterior mirror is forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front) press button 1 to
fold mirrors in, then press button 1 to fold
mirrors out. Do not force mirror by hand as it
may damage the adjustment mechanism.
The mirror housing is now properly positioned
and you can adjust the mirror normally.
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning!
G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while the vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
i For information on vanity mirrors
(컄 page 248).
1 Sun visor
왘 Swing sun visor 1 down.
1 Sun visor
2 Mounting
3 Additional sun visor
왘 Swing sun visor 1 down.
왘 Disengage sun visor 1 from
mounting 2.
왘 Pivot sun visor to the side.
The sun visors are extendable.
왘 Adjust the sun visors by pushing or
pulling in direction of the arrows.
왘 Swing additional sun visor 3 down.
189
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster consumes
high levels of energy. To keep battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is
clear. The heating time varies depending
on outside temperature and driving conditions, ranging from approximately
6 minutes at temperatures above 43°F
(6°C) to over 20 minutes at temperatures
below -14°F (-26°C) and at high speed.
Activating
왘 Press button F (컄 page 193).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘 Press button F again.
The indicator lamp on the button
goes out.
i If the indicator lamp F is flashing,
G
there is insufficient voltage due to too many
electrical consumers are turned on. The rear
window defroster switches off automatically.
Any accumulation of snow and ice should
be removed from the rear window before
driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, endangering you and others.
The rear window defroster will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
Warning!
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
190
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Automatic climate control
The automatic climate control is a 4-zone
intelligent climate control system. Your
vehicle interior is divided into four zones.
With the help of a sun sensor, the automatic climate control determines the relation of the sun to the vehicle and
automatically adjusts the inside temperature for every individual zone.
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate
control, the air that enters the passenger
compartment through the air vents can be
very hot or very cold (depending on the set
temperature). This may cause burns or
frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep
sufficient distance between unprotected
parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution control
(컄 page 193) to direct the air to air vents in
the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin.
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. It
cools the vehicle’s interior according to
the angle and intensity of the sun’s rays,
the outside temperature and the selected temperature.
i Condensation may drip from underneath
the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction.
The activated charcoal filter, when
switched on, markedly reduces odors
and removes pollutants from the air entering the passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for
heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could
fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air
enters the passenger compartment
through the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the air conditioning mode is
deactivated (컄 page 200).
i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter
will reduce the air volume to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off, see “Summer opening
feature” (컄 page 211). The automatic climate
control will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks and any other debris.
Do not obstruct air volume by placing objects
on the air flow-through exhaust slots below
the rear window.
191
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Cockpit
1 Left side air vent, adjustable
5 Right side air vent, adjustable
8 Automatic climate control panel
2 Left center air vent, adjustable
6 Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side air vent
9 Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent
a Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side air vent
3 Fixed air vent
4 Right center air vent, adjustable
192
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Automatic climate control panel, front
1 Air distribution and air volume,
driver’s side (automatic)
8 Air distribution, passenger side
(manual)
2 Air distribution, driver’s side
(manual)
9 Air distribution and air volume,
passenger side (automatic)
3 Air volume, driver’s side
a Rear window defroster
4 Temperature control, driver’s side
b Rear air-conditioning remote
control
5 Display
6 Temperature control, passenger
side
d AC cooling on/off
e Residual heat and ventilation
f Activated charcoal filter
g Air recirculation
h Front defroster
c Automatic climate control on/off
button
7 Air volume, passenger side
193
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Deactivating the climate control system
It is possible to completely deactivate the
automatic climate control system.
Deactivating
왘 Press button M (컄 page 193).
Warning!
G
When the automatic climate control is
switched off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose
this setting for a short time. Otherwise the
windows could fog up, impairing visibility
and endangering you and others.
Operating the climate control system
in automatic mode
i When operating the climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely
need to adjust the temperature, air volume
and air distribution.
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify
is switched on. This function can be switched
off, if necessary.
Warning!
G
If you switch off the cooling function the
windows can fog up more quickly.
Window fogging may impair visibility and
endanger you and others.
Activating
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Press one button U (컄 page 193).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically.
왘 Use temperature controls 4 for the
left side or 6 (컄 page 193) for the
right side to separately adjust the air
temperature on each side of the passenger compartment.
The temperature of the vehicle interior is adjusted automatically.
Deactivating
왘 Press one button U (컄 page 193).
Reactivating
i You can switch the automatic climate
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
control system on and off for each side of the
passenger compartment as desired.
왘 Press button M or U
(컄 page 193).
194
The indicator lamp on the button
goes out. The automatic operation of
air volume and air distribution
switches off.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 4 for the
driver’s side or 6 (컄 page 193) for the
passenger side to separately adjust the
air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise
or lower the temperature setting in small
increments, preferably starting
at 72°F (22°C).
Adjusting air distribution
Use the air distribution controls 2
and 8 (컄 page 193) to separately adjust
the air distribution on each side of the
passenger compartment. The following
symbols are located on the controls:
Ô
Directs air to the windows
Increasing
Ø
Directs air to the windows,
footwells, center and side air
vents
Ó
Directs air to the footwell air
vents
Õ
Directs air to the center and
side air vents
Symbol Function
왘 Push top of temperature control 4
and/or 6 until the display shows the
desired temperature.
The automatic climate control system
will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly.
Decreasing
왘 Push bottom of temperature
왘 Press air distribution control 2 for
control 4 and/or 6 until the display
shows the desired temperature.
the driver’s side and/or 8 for the
passenger side (컄 page 193).
The automatic climate control system
will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly.
The indicator lamp on button U
goes out.
The air volume is controlled automatically while the air distribution is controlled manually in the respective
zone.
Adjusting air volume
Seven blower speeds are available.
왘 Press to decrease or Q to in-
crease air volume to the desired level.
The indicator lamp on button U
goes out.
The air volume is controlled manually
while the air distribution is controlled
automatically in the respective zone.
The selected blower speed is shown in
the display 5 (컄 page 193).
Front defroster
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
You can also defog the windshield and
the side windows.
i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the side windows are clear
again.
Activating
왘 Press button P (컄 page 193).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
컄컄
The selected air distribution is shown
in the display 5 (컄 page 193).
195
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
컄컄 The automatic climate control switches
automatically to the following functions:
앫
maximum blowing and heating
power (depends on cooling temperature)
앫
air flows onto the windshield and
the front side windows
앫
cooling on to dehumidify
앫
the air recirculation mode is
switched off
Deactivating
왘 Press button P (컄 page 193).
The indicator lamp on the button
goes out. Defrosting is turned off.
Windshield fogged on the outside
왘 Switch the windshield wipers on.
왘 Press one button U.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically.
i In automatic mode, the automatic climate
control is regulated to prevent the windows
from fogging up.
196
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
If the left and right air distribution controls as well as the air volume control are
set to U and there is a high need for
cooling, the display AUTO MAXCOOL appears.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when windows
and tilt/sliding sunroof are closed).
i These settings should only be selected for
a short time.
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the
vehicle from the outside (e.g. before
driving through a tunnel). This setting
cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
air recirculation mode immediately should
clear interior window fogging. If interior
window fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 208) is activated, or
press button P.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Activating
Deactivating
왘 Press button , (컄 page 193).
왘 Press button , (컄 page 193).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The indicator lamp on the button
goes out.
i The air recirculation mode is activated automatically:
i The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically:
앫
at high outside temperatures
앫
앫
if the concentration of carbon
monoxide (CO) and nitrogen oxide (NOX)
in the outside air increases beyond a predetermined level, for example in a tunnel
after 5 minutes if the outside temperature
is below approximately 41°F (5°C)
앫
after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is
turned off
앫
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
앫
if you press button r
Please note that the charcoal filter must be activated (컄 page 193) for the air recirculation
mode to be activated automatically.
If you have turned off the air conditioning
(컄 page 193) or the outside temperature is
below 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode
will not switch on automatically.
At outside temperatures above 79°F (26°C)
the system will not automatically switch back
to outside air. A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.
Air recirculation mode with convenience
closing or opening feature
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of
anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the windows
can be immediately halted by pressing the
respective window switch. The closing of
the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately
halted by moving the tilt/ sliding sunroof
switch in the overhead control panel in any
direction.
The closing of the windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof can be reversed by again
pressing and holding button ,.
197
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Convenience closing
i A window or tilt/sliding sunroof will only
왘 Press and hold button , for ap-
return to its previous position if it has not
been moved to another position using the respective window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof
switch after it was closed with button ,.
A window or tilt/sliding sunroof that was
moved will remain in its current position if
button , is used to reopen the remaining
windows or tilt/sliding sunroof.
proximately 2 seconds.
The side windows and/or tilt/sliding
sunroof will close. You can release
button , once the closing procedure has begun. The windows and
tilt/sliding sunroof continue closing
until they are fully closed. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The
air recirculation mode is activated.
Convenience opening
왘 Press and hold button , for ap-
proximately 2 seconds.
The side windows and/or tilt/sliding
sunroof will return to their previous
position. You can release button ,
once the opening procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding
sunroof continue opening until they
have reached their previous positions. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The air recirculation
mode is deactivated.
198
Charcoal filter
An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants
from air entering the passenger compartment.
Activating
왘 Press button e (컄 page 193).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘 Press button e (컄 page 193).
The indicator lamp on the button
goes out.
The system switches automatically to the
air recirculation mode if the carbon
monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX)
concentration of the outside air increases beyond a predetermined level, for example in a tunnel.
The automatic air recirculation mode
does not function if air conditioning is
deactivated (컄 page 200) or if the outside temperature has fallen below
41°F (5°C).
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
The activated charcoal filter should be
switched off when windows fog up on
the inside, or if the passenger compartment needs to be quickly heated or
cooled down.
Charcoal filter with convenience closing
or opening feature
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of
anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the windows
can be immediately halted by pressing the
respective window switch.
The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can
be immediately halted by moving the tilt/
sliding sunroof switch in the overhead control panel in any direction.
The closing of the windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof can be reversed by again
pressing and holding button e.
Convenience closing
i A window or tilt/sliding sunroof will only
왘 Press and hold button e for ap-
return to its previous position if it has not
been moved to another position using the respective window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof
switch after it was closed with button ,. A
window or tilt/sliding sunroof that was moved
will remain in its current position if
button , is used to reopen the remaining
windows or tilt/sliding sunroof.
proximately 2 seconds.
The side windows and/or tilt/sliding
sunroof will close. You can release
button e once the closing procedure has begun. The windows and
tilt/sliding sunroof continue closing
until they are fully closed. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The
charcoal filter is activated.
Convenience opening
왘 Press and hold button e for ap-
proximately 2 seconds.
The side windows and/or tilt/sliding
sunroof will return to their previous
position. You can release button e
once the opening procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding
sunroof continue opening until they
have reached their previous positions. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The charcoal filter is
deactivated.
199
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Air conditioning
The cooling function, only operational
when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, thus preventing the windows from
fogging up.
i Condensation may drip out from
underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not
an indication of a malfunction.
Warning!
G
If you turn off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
visibility and endanger you and others.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in
the vehicle will then no longer be cooled
or dehumidified.
왘 Press button r (컄 page 193).
The indicator lamp on the
button r comes on.
200
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You
can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘 Press button r again
(컄 page 193).
The indicator lamp on the
button r goes out.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
! If the indicator lamp on the button r
does not go out or starts to flash, this indicates
that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant.
The compressor has turned itself off. The air
conditioning cannot be turned on again.
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio.
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the
interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine.
Activating
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 0 or remove it
from the starter switch.
왘 Press button T (컄 page 193).
The indicator lamp on button T
comes on.
Deactivating
왘 Press button T (컄 page 193).
The indicator lamp on button T
goes out.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
앫
when the ignition is switched on
앫
after about 30 minutes
앫
if the battery voltage drops
i How long the system will provide heating
depends on the coolant temperature and the
temperature set by the operator. The blower
will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air
distribution control setting.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Temperature-controlled glove box
The glove box can be heated or cooled.
The air temperature is regulated according to the outside temperature and the
temperature set in the front air-conditioning control panel on the right.
The adjustable vent is in the glove box.
왘 Turn adjustable vent 1 clockwise.
The glove box will be heated or
cooled.
왘 Turn adjustable vent 1 counterclock-
wise.
Operating rear passenger compartment settings at the cockpit control
panel
왘 Press button ™ (컄 page 193) on
the front control panel.
The display switches over to show the
rear passenger compartment settings. At the same time, the indicator
lamps in the air distribution buttons
come on according to the air distribution set for the rear compartment.
The glove box will neither be heated
nor cooled.
i If you are transporting perishable goods
(e.g. groceries) in the glove box, close the air
vent while heating the passenger compartment.
You can adjust all settings for the rear
passenger compartment at the cockpit
control panel.
Standard display
1 Adjustable vent
Approximately 5 seconds after the last
button was pressed, the current display
disappears and the standard display is
called back up.
or
왘 Press button ™ again.
201
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Rear passenger compartment
Overview of Maybach 57
202
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
1 Thumbwheel for upper left air
vent
2 Upper left air vent
3 Upper right air vent
4 Thumbwheel for upper right air
vent
5 Thumbwheel for lower right air
vent
6 Lower right air vent
7 Fixed air vent
8 Center air vent, right, adjustable
9 Thumbwheel for center air vent
a Automatic climate control panel
b Thumbwheel for center air vent
c Center air vent, left, adjustable
d Lower left air vent
e Thumbwheel for lower left air
vent
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate
control, the air that enters the passenger
compartment through the air vents can be
very hot or very cold (depending on the set
temperature). This may cause burns or
frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep
sufficient distance between unprotected
parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution control to
direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area
of unprotected skin.
203
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Overview of Maybach 62
204
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
1 Thumbwheel for upper left air
vent
2 Upper left air vent
3 Upper right air vent
4 Thumbwheel for upper right air
vent
5 Thumbwheel for lower right air
vent
6 Lower right air vent
7 Fixed air vent
8 Center air vent, right, adjustable
9 Thumbwheel for center air vent
a Automatic climate control panel
b Thumbwheel for center air vent
c Center air vent, left, adjustable
d Lower left air vent
e Thumbwheel for lower left air
vent
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate
control, the air that enters the passenger
compartment through the air vents can be
very hot or very cold (depending on the set
temperature). This may cause burns or
frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep
sufficient distance between unprotected
parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution controls to
direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area
of unprotected skin.
205
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Activating the climate control system
Activating
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Press button M or U.
Deactivating
It is possible to completely deactivate the
automatic climate control system.
Automatic climate control panel, rear
1 Air volume, left (manual)
2 Temperature control, left
3 Display
4 Temperature control, right
5 Air volume, right (manual)
6 Air distribution, right (automatic)
7 Air distribution, right (manual)
8 AC cooling on/off
9 Residual heat and ventilation/
Automatic climate control on/off
button
a Air distribution, left (manual)
b Air distribution, left (automatic)
206
왘 Press button M.
! The fresh air supply to the vehicle interior
is shut off.
Operating the climate control system
in automatic mode
i When operating the climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely
need to adjust the temperature, air volume
and air distribution.
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify
is switched on. This function can be switched
off, if necessary.
i The automatic climate control system can
also be switched on and off separately on
each side of the passenger compartment, as
required.
Activating
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Press one button U.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically.
왘 Use temperature controls 2 for the
left side or 4 for the right side to
separately adjust the air temperature
on each side of the passenger compartment.
The temperature of the vehicle interior is adjusted automatically.
Deactivating
왘 Press one button U.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The automatic operation of air volume and air distribution switches off.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
왘 Press the desired air distribution
control 7 and/or a (컄 page 206).
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 2 for the left
side or 4 for the right side to separately
adjust the air temperature on each side
of the passenger compartment. You
should raise or lower the temperature
setting in small increments, preferably
starting at 72°F (22°C).
Adjusting air distribution
Use the air distribution controls 7
and a (컄 page 206) to separately adjust
the air distribution on each side of the
passenger compartment. The following
symbols are located on the controls:
i When operating the climate control sys-
Ü
Directs air to roof vents or upper side, center and lower side
vents
Û
Directs air to roof vents or upper side, footwell, center and
lower side vents
Ú
Directs air to footwell, center
and lower side vents
a
Directs air to center and lower
side vents
The indicator lamp on button U
(컄 page 206) goes out.
Y
Directs air to the footwell air
vents
The air volume is controlled manually
while the air distribution is controlled
automatically in the respective zone.
tem in automatic mode, you will only rarely
need to adjust the temperature, air volume
and air distribution.
Increasing
왘 Push top of temperature control 2
and/or 4 (컄 page 206) until the dis-
Symbol Function
play shows the desired temperature.
The automatic climate control system
will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly.
Decreasing
왘 Push bottom of temperature
control 2 and/or 4 (컄 page 206) un-
The indicator lamp on button U
(컄 page 206) goes out.
The air volume is controlled automatically while the air distribution is controlled manually in the respective
zone.
The selected air distribution is shown
in the display 3 (컄 page 206).
Adjusting air volume
Seven blower speeds are available.
왘 Press to decrease or Q
(컄 page 206) to increase air volume
to the desired level.
The selected blower speed is shown
in the display 3 (컄 page 206).
til the display shows the desired temperature.
The automatic climate control system
will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly.
207
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Air conditioning
The cooling function, only operational
when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, thus preventing the windows from
fogging up.
i Condensation may drip out from
underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not
an indication of a malfunction.
Warning!
G
If you turn off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
visibility and endanger you and others.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in
the vehicle will then no longer be cooled
or dehumidified.
왘 Press button r (컄 page 206).
The indicator lamp on the
button r comes on.
208
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You
can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘 Press button r again
(컄 page 206).
왘 Press button T (컄 page 206).
The indicator lamp on button T
comes on.
Deactivating
왘 Press button T (컄 page 206).
The indicator lamp on button T
goes out.
The indicator lamp on the
button r goes out.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
앫
when the ignition is switched on
i If button r on the automatic climate
앫
after about 30 minutes
앫
if the battery voltage drops
control panel starts to flash, this indicates that
the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
compressor has turned itself off. The air conditioning cannot be turned on again.
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio.
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the
interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine.
Activating
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 0 or remove it
from the starter switch.
i How long the system will provide heating
depends on the coolant temperature and the
temperature set by the operator. The blower
will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air
distribution control setting.
Solar panel*
The solar cells convert natural light into
electrical energy. When the engine is
switched off, the energy generated automatically switches on the ventilation
fan. The constant air flow creates a cooler temperature for cars parked in the
sunlight.
The air flow depends on the intensity of
the solar radiation. The ventilation starts
2 minutes after switching off the engine.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Warning!
Opening and closing the power
windows
The windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches for all of the
windows are on the driver’s door. The
switches for the respective windows are
on the front passenger door and the rear
doors.
G
When closing the windows, make sure
there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
The closing of the door windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch
or, if switch was pressed past the resistance
point and released, by pressing the respective switch.
The door windows are equipped with the
express-close and automatic reversal function. If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a
circumstance where you pressed the switch
past the resistance point and released it to
close the window, the automatic reversal
function will stop the window and open it
slightly.
Power window switches on the driver’s door
1
2
3
4
5
Left front door window
Right front door window
Right rear door window
Left rear door window
Rear door windows override switch
(컄 page 100)
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance
where you are closing the window by
pressing and holding the switch, by pressing and holding button ‹ on the
SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock
button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**) on
an outside door handle, or by pressing and
holding button , or button e on the
climate control panel, the automatic reversal function will not operate.
i You can also open or close the windows
using the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO**, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 211) and “Convenience closing
feature” (컄 page 211).
Depending on current position, the windows
may also open or close when the air recirculation button , or the charcoal filter
button e (컄 page 193) is pressed and held
for 2 seconds.
i Operating the windows from the rear is
not possible if you activate the override switch
(컄 page 100).
i With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the
windows can be operated
앫
until you open the driver’s or passenger
door
앫
for at least 5 minutes
i Vehicles with rear door window curtains*
(컄 page 269): When opening a rear door window with the rear door window curtain not
completely opened, the curtain will open first.
209
Controls in detail
Power windows
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
Opening the windows
Fully opening the windows
(Express-open)
왘 Press switch 1 to 4 at the
왘 Press switch 1 to 4 at the
symbol k to resistance point.
symbol k past the resistance point
and release.
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
The corresponding window opens
completely.
Closing the windows
Fully closing the windows
(Express-close)
왘 Press switch 1 to 4 at the
왘 Press switch 1 to 4 at the
symbol j to resistance point.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
Warning!
왘 Briefly press the respective power
window switch again.
Synchronizing the power windows
The windows must be synchronized
앫
The corresponding window closes
completely.
after the consumer battery has been
disconnected
앫
if the windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed
(Express-close)
Warning!
G
Each window must be synchronized.
Driver’s door only: If within 5 seconds you
again press the switch past the resistance
point and release, the automatic reversal
will not function.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
! If the upward movement of the window
왘 Keep pressing the switches for ap-
is blocked during the closing procedure, the
window will stop and open slightly.
Remove the obstruction, press the respective
power window switch at the symbol j
again past the resistance point and release.
210
Stopping the power windows during Express-operation
symbol j past the point of resistance and release.
G
If you press and hold the switch up when
closing the window, and upward movement of the window is blocked by some
obstruction including but not limited to
arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic
reversal will not operate.
If the window still does not close when there
is no obstruction, press and hold the respective power window switch at the symbol j.
The window will then close without the obstruction sensor function.
왘 Press and hold the power window
switches at the symbol j until the
windows are completely closed.
proximately 1 second.
The windows are synchronized.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Summer opening feature
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by simultaneously
앫
opening the windows
앫
opening the tilt/sliding sunroof
앫
turning on the seat ventilation* for
the driver’s seat
i The seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat
is automatically set to the highest level if activated via summer opening feature.
왘 Press and hold button Œ until the
windows and tilt/sliding sunroof have
reached the desired position.
왘 Release button Œ to interrupt pro-
cedure.
Convenience closing feature
When you lock the vehicle, you can close
the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof simultaneously.
Warning!
When closing the windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof, be sure that there is no
danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
앫
왘 Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** at
the driver’s outside door handle
(컄 page 211). The SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** must
be in close proximity to the driver’s
door handle.
왘 Release button ‹ to interrupt pro-
cedure.
왘 Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** at
the driver’s outside door handle.
The SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** must be in close proximity to the driver’s door handle.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
Release button ‹ to stop the closing
procedure. To open, press and hold
button Œ. To continue the closing
after making sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure, press and hold
button ‹.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
앫
Release the lock button on the outside
door handle (컄 page 80) to stop the
closing procedure.
앫
Pull on the outside door handle and
hold firmly. The windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof will open for as long as
the outside door handle is held but the
door not opened.
왘 Press and hold button ‹ until the
windows and tilt/sliding sunroof are
completely closed.
G
왘 Press and hold the lock button on an
outside door handle (컄 page 80) until
the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof
are completely closed.
왘 Release the lock button on the out-
side door handle to interrupt procedure.
211
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of
glass. In the event of an accident, the glass
may shatter. This may result in an opening
in the roof.
Opening and closing the power tilt/
sliding sunroof (Maybach 57)
The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and
closed electrically. The switch for the tilt/
sliding sunroof is on the overhead control panel.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them
properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing
their seat belts properly as entire body
parts or portions of them may protrude
from the passenger compartment.
5 Screen
With the sunroof closed or tilted open,
screen 5 can be slid into the roof opening to help provide shade. When sliding
the sunroof open, the screen will also retract.
Sunroof switch
1
2
3
4
Push back to slide sunroof open
Push forward to slide sunroof closed
Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
Push up to raise sunroof at rear
212
Warning!
G
When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/
sliding sunroof can be immediately halted
by releasing the switch or, if the switch was
moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges which
can stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in
malfunctions.
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or
closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur (컄 page 403).
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
! Please keep in mind that weather
conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroof
when leaving the vehicle. If water enters the
vehicle interior, vehicle electronics could be
damaged which is not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, resonance noises may result in addition to the
usual wind noises. They are caused by minimal
pressure changes in the passenger compartment. To reduce or eliminate these noises,
change the position of the tilt/sliding sunroof
or open a side window slightly.
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
sunroof using the SmartKey, see “Summer
opening feature” (컄 page 211) and “Convenience closing feature” (컄 page 211).
Depending on current position, the tilt/sliding
sunroof may also open or close when the air
recirculation button , or the charcoal filter
button e (컄 page 193) is pressed and held
for 2 seconds.
i With the SmartKey in starter switch posi-
Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof
왘 To open, close, raise or lower the tilt/
sliding sunroof, move the switch to
the resistance point in the required
direction 1 to 4.
왘 Release the sunroof switch when the
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
desired position.
Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding
sunroof
왘 To open, close, raise or lower the tilt/
sliding sunroof, move the switch past
the resistance point in the required
direction 1 to 4 and release.
The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely.
Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof
tion 0 or removed from the starter switch, the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be operated
왘 Move the switch in any direction.
앫
until you open the driver’s or passenger
door
is blocked during the closing procedure, the
sunroof will stop and reopen slightly.
앫
for up to approximately 5 minutes
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof
Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding
sunroof (Maybach 57)
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized
앫
after the consumer battery has been
disconnected
앫
the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
closed manually
앫
a malfunction
앫
the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
smoothly
왘 Remove the respective fuse from the
fuse box (컄 page 426).
왘 Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse
box.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Move and hold the sunroof switch in
direction of arrow 4 until the tilt/
sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
rear.
왘 Keep holding the sunroof switch in
direction of arrow 4 for approximately 1 second.
왘 Check the Express-open feature.
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps.
213
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62)
The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and
closed electrically.
You can operate the tilt/sliding sunroof
from the cockpit or from the rear passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/
sliding sunroof can be immediately halted
by releasing the switch or, if the switch was
moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of
glass. In the event of an accident, the glass
may shatter. This may result in an opening
in the roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them
properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing
their seat belts properly as entire body
parts or portions of them may protrude
from the passenger compartment.
214
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Warning!
G
When closing the screen, make sure no one
can be caught and/or injured.
In case of danger, release the switch and, if
necessary, push the switch in direction
“open”.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges which
can stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in
malfunctions.
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or
closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur (컄 page 403).
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
sunroof using the SmartKey, see “Summer
opening feature” (컄 page 211) and “Convenience closing feature” (컄 page 211).
Depending on current position, the tilt/sliding
sunroof may also open or close when the air
recirculation button , or the charcoal filter
button e (컄 page 193) is pressed and held
for two seconds.
i With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be operated
앫
until you open the driver’s or passenger
door
앫
for up to approximately 5 minutes
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Operating from the cockpit
Opening and closing the screen
The switch for the tilt/sliding sunroof is
on the overhead control panel.
왘 To open or close the screen, move the
sunroof switch to the resistance point
in the required direction of arrow 1
or 2.
Release the sunroof switch when the
screen has reached the desired position.
Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof
왘 Open the screen if it is closed.
왘 To open, close, raise, or lower the tilt/
Sunroof switch, front
1 Push back to slide screen or sunroof
open
2 Push forward to slide screen or sunroof closed
3 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
4 Push up to raise sunroof at rear
sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
switch to resistance point in the required direction of arrows 1 to 4.
왘 Release the sunroof switch when the
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
desired position.
Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding
sunroof
왘 Open the screen if it is closed.
왘 To open, close, raise, or lower the tilt/
sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
switch past the resistance point in the
required direction of arrows 1 to 4
and release.
The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely.
Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof
during Express-operation
왘 Move the switch in any direction.
i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof
is blocked during the closing procedure, the
tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly.
i If the screen is closed, the screen opens
first when you push the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 1.
Push the sunroof switch again in direction of
arrow 1 to open the tilt/sliding sunroof.
The screen only operates with the tilt/sliding
sunroof closed.
215
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Operating from the rear passenger compartment
The switches are in the storage compartment in the rear center armrest.
Opening and closing the screen
왘 To open or close the screen, press
sunroof switch 4 at 3 or 2.
The switches are in the storage compartment under the rear center armrest.
Release the sunroof switch when the
screen has reached the desired position.
Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the screen
왘 To open or close the screen, press
sunroof switch 4 past the resistance
point at 3 or 2 and release.
왘 The screen opens or closes completeSunroof switches, rear (vehicles with rear
center seat*)
Sunroof switches, rear
1
2
3
4
Press to lower sunroof at rear
Press to slide screen or sunroof closed
Press to slide screen or sunroof open
Switch for screen and sliding portion
of roof
5 Press to raise sunroof at rear
6 Switch for tilt portion of roof
1
2
3
4
Press to lower sunroof at rear
Press to slide screen or sunroof closed
Press to slide screen or sunroof open
Switch for screen and sliding portion
of roof
5 Press to raise sunroof at rear
6 Switch for tilt portion of roof
i If the screen is closed, the screen will open
first when you press sunroof switch 4 at 3.
Press sunroof switch 4 again at 3 to open
the tilt/sliding sunroof.
The screen only operates with the tilt/sliding
sunroof closed.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
216
ly.
Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof
왘 Open the screen if it is closed.
왘 To open or close the tilt/sliding sun-
roof, press sunroof switch 4 to the
resistance point at 3 or 2.
왘 Release sunroof switch 4 when the
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
desired position.
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding
sunroof
왘 Open the screen if it is closed.
왘 To open or close the tilt/sliding sun-
roof, press sunroof switch 4 past the
resistance point at 3 or 2 and release.
Fully raising and lowering the power tilt/
sliding sunroof
왘 Remove the respective fuse from the
fuse box (컄 page 426).
왘 Open the screen if it is closed.
왘 Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse
왘 To raise or lower the tilt/sliding sun-
roof, press sunroof switch 6 past the
resistance point at 1 or 5 and release.
왘 To stop the procedure, press the
switch again.
The rear tilt/sliding sunroof opens or
closes completely.
왘 Press sunroof switch 4 again.
Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding
sunroof (Maybach 62)
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized
i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof
앫
is blocked during the closing procedure, the
tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly.
after the consumer battery has been
disconnected
앫
the tilt/sliding sunroof has been operated manually
앫
a malfunction
앫
the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
smoothly
Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof
during Express-operation
Raising and lowering the power tilt/sliding sunroof
왘 Open the screen if it is closed.
box.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 If the tilt/sliding sunroof is raised at
the rear, lower and close it.
왘 Move and hold the sunroof switch in
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 215) or
press sunroof switch 6 at 5
(컄 page 216) until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the rear.
왘 Keep pressing the respective switch
for approximately 1 second.
왘 Check the Express-open feature
(컄 page 215).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps.
왘 To raise or lower the tilt/sliding sun-
roof, press sunroof switch 6 to the
resistance point at 1 or 5.
왘 Release sunroof switch 6 when the
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
desired position.
217
Controls in detail
Electrotransparent roof*
Electrotransparent roof*
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Operating the electrotransparent
roof
You can operate the electrotransparent
roof from the cockpit or from the rear
passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
When closing the screen, make sure no one
can be caught and/or injured.
In case of danger, release the switch and, if
necessary, push the switch in direction
“open”.
The electrotransparent roof is made out of
glass. In the event of an accident, the glass
may shatter. This may result in an opening
in the roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them
properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing
their seat belts properly as entire body
parts or portions of them may protrude
from the passenger compartment.
218
Operating from the cockpit
The switch for the electrotransparent
roof is on the overhead control unit.
i With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the
electrotransparent roof can be operated
앫
until you open the driver’s or passenger
door
앫
for up to approximately 5 minutes.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
Electrotransparent roof switches, front
1 Push back to slide screen closed
2 Push forward to slide screen open
3 Pull down to make the electrotransparent roof opaque/switch off roof
lighting
4 Push up to make the electrotransparent roof transparent/switch on roof
lighting
Controls in detail
Electrotransparent roof*
Opening the screen
왘 Slide the switch to the resistance
point in direction of arrow 2.
왘 Release the switch when the screen
has reached the desired position.
Stopping the screen during
Express-operation
Operating from the rear passenger compartment
왘 Move the switch in any direction.
The switches are in the storage compartment under the rear center armrest.
Making the electrotransparent roof
transparent
Closing the screen
The screen must be completely open.
왘 Move the switch to the resistance
왘 Push the switch in direction of
point in direction of arrow 1.
왘 Release the switch when the screen
has reached the desired position.
arrow 4.
Making the electrotransparent roof
opaque
Fully opening the screen (Express-open)
The screen must be completely open.
왘 Move the switch past the resistance
왘 Pull the switch in direction of
point in direction of arrow 2 and release.
The screen opens completely.
Fully closing the screen (Express-close)
왘 Move the switch past the resistance
point in direction of arrow 1 and release.
The electrotransparent roof turns
opaque and the screen closes completely.
arrow 3.
Switching on roof lighting
Electrotransparent roof switches, rear
The screen must be completely closed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
왘 Press the switch in direction of
arrow 4.
Switching off roof lighting
왘 Pull the switch in direction of
Press to make roof opaque
Press to slide screen closed
Press to slide screen open
Switch for screen
Press to make roof transparent
Switch for electrotransparent roof
arrow 3.
219
Controls in detail
Electrotransparent roof*
Opening and closing the screen
왘 To open or close the screen, press
switch 4 to the resistance point at 3
or 2.
Release the switch when the screen
has reached the desired position.
Electrotransparent roof switches, rear (vehicles with rear center seat*)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press to make roof opaque
Press to slide screen closed
Press to slide screen open
Switch for screen
Press to make roof transparent
Switch for electrotransparent roof
220
Making the electrotransparent roof
transparent
왘 Press switch 6 at 5.
The screen opens automatically and
the electrotransparent roof turns
transparent.
Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the screen
Making the electrotransparent roof
opaque
왘 To open or close the screen, press
왘 If the screen is closed, open it com-
switch 4 past the resistance point
at 3 or 2 and release.
The screen opens or closes
completely.
Stopping the screen during
Express-operation
왘 Press switch 4 again.
pletely.
왘 Press switch 6 at 1.
The electrotransparent roof turns
opaque.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are
described on the following pages:
앫
Cruise control and Distronic**, with
which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed.
앫
Airmatic DC adjusts the vehicle suspension characteristics automatically
and controls the vehicle level.
앫
Vehicle level control, with which you
can change the vehicle level.
앫
Parktronic and Parking Assist System
(PAS), which serves as a parking assistant.
For information on the BAS, ABS, ESP®
and electro-hydraulic brake, see “Driving
safety systems” (컄 page 103).
Cruise control
Cruise control automatically maintains
the speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set or resume
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Warning!
G
Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
Cruise control lever
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering column.
Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable
to travel at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
traffic because conditions do not allow
safe driving at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel
spin and loss of control.
앫
Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
1
2
3
4
Sets current or higher speed
Sets current or lower speed
Cancels cruise control
Resume at last set speed
The cruise control function is operated
by means of the cruise control lever.
221
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting current speed
왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the de-
sired speed.
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of arrow 2.
The current speed is set.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelera-
tor pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected
speed to the vehicle maximum speed are
illuminated.
i On uphill or downhill grades, cruise control may not be able to maintain the set
speed. Once the grade eases, the set speed
will be resumed.
Canceling cruise control
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
왘 Step on the brake pedal.
Cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
or
222
왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3.
Cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
! Moving the gear selector lever to
position N while driving also cancels cruise
control. However, the gear selector lever
should not be moved to position N while driving, except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
i The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.
Setting a higher speed
왘 Lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 221) and
hold it until the desired speed is
reached.
왘 Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate cruise control. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), cruise control resumes
the last speed set.
Setting a lower speed
왘 Depress the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 221) and
hold it until the desired speed is
reached.
왘 Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
i When you use the cruise control lever to
decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the engine’s braking power
does not slow the vehicle sufficiently.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 221).
Slower
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 221).
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
G
The speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions
permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to
preset speed could cause an accident and/
or serious injury to you and others.
왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 221).
The cruise control resumes the last set
speed.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelera-
tor pedal.
The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected
speed to the vehicle maximum speed are
illuminated.
Distronic**
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
cruise control system increases driving
convenience afforded by the cruise control during travel on expressways and
other major roads.
앫
If the Distronic distance sensor detects a slower moving vehicle directly
ahead, your vehicle speed will be reduced so that you follow that vehicle
at a preset distance.
앫
If there is no vehicle directly ahead of
you, Distronic will function in the
same way as cruise control
(컄 page 221).
Warning!
G
Distronic adaptive cruise control is no substitute for active driving involvement. It
does not react to stationary objects, nor
does it recognize or predict the curvature
and lane layout or the movement of vehicles ahead. Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20% of the vehicle’s braking
power.
Warning!
G
Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed
adjustment reduction capability is intended to make cruise control more effective
and usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it is not intended to, nor does it, replace the need for extreme care. The
responsibility for the vehicle speed and the
distance to the vehicle ahead, including
most importantly brake operation to assure safe stopping distance, always rests
with the driver.
Distronic cannot take street and traffic
conditions into account.
Warning!
G
Distronic requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the
system.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to road, traffic and weather
conditions and to provide the steering,
braking and other driving inputs necessary
to retain control of the vehicle.
223
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as a
“Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is
intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of
the device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference,
and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Warning!
Distronic cannot take street and traffic
conditions into account. Only use Distronic
if the road, weather and traffic conditions
make it advisable to travel at a steady
speed.
Warning!
G
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic
during conditions of fog and heavy rain,
snow or sleet.
Warning!
G
Distronic cannot take weather conditions
into account. Switch off Distronic or do not
turn it on if:
앫
224
G
roads are slippery or covered with
snow or ice. The wheels could lose traction while braking or accelerating, and
the vehicle could skid
앫
the sensor is dirty or visibility is diminished due to snow, rain or fog. The distance control could be impaired
Always pay attention to traffic conditions
even while Distronic is switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able to recognize
dangerous situations until it is too late and
could cause an accident resulting in personal or fatal injury to you or others.
Warning!
G
Close attention to road and traffic conditions is imperative at all times, regardless
of whether or not Distronic is activated.
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on
winding roads or in heavy traffic because
conditions do not allow safe driving at a
steady speed.
Distronic will not react to stationary objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle
in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic will also not respond to oncoming
vehicles.
Switch off Distronic:
앫
when changing from the left to the
right lane if vehicles are moving more
slowly in the left lane
앫
when entering a turn lane or highway
off ramp
Controls in detail
Driving systems
앫
in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, Distronic will continue
to maintain the set speed unless deactivated. Distronic is designed and intended only
to maintain a set speed and keep a set distance from moving objects in front of it.
Warning!
If Distronic is activated, one or two segments come on around the set speed.
i The vehicle speed displayed on the speedometer can briefly vary from the speed setting
on the Distronic system.
왘 Immediately brake the vehicle to
avoid a collision.
Under no circumstances should the
driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking. See the following warning note.
The intermittent warning sound ceases and the red distance warning
lamp l goes out when the necessary distance to the vehicle ahead is
again established.
G
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
Distronic displays in the speedometer
dial
Segments
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
ahead, the segments from the speed of
the vehicle ahead to the set speed come
on.
If Distronic calculates that there is a danger of collision
앫
the distance warning lamp l in
the instrument cluster comes on red
앫
an intermittent warning sounds
Set speed
225
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
An intermittent warning sounds and the
distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster is illuminated if the Distronic
system calculates that the distance to the
vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current
speed indicate that Distronic will not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to
maintain the preset following distance,
which creates a danger of a collision.
Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maximum of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This corresponds
to about 20% of the maximum deceleration ability of your vehicle.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. The warning sound
is intended as a final caution that you have
not interceded with your own braking inputs to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation of the
warning signal to intercede with your own
braking, as that will result in potentially
dangerous emergency braking which will
not always result in an impact being avoided.
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times,
including the area under the brake pedal.
Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with
the braking ability of the Distronic system.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
If Distronic is deactivated, you can see
the standard display of Distronic in the
multifunction display.
Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to
restore the preset distance or to maintain
the speed. The brake pedal is automatically applied as this happens which results in
the brake pedal moving.
Do not place your foot under the brake
pedal – your foot could become caught.
Distronic menu in the control system
In the Distronic menu you can read the
current settings for Distronic. What appears in the display depends on whether
Distronic and the distance warning function are turned on or off.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following displays.
226
Distronic deactivated
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
ahead
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning function
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic activated
Cruise control lever
Activating Distronic
If you turn Distronic on, you will see the
set speed in the multifunction display for
about 5 seconds. If Distronic is activated,
you then see the following display in the
multifunction display.
The Distronic system is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
You can activate Distronic when
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering column.
앫
you are driving above 25 mph
(40 km/h)
앫
the ESP® is activated (컄 page 107)
i The maximum speed you can set is
110 mph (180 km/h).
If Distronic has not been activated after
pressing the cruise control lever you will
see the message --- in the multifunction
display.
In the following cases you cannot activate Distronic:
1 Distronic activated
1
2
3
4
Sets current or higher speed
Sets current or lower speed
Deactivates Distronic
Resumes at last set speed
앫
up to 2 minutes after starting the engine
앫
when you brake
앫
if you have set the parking brake
앫
if the gear selector lever is in
position P, R or N
앫
if the ESP® is switched off
227
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting the current speed
Setting a higher speed
Setting a lower speed
왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the de-
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 227) to
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 227) to
sired speed.
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of arrow 2.
Distronic is activated and the current
speed is set.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelera-
tor pedal.
i If you do not take your foot off of the accelerator completely, the following message
will appear in the multifunction display:
DISTRONIC
OVERRIDE
Distronic will not work to maintain the distance to slower moving vehicles in front of
you. Your vehicle speed will then be determined only by the accelerator pedal position.
increase vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
decrease vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
The new speed is set.
The new speed is set.
The stored speed is displayed in the
multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and one or two
segments around the stored speed
come on in the speedometer
(컄 page 225).
The stored speed is displayed in the
multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and one or two
segments around the stored speed
come on in the speedometer
(컄 page 225).
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate Distronic. After brief acceleration
(e.g. for passing), the cruise control resumes
the last speed set.
i When you use the cruise control lever to
decelerate, the brakes will be applied to support deceleration.
In addition, the transmission will automatically downshift on long downhill grades.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 227).
228
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
Deactivating Distronic
G
The speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions
permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to
preset speed could cause an accident and/
or serious injury to you and others.
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 227).
Distronic is set to the last stored
speed.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelera-
tor pedal.
There are several ways to deactivate the
Distronic system:
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 227).
or
왘 Step on the brake pedal.
Distronic is deactivated. The last
speed set is stored into memory.
i The following message will appear in the
multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds:
DISTRONIC OFF
The last stored speed is deleted when you turn
off the engine.
Distronic deactivates automatically
when:
앫
You set the parking brake.
앫
You drive slower than 22 mph
(35 km/h).
앫
The ESP® is active (컄 page 107) or you
deactivate the ESP®.
앫
You move the transmission gear selector lever into position N.
A signal will sound. The DISTRONIC
OFF message appears in the multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds.
Warning!
G
Distronic switches off and releases the
brakes when the vehicle decelerates below
the minimum speed of approximately
22 mph (35 km/h) by operation of the system. At that time the driver must apply the
brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed
further or bring it to a stop.
Setting the following distance in
Distronic
You can set the specified following distance for Distronic by varying the time
setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time setting and the current
speed of your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets the required following distance to the vehicle ahead. The set
distance will be shown in the multifunction display.
Warning!
G
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion
to select the appropriate setting given
road conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred
driving style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following
distance.
229
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The distance warning function on/off
button and thumbwheel for setting distance are located on the lower part of
the front center console.
Decreasing distance
Decreasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a shorter following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 in direction of
arrow 5.
Distance warning function
When Distronic is deactivated, this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a slower vehicle moving in the
vehicle’s path and the danger of a collision exists:
1 Distance warning function on/off
button
2 Indicator lamp
3 Thumbwheel for setting distance
4 Increasing distance
5 Decreasing distance
Increasing distance
Increasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a greater following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 in direction of
arrow 4.
230
Warning!
G
If the distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on while driving
and/or an intermittent warning sounds,
immediate attention on the part of the
driver is required.
As required by the traffic situation, apply
the brakes and navigate around a possible
obstacle. However, do not drive by relying
on the distance warning function, as this
will result in an emergency braking application. Especially depending on road surface conditions and driver reaction, this
will not always enable you to avoid a collision.
앫
The distance warning lamp l in
the instrument cluster comes on.
앫
An intermittent warning sounds.
i Complex driving situations are not always
If these warnings are issued, you must
brake manually to maintain a safe distance and avoid a collision with the vehicle ahead.
fully recognized by Distronic. This could result
in wrong or missing distance warnings.
When pressing the brake pedal, the
warning sound stops. The warning sound
also stops when the distance to the vehicle ahead is sufficient again without applying the brake pedal. In this case the
distance warning lamp l also extinguishes.
Activating
왘 Press button 1 {.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. A loudspeaker symbol appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 227).
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Deactivating
왘 Press button 1 {.
The indicator lamp 2 on the button
goes out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in the multifunction display.
Distronic regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly
ahead of it, but does not register stationary objects in the road, e.g.:
앫
a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
앫
a disabled vehicle
Driving with Distronic
앫
an oncoming vehicle
This section describes a number of driving situations where special precaution is
required on the part of the driver. Be
prepared to brake in such situations. This
will deactivate the Distronic system.
The driver must always be on the alert, observe all traffic and intercede as required
by steering or braking the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Distronic works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. following another vehicle ahead of you at a
distance set by Distronic). This means that:
Warning!
G
For cleaning and care of the Distronic
sensor, see “Cleaning the Distronic system sensor” (컄 page 346).
i If the message:
DISTRONIC
CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
disappears during driving and last speed
stored flashes for approximately 5 seconds,
the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved; Distronic is
again operational.
Turns and bends
Distronic should not be used in snowy or
icy road conditions.
앫
Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you change lanes.
앫
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning system is a dirty sensor (located behind the hood grille), especially at times
of snow and ice or heavy rain. In such a
case, Distronic will switch off, and the
message:
While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
of it, then your vehicle could accelerate
to the previously selected speed.
DISTRONIC
CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect a moving vehicle in front, or it may
detect one too soon. This may cause your
vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly.
appears in the multifunction display.
231
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Offset driving
Lane changing
Narrow vehicles
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset
from your direct line of travel may not be
detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes. There will be insufficient
distance to the lane changing vehicle.
Because of their narrow profiles, the vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane have not yet been detected by
Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicles ahead.
232
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Airmatic DC (Dual Control)
Airmatic automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height
for your vehicle. Airmatic consists of
three components:
앫
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
앫
Stiffness of spring
앫
Vehicle level control
The ADS automatically selects the optimum damping for the respective driving
conditions. At the same time the suspension is set to either sporty or regular.
Damping and suspension are adjusted
automatically according to your driving
style and road conditions. In addition to
the automatic mode designed for your
convenience, you can adjust the suspension tuning yourself by selecting from
two other levels using the button on the
center console.
Suspension tuning
The suspension tuning is set according
to:
앫
Your driving style
앫
Road surface conditions
앫
Your choice of suspension style,
“Comfort”, “Sporty 1” or “Sporty 2”,
which you select using the damping
button.
1 Damping button
2 Indicator lamp
3 Indicator lamp
컄컄
233
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄 왘 Start the engine (컄 page 60).
왘 Press damping button 1 until the de-
sired suspension style is set.
앫
If both indicator lamps are out,
you have chosen the automatic
mode for soft damping. The message:
AIRMATIC DC
CONVENIENCE
for Comfort suspension tuning
appears in the multifunction display.
앫
If one indicator lamp is on, the
control system supports a primarily dynamic style of driving. The
message:
AIRMATIC DC
SPORTS 1
for Sporty 1 suspension tuning appears in the multifunction display.
234
앫
If both indicator lamps are on, the
system is set for a dynamic style of
driving. The message:
AIRMATIC DC
SPORTS 2
for Sporty 2 suspension tuning appears in the multifunction display.
i The selected suspension style is stored in
memory, even after the SmartKey is removed
from the starter switch.
Vehicle level control
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its
ride height to
앫
increase vehicle safety
앫
reduce fuel consumption
Warning!
G
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
and feet away from wheel housing area,
and stay away from under the vehicle
when lowering the vehicle chassis.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following vehicle level settings can
be selected when the vehicle is stationary
(Maybach 57, Maybach 62):
Vehicle level
Indicator lamp Use for
when stationary
Ride height increase over Automatic lowering
normal
(depending on vehicle speed)
Normal
Lamp off
For driving on normal roads.
None
Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm)
Raised
Lamp on
For driving on rough roads or
with snow chains.
Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm)
Max. approx. 1.4 in (35 mm)
The normal level of the Maybach 57 S is
0.6 in (15 mm) lower than for other models. The data given in the following table
is based on the normal vehicle level of
the Maybach 57 S:
Vehicle level
Indicator lamp Use for
when stationary
Ride height increase over Automatic lowering
normal
(depending on vehicle speed)
Normal
Lamp off
For driving on normal roads.
None
None
Raised
Lamp on
For driving on rough roads or
with snow chains.
Approx. 1.8 in (45 mm)
Max. approx. 1.8 in (45 mm)
The button is located on the lower part
of the front center console.
235
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 Press button 1 again to lower the
vehicle. The indicator lamp 2 is off.
The selected vehicle level setting remains
stored in memory even if the engine is
turned off and restarted except when
you
앫
1 Vehicle level control button
2 Indicator lamp
왘 Start the engine.
왘 Briefly press button 1 to change
from one level setting to the other.
The message:
AIRMATIC
VEHICLE RISING
appears for approximately
10 seconds in the multifunction display when changing from normal level to raised level. The indicator
lamp 2 is then on.
236
앫
Normal level (Maybach 57,
Maybach 62): At a speed exceeding
approximately 68 mph (110 km/h),
the ride height is reduced automatically (컄 page 235).
앫
Raised level: At a speed exceeding approximately 75 mph (120 km/h), the
ride height is reduced automatically
(컄 page 235).
앫
With decreasing speed, the ride
height is again raised to the normal
level.
exceed a speed of 75 mph (120 km/h)
or
앫
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
lowered according to the selected level
setting and to the vehicle speed:
maintain a speed of between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for
more than 5 minutes
The vehicle then lowers to normal level.
The indicator lamp 2 goes out.
i These height adjustments are so small
that you may not notice any change.
Select the raised level only when required by current driving conditions.
Otherwise
앫
handling may be impaired
앫
fuel consumption may increase
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic system (Parking assist)
Warning!
G
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers always rests with the driver.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or
road curbs). Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the
vehicle.
The operational function of the Parktronic
can be affected by dirty sensors, especially
at times of snow and ice, see “Cleaning the
Parktronic system sensors” (컄 page 346).
The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the
vehicle and an obstacle.
The Parktronic system is automatically
activated when you switch on the ignition, release the parking brake, and
placed the gear selector lever in
position D, R, or N. The Parktronic system
deactivates at speeds over approximately
11 mph (18 km/h). At lower speeds the
Parktronic system turns on again.
The Parktronic system also deactivates
when you place the gear selector lever in
position P or depress the parking brake
pedal.
The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in
the rear bumper.
1 Sensors in the front bumper
Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash,
or the air brakes of trucks) can cause the
system to send erratic indications, and
should be taken into consideration.
Warning!
G
Make sure no persons or animals are in the
area in which you are maneuvering. You
could otherwise injure them.
237
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Range of the sensors
Front sensors
To function properly, the sensors must be
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean
the sensors regularly, being careful not
to scratch or damage the sensors, see
“Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors”
(컄 page 346).
Center
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Rear sensors
Warning indicators
Center
approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners
approx. 32 in (80 cm)
! During parking maneuvers, pay special attention to objects located above or below the
height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs, painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The Parktronic
system will not detect such objects at close
range and damage to your vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g.
truck air brakes, car wash, or jackhammers)
may impair the operation of the Parktronic
system.
Minimum distance
238
If the system detects an obstacle in this
range, all the warning lamps come on
and you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is closer than the minimum distance, the actual distance might no
longer be indicated by the system.
Center
approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners
approx. 6 in (15 cm)
Visual signals indicate to the driver the
relative distance between the sensors
and an obstacle. The warning indicator
for the front area is located above the
center air vents in the dashboard. The
warning indicator for the rear area is integrated in the rear roof lining
(컄 pages 38-44).
Maybach 62 with partition*
You have an additional warning indicator for the rear area in the roof lining, in
front of the partition.
In order for you to see this warning indicator, the interior rear view mirror tilts
slightly upward if:
앫
the partition and curtain are not
completely open
앫
the gear selector lever is in position R
Controls in detail
Driving systems
In case you still cannot see the warning
indicator after lifting up the rear view
mirror:
Each warning indicator is divided into
five yellow and two red segments for either side of the vehicle.
왘 Adjust the interior rear view mirror
The Parktronic system is ready when the
green readiness indicators 3 are illuminated.
by hand until you can see the warning indicator.
The interior rear view mirror returns to
its original position as soon as:
앫
the gear selector lever is no longer in
position R
앫
you exceed a speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h)
Warning indicators activated
As your vehicle approaches an object,
one or more segments will come on, depending on the distance between your
vehicle and the object. When the second
red segment comes on, you have reached
the minimum distance.
앫
Front area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red
segment comes on and a constant
acoustic warning lasting a maximum
of 2 seconds will sound for the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is
placed in position P or the parking
brake is activated.
앫
Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red
segment comes on and a constant
acoustic warning lasting a maximum
of 2 seconds will sound for the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is
placed in position D, P, or the parking
brake is activated.
The position of the gear selector lever
determines which warning indicators
will be activated.
Gear selector Warning indicator
lever position
D
Front area activated
R or N
Rear and front area activated
P
Neither activated
1 Left front area warning indicator
2 Right front area warning indicator
3 Readiness indicators
239
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching the Parktronic system on/off
Parktronic malfunction
The Parktronic system can be switched
off manually.
If only the red distance segments illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds,
there is a malfunction in the Parktronic
system. The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and
the indicator lamp in the Parktronic
switch comes on.
The Parktronic button is located on the
lower part of the front center console.
Parking Assist System (PAS)
왘 Have the Parktronic system checked
by an authorized Maybach Studio as
soon as possible.
1 Parktronic on/off
2 Indicator lamp
Switching off the Parktronic system
왘 Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
If only the red segments of the Parktronic warning indicator go out and no warning sounds, then the sensors of the
Parktronic system are dirty or malfunctioning. Malfunction may also be caused
by interference from other radio or ultrasonic signals. The Parktronic system will
switch itself off after 20 seconds.
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Clean Parktronic system sensors
(컄 page 346).
왘 Switch on the ignition.
Switching on the Parktronic system
or
왘 Press button 1 again.
왘 Check Parktronic operation at anoth-
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
i The Parktronic system is automatically
switched on when the ignition is switched on
(컄 page 60).
240
er location to rule out interference
from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.
1 COMAND display
2 To switch COMAND on/off
3 To switch between parallel parking/
reverse parking
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The Parking Assist System (PAS) is an optical parking aid. It shows you the area
behind the vehicle on the COMAND
display 1.
View through the camera
In addition, the PAS contains guide lines
to help you with reverse parking
(back-in parking) and parallel parking.
The 20 in (50 cm) 1, 40 in (100 cm) 2
and 107 in (270 cm) 3 guide lines correspond to the respective distance on the
ground to the rear end of the vehicle.
Warning!
The area behind the vehicle is displayed
as a reverse-mirror image similar to the
view in a rear view mirror.
Please note that objects which do not
touch the ground, such as the bumper of a
vehicle parked behind you, a trailer hitch,
or the back of a truck, may appear to be
further away than they actually are. In this
case, you should not use the guide lines to
judge distance. The use of the guide lines
to judge distance increases the risk of impacting the objects.
The camera is in the license plate recess
next to the handle for the trunk lid.
Warning!
1 Camera
For cleaning and care of the camera lens,
see “Cleaning of the Parking Assist System (PAS) camera lens” (컄 page 347).
G
1
2
3
4
20 in (50 cm) guide line
40 in (100 cm) guide line
107 in (270 cm) guide line
Guide line for vehicle width
G
The PAS is a supplement system. It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the need for
extreme care. The responsibility during
parking and other driving maneuvers always rests with the driver.
The PAS may show obstacles with a distort컄컄
ed perspective, incorrectly or not at all.
241
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄 Special attention must be paid to objects
outside of the camera’s field of view such
as those located very close to or below the
rear bumper, or above the recessed grip of
the trunk lid. Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the
vehicle.
The PAS does not warn you about impending collisions with objects. The driver is always responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to the immediate surroundings while parking or maneuvering the vehicle. This applies not only to
the area behind the vehicle, but also to the
area in front of and to the sides of the vehicle. Failure to do so could result in injury
to persons and/or damage to the vehicle or
other property. We also recommend that
the driver use the Parktronic system when
parking or maneuvering the vehicle.
Warning!
G
PAS may not function if:
앫
the trunk lid is not completely closed
앫
it is raining or snowing heavily, or if
there is thick fog
앫
in a very dark area
앫
the camera is exposed to very strong
white light (white stripes may appear
on the COMAND display)
앫
the surrounding area is lit with fluorescent light (the COMAND display can
flicker)
앫
there is a sudden change in temperature, for example when you drive out
of the cold into a heated garage in
winter (lens condensation)
앫
outside temperatures are very high
(lens condensation)
G
앫
the camera lens is dirty or covered
see “Cleaning of the Parking Assist System (PAS) camera lens” (컄 page 347)
Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are maneuvering. You could otherwise injure them.
앫
Warning!
242
the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In
this case, have the position and setting
of the camera checked by a qualified
technician. Contact an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Do not use the PAS if the roads are icy, slippery or covered with snow. The vehicle
could slip causing the actual vehicle position to deviate from the one shown on the
COMAND display. This may cause injury to
you or others, or damage the vehicle or objects.
Mounting tires/rims of other specification
than the original equipment tires/rims may
impair the function of the PAS. Contact an
authorized Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
Use of PAS can be dangerous if you are
color-blind or have impaired color vision.
Only use PAS if you can see and distinguish
all colored guide lines shown by PAS on
the COMAND display.
Switching on PAS
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Switch on the COMAND (please refer
to the separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating
instructions).
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 Move gear selector lever to position R
(reverse gear).
The COMAND display will show the
area behind the vehicle with guide
lines to help you reverse into a parking place.
i If you activate a different function on the
driver’s COMAND controls while reverse parking or parallel parking, the image from the
back-up camera is interrupted.
To reactivate the camera, take the vehicle out
of reverse gear and then re-engage reverse
gear again.
Reverse parking (back-in parking)
This function helps you when you are reversing in a straight line or backing in at
any angle. The guide line for vehicle
width 4 shows the width necessary for
the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Please note that objects which do not
touch the ground, such as the bumper of a
vehicle parked behind you, a trailer hitch,
or the back of a truck, may appear to be
further away than they actually are. In this
case, you should not use the guide lines to
judge distance as the use of the guide lines
to judge distance increases the risk of impacting the objects.
Even when the object you approach is directly on the ground (and nothing on the
object extends above the ground beyond
the object’s contours directly touching the
ground) and no objects that do not touch
the ground, such as the bumper of a vehicle parked behind you, a trailer hitch, or
the back of a truck are in the path, do not
approach the object on the ground any
closer than red guide line 2.
1
2
3
4
First yellow guide line
Red guide line
Second yellow guide line
Guide line for vehicle width
1 Guide line for straight driving
2 Guide line for cornering
The guide line for straight driving 1
shows you the space necessary for your
vehicle.
When you turn the steering wheel, the
room required by the vehicle for reversing with the corresponding wheel angle
is shown with yellow guide lines 2.
Backing in straight
왘 Switch on the COMAND.
왘 Move gear selector lever to position R
(reverse gear).
You will see the guide line for reverse
컄컄
parking on the COMAND display.
243
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄 왘 Back in straight carefully.
The desired parking space is wide
enough if nothing protrudes into or
is within the guide lines.
Backing in at any angle
왘 Switch on the COMAND.
Parallel parking
왘 Press parallel parking button 1 on
This function assists you when you wish
to park in a row, e.g. in a parking place
parallel to the road.
i If you press the parallel parking/back-in
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location
앫
at a distance of approximately
3 feet (1 meter) parallel to the vehicle that is in front of the desired
parking space.
앫
in such a way that the front of the
parked vehicle is parallel to your
rear wheel.
왘 Move gear selector lever to position R
(reverse gear).
You will see the guide line for reverse
parking on the COMAND display.
왘 Turn steering wheel so that the guide
lines for cornering are pointing towards the desired parking space.
The parking space is wide enough if
nothing protrudes into the guide
lines.
parking selector button 1 again, you have selected the reverse parking assistance function
once more (컄 page 243).
왘 Switch on the COMAND.
왘 Move gear selector lever to position R
(reverse gear).
2 Vertical guide line
왘 Back in carefully.
왘 Back up carefully parallel to parked
car until the respective vertical guide
line 2 is at the end of the parked vehicle next to you.
왘 When the green guide line for
straight driving lies parallel inside the
desired parking space, straighten the
steering wheel for straight driving.
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
왘 Back in enough to leave sufficient
free space around the vehicle.
1 Parallel parking/back-in parking selector button
244
front center console.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
If the respective vertical guide line 2 is
not yet located at the end of the parked
vehicle and you are already turning into
the parking space, you could collide with
the parked vehicle. Stop the parking procedure immediately. Pull out of the parking space and start the parking procedure
over again.
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, turn
steering wheel in direction of parking
until extension guide line 4 intersects the reference point for the rear
tire of the vehicle parked next to
you 3.
or
왘 If there is no vehicle next to you to
use as a reference, turn steering
wheel until exterior boundary line 6
intersects the curb or some other
marking with which you would like
to parallel park.
i If there is an obstacle within vehicle contour guide lines 5 (e.g. part of the vehicle
parked behind you or a part of the curb), the
parking space is too small for your vehicle.
3
4
5
6
Tire reference point
Extension guide line
Vehicle contour guide lines
Exterior boundary line
i If you turn the steering wheel too far, the
following appears in the COMAND display:
Guidance by PAS not possible. Steering wheel
turned too far. Please turn back. Turn the
steering wheel back until the COMAND display clears and extension guide line 4 intersects the reference point for the rear tire of
the vehicle parked next to you 3.
If you back up using the wrong wheel angle,
the following appears in the COMAND display: Guidance by PAS no longer possible.
Pull out of the parking space and start the
parking procedure over again.
7 Bent guide line
왘 Back up with the set wheel angle.
The guide lines in the COMAND display disappear. After a short distance,
bent guide line 7 appears.
i If you turn the steering wheel while backing up, the following appears in the COMAND
display: Guidance by PAS no longer possible.
The calculated course is no longer being
followed. Pull out of the parking space and
start the parking procedure over again.
왘 Back up until bent guide line 7 inter-
sects the edge of the parking space,
e.g. the curb.
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
컄컄
245
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 Back up using the set wheel angle un-
til guide line 8 for straight driving is
parallel to the edge of the parking
space, e.g. the curb.
왘 Now straighten out steering wheel
and back up until you still have just
enough room behind the vehicle.
While doing so, observe the
Parktronic warning indicators
(컄 page 238).
컄컄
8 Guide line for straight driving
9 Guide line for cornering
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, turn
steering wheel as far as it will go in
the opposite direction.
The guide lines for straight driving 8
and cornering 9 appear in the
COMAND display.
246
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading
Cargo tie-down hooks
Six hooks are located in the trunk.
Carefully secure cargo by applying even
load on all hooks with rope of sufficient
strength to hold down the cargo.
Loading instructions
The total load weight including vehicle
occupants and luggage/cargo should not
exceed the load limit indicated on the
corresponding placard located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 315).
Warning!
G
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or
cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile
luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on the rearwindow shelf.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter
vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
247
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘 To use mirror, lift up cover 2.
Useful features
Vanity mirror lamp 1 comes on.
Vanity mirrors
왘 Press chrome label 4.
i If you disengage the sun visor from
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Warning!
Opening the vanity mirror
Vanity mirror 3 folds down and the
vanity mirror lamp comes on.
mounting, vanity mirror lamp 1 will switch
off.
G
Adjusting the vanity mirror
왘 Slide the mirror to the left or to the
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
right.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while the vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
Images in the mirror appear in normal size or larger, depending on the
position of the mirror.
! Close the vanity mirror cover (if open) before you disengage the sun visor from the
mounting and pivot it to the side
(컄 page 189).
Closing the vanity mirror
왘 Push vanity mirror 3 up until it en-
gages in place.
Storage compartments
Warning!
G
Vanity mirror in the rear
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put
luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than
the seat backs.
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will
help to prevent stored objects from being
thrown around and injuring vehicle occupants during
1 Vanity mirror lamp
2 Mirror cover
248
앫
braking
Example illustration from Maybach 57
앫
vehicle maneuvers or
3 Vanity mirror
4 Chrome label
앫
an accident.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Glove box
i The glove box can be heated or cooled.
The glove box can get very warm due to its
confined space (컄 page 201). When storing
heat-sensitive objects in the glove box, close
the air vent while heating the passenger compartment.
i An AUX socket is located in the glove box.
Portable audio devices can be plugged in
here.
Opening
왘 Press button 1.
The glove box lid 2 swings down.
Locking the glove box separately
You can lock the glove box separately,
e.g. when the vehicle is in the shop for
service.
왘 Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (컄 page 401).
왘 Insert the mechanical key into the
glove box lock and turn it to locked
position 4.
i The separate locking status of the glove
box can only be canceled by means of the mechanical key.
1 Glove box lid release
Closing
Unlocking the glove box separately
2 Glove box lid
왘 Push lid 2 up to close.
왘 Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (컄 page 401).
3
Unlocked position
4
Locked position
왘 Insert the mechanical key into the
glove box lock and turn it to
unlocked position 3.
You can now open the glove box.
249
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment in the glove box
Storage compartments in the front
doors
A storage compartment for pens, a flashlight and a coin holder is located in the
cover of the glove box.
Warning!
G
Opening
Always keep the door storage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to
catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt.
왘 Lightly touch cover plate.
The cover opens automatically.
Closing
왘 Lightly push the cover plate up until
it engages in lock.
Compartment for the front telephone
Warning!
G
Always keep the compartment for the
front telephone closed while driving. The
protruding telephone could otherwise
cause injury to you and others during
앫
braking
앫
vehicle maneuvers or
앫
an accident.
1 Compartment lid release button
2 Compartment for telephone
Opening
왘 Press release button 1.
The compartment lid opens downward. The telephone handset swings
out.
Closing
왘 Press button 1 to close.
! To prevent any damage, the telephone
flap must be folded down before closing the
telephone compartment.
i The Roadside Assistance button • and
the Information button ¡ (컄 page 285) are
located in the compartment for the front telephone.
250
1 Storage compartment
2 Opening button
3 Storage compartment with storage
space for change and CDs
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening the storage compartment
Opening the storage compartment
Opening the storage compartment
왘 Lift the lid 1 up.
왘 Lift the lid 1 or 2 up.
왘 Press button 3.
Closing the storage compartment
Closing the storage compartment
왘 Storage compartment 4 opens.
왘 Press the lid 1 down.
왘 Press the lid 1 or 2 down.
Closing the storage compartment
Opening the storage compartment
Storage compartments in the rear doors
(Maybach 62)
왘 Press button 2.
왘 Push the cover plate 4 up until it en-
gages in the lock.
Storage compartment under the driver’s
seat
The storage compartment 3 opens.
Closing the storage compartment
왘 Push the cover plate 3 up until it en-
gages in the lock.
Storage compartments in the rear doors
(Maybach 57)
1
2
3
4
1 Headphones storage compartment
2 Storage compartment (for ashtray in
vehicles with a rear center seat*)
Headphones storage compartment
Storage compartment
Opening button
Storage compartment (for ashtray in
vehicles with a rear center seat*)
1 Tabs
Opening the storage compartment
Opening the storage compartment
왘 Press tabs 1 together.
왘 Lift the lid 1 or 2 up.
왘 Fold the cover forward.
Closing the storage compartment
Closing the storage compartment
왘 Press the lid 1 or 2 down.
왘 Close the cover until both tabs 1 of
lock engage.
251
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment and storage compartment/drawer between the front
seats (Maybach 62 with partition*)
Opening storage compartment/drawer
왘 Press button 4 briefly.
The storage compartment/drawer 3
opens.
Closing storage compartment/drawer
왘 Push storage compartment/
drawer 3 until it engages in the lock.
Storage compartments in rear center
console
Opening/closing the storage compartment/drawer in rear center console
1 Storage compartment
2 Opening button for storage compartment
3 Storage compartment/drawer
4 Opening button for storage compartment/drawer
252
왘 To open, press button 1.
The storage compartment/drawer 2
opens.
왘 To close, push storage compartment/
drawer 2 in until it engages in the
lock.
Maybach 62:
왘 To open, press button 1.
The storage compartment/drawer 2
opens slightly.
The storage compartment 1 opens
upward.
ward until it engages in the lock.
Maybach 57:
in Maybach 57 with rear center seat* if your
vehicle configuration has the control panel
for the rear functions* on the lower rear enter
console.
왘 Press button 2 briefly.
왘 Push storage compartment 1 down-
i Maybach 62 with rear center seat*:
In the storage compartment/drawer is the rear
center console (컄 page 49).
i There is no storage compartment/drawer
Opening storage compartment
Closing storage compartment
i The remote control for the rear-cabin audiovisual system (see the separate COMAND
and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating
instructions) is located in the storage compartment/drawer.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
If necessary:
1 Opening button for storage compartment/drawer
2 Storage compartment/drawer
왘 Close the champagne flute/bottle
holder (컄 page 259).
or
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘 Close the folding table*
(컄 page 263).
왘 Press button 1 again.
왘 To close, press the cover 1 down-
ward.
Cover 1 engages automatically.
Multifunction compartment* on the
driver’s and/or front passenger’s seat
backrest
The storage compartment/drawer 2
opens fully.
왘 To close, push storage compartment/
drawer 2 in until it engages in the
lock.
Opening/closing the upper storage compartment in rear center console
(only Maybach 62)
Maybach 62 without partition*
Example illustration from Maybach 57
1 Cover
2 Opening button for upper storage
compartment
3 Opening button for upper storage
compartment
1 Multifunction compartment
2 Button for opening multifunction
compartment
왘 To open, press button 2 or 3.
Cover 1 swings upward.
Maybach 62 with partition*
1 Cover
2 Opening button for upper storage
compartment
왘 To open, press button 2.
왘 To close, press the cover 1 down-
ward.
Cover 1 engages automatically.
Opening the multifunction compartment
왘 Press button 2.
Multifunction compartment 1 folds
out.
Closing the multifunction compartment
왘 To close, press multifunction
compartment 1 until it engages.
Cover 1 swings upward.
253
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage pocket (only Maybach 62)
Warning!
G
Storage pockets for Maybach 62 without
partition*
Storage pockets for Maybach 62 with
partition*
Storage pockets are located on the left
and right side of the rear center console.
Storage pockets are located on the back
of the front seats.
1 Storage pocket
1 Storage pocket
The storage pocket is intended for storing
light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in
the storage pocket.
The storage pocket cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident.
254
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartments between the rear
seats
Warning!
G
Opening storage compartments 3, 4,
5 and 8
왘 Press the chrome label on the cover.
Always fold the rear center armrest 6
downward while the vehicle is in motion.
Without the armrest 6 folded down, the
rear center armrest could open the storage
compartment 5 in an accident or during
abrupt vehicle maneuvers. Objects stored
there then could be thrown around in the
vehicle interior and cause vehicle damage
and/or personal injury.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
1 Upper storage compartment with insert for champagne flutes
2 Opening button for upper storage
compartment
3 DVD player compartment and AUX
sockets, headphone jacks
4 CD changer compartment
5 Middle storage compartment
6 Rear center armrest with compartment for telephone, storage compartment/refrigerator** underneath
7 Release catch
8 Ashtray/storage compartment*
i For more information on DVD player,
AUX sockets, headphone jacks and CD changer, refer to the separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
Opening the upper storage compartment 1
왘 Press button 2.
The upper storage compartment
opens upward.
The compartment opens.
Closing storage compartments 3, 4, 5
and 8
왘 Press the cover closed.
The cover engages automatically.
Opening/closing the storage compartment in the rear center armrest
왘 To open, release catch 7 and swing
cover of the rear center armrest 6
upward.
왘 To close, press the cover of the rear
center armrest 6 downward.
The cover engages automatically.
i There is an additional storage compartment in front of the telephone compartment.
Opening/closing the storage compartment under the rear center armrest
왘 To open, lift up armrest 6.
왘 To close, press the armrest 6 down-
ward.
255
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartments in vehicles with a
rear center seat*
Opening/closing the telephone
compartment
왘 Press release catch 6 and swing
cover 5 upward 7.
i For more information on DVD player,
If the third seat is not occupied, you can
also use the seat backrest as an armrest.
AUX sockets, headphone jacks and CD changer, refer to the separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
Storage compartments in trunk
Example illustration from Maybach 57
1 Rear armrest
왘 Pull the top of armrest 1 out and
fold it downward.
! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
against the armrest when it is folded down, as
you could otherwise damage it.
256
Example illustration from Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center seat*)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DVD player
CD changer
AUX sockets and headphone jacks
Storage compartment
Cover
Release catch
To open telephone compartment and
access control panel for respective
rear functions*
1 Handle
2 Compartment for navigation system
DVD drive
3 Storage compartment
4 Handle
Opening the compartment
왘 Turn handle 1 or 4 90°.
왘 Swing the cover down.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Closing the compartment
Floormats
Warning!
왘 Swing the cover up.
왘 Turn handle 1 or 4 90°.
Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that
the floormats are securely fastened.
Umbrella
An umbrella is located in the trunk.
Floormats should always be securely fastened using eyelets 1 and retainer
pins 2.
1 Eyelet
2 Retainer pin
1 Umbrella
2 Straps
왘 Use straps 2 on the inside of the
trunk lid to store and secure
umbrella 1.
G
i Installing and removing for the front
seats:
To install or remove the floormat more easily,
move the driver’s seat or front passenger seat
as far to the rear as possible (컄 page 63).
Installing and removing in the rear:
To install or remove the floormat more easily,
move the driver’s seat or front passenger seat
as far to the front as possible (컄 page 63).
Before driving off, check that the floormats are securely in place and adjust them
if necessary. A loose floormat could slip
and hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of
each other as this may impair pedal movement.
Removing
왘 Pull floormats off of retainer pins 2.
왘 Remove the floormats.
Installing
왘 Lay down the floormat.
왘 Press the floormat eyelets 1 onto re-
tainer pins 2.
257
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holders
Warning!
Cup holders, cockpit
Rear cup/bottle holders
1 Cup holder, left
2 Cup holder, right
1 Rear cup holder
2 Release catch for champagne flute/
bottle holder
3 Release catch for cup holder
G
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the
cup holder. Use lids on open containers
and do not fill containers to a height
where the contents, especially hot liquids,
could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Liquids spilled on
vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury. Liquids spilled on vehicle
equipment may cause damage not covered
by the Maybach Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during
braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.
Opening
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
왘 Press the chrome label of the desired
왘 Press the chrome label on the cover.
The compartment opens.
cup holder.
The cup holder slides out.
Closing
왘 Remove cup from holder.
왘 Push the cup holder in until it engag-
es.
왘 Press the cover closed.
The cover engages automatically.
258
Opening
왘 Press release catch on cup holder 3.
The cup holder slides out automatically.
Closing
왘 Remove cup from holder.
왘 Take the cups out of the holder.
왘 Press the holder back in until it en-
gages.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder (vehicles with a rear center
seat*)
Champagne flute/bottle holder
Warning!
Warning!
G
When not in use, keep the champagne
flute/bottle holder closed while the vehicle
is in motion.
1 Cup holder, right
2 Cup holder, left
Opening
왘 Press the label of the desired cup
holder.
The cup holder slides out.
Closing
왘 Remove cup from holder.
Place only champagne flutes from the
Maybach Accessory range into the champagne flute holder. Only use those flutes
designed for use with the holder. Make
sure the champagne flutes are held in
place by the retaining clips whenever the
flutes are placed in the holder. This will reduce the risk of the flutes becoming loose
during vehicle maneuvers.
Place only bottles that fit fully within the
bottle holder to reduce the possibility of
the bottle becoming loose and being
thrown around in the vehicle interior during vehicle maneuvers.
G
Always obey applicable state or province
laws regarding passengers consuming alcoholic beverages in the vehicle and/or carrying alcoholic beverages in the vehicle
interior.
Opening
왘 Press release catch on champagne
flute/bottle holder 2 (컄 page 258).
The champagne flute/bottle holder
slides out automatically.
왘 Take the drip tray out of the opening
for the bottle and place it under the
opening on the carpet.
Magnets hold the drip tray in the correct position.
Loose objects being thrown around in the
vehicle during vehicle maneuvers may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
왘 Push the cup holder in until it engag-
es.
259
Controls in detail
Useful features
Inserting champagne flutes
i Use the champagne flutes from the
Maybach Accessory range. Only those flutes
are designed for use with the holder.
왘 With the champagne flute/bottle
holder open, remove the drip tray
from the transmission tunnel and
place it in the opening for the bottle.
Press the holder closed until it engages.
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
Removing ashtray insert
Warning!
G
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear
selector lever to position P. With gear selector lever in position P, turn off the engine.
왘 Push sliding button 1 to the right.
The ashtray is disengaged and slides a
short way out 2.
왘 Remove insert from ashtray frame.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
왘 Place the champagne flutes in the re-
왘 Install insert by pushing back into
tainers and press them down lightly.
frame until it engages again.
The champagne flutes are held in
place by the retaining clips.
왘 To remove the champagne flutes,
pull them upright carefully.
왘 Close the ashtray.
1 Sliding button
2 Insert slides out
Closing
Opening ashtray
왘 Take the champagne flutes/bottle
왘 Tap lightly on the chrome label on
out of the holder.
the cover.
The ashtray opens automatically.
260
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear compartment ashtray
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
Opening ashtray
왘 Install insert by pushing back into
왘 Lift lid 1 up.
frame until it engages again.
왘 Close the ashtray.
Rear compartment ashtray
(vehicles with a rear center seat*)
왘 Lift ashtray lid 3.
Removing ashtray insert
왘 Lift lid 1 up.
왘 Lift ashtray lid 3.
왘 Press sliding button 2 forward.
Insert 4 slides out a short distance.
왘 Remove insert 4 from ashtray frame.
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
1 Sliding button
2 Insert slides out
왘 Install insert 4 by pushing back into
frame until it engages again.
Opening ashtray
왘 Close the ashtray.
왘 Tap lightly on the chrome label on
the cover.
The ashtray opens automatically.
Removing ashtray insert
왘 Push sliding button 1 to the right.
1
2
3
4
Lid
Sliding button
Ashtray lid
Insert
The ashtray is disengaged and slides a
short way out 2.
261
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cigarette lighters
Warning!
G
Never touch the heating element or sides
of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold
the knob only.
Make sure that any children traveling with
you do not injure themselves or start a fire
with the hot cigarette lighter.
To avoid possible injury to children sitting
in the rear seat, deactivate the operation
of the rear door windows (컄 page 100).
Deactivation of the rear windows also deactivates the rear compartment lighter.
or using plugs that do not fit properly) can
damage the lighter socket. With the socket
damaged, the lighter may no longer be able
to be placed in the heating (pushed-in) position, or the lighter may pop out too early with
the lighter not hot enough.
To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter
socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC
electrical accessories designed for use with a
standard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the
12V power outlets (컄 page 266) in your vehicle whenever possible.
i Make sure the override switch is not activated (컄 page 100). The rear lighter will not
function if the override switch is activated.
1 Rear compartment lighter
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
1 Rear compartment lighter
(vehicles with a rear center seat*)
! The lighter socket can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (up to a
maximum of 85 W) designed for use with the
standard “cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep
in mind, however, that connecting accessories
to the lighter socket (for example extensive
connecting and disconnecting,
262
1 Center console lighter
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter will pop out automatically
when hot.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Non-smokers package*
Storage compartment in rear center console
Storage compartment in front center
console
Folding table*
(standard on Maybach 62;
optional on Maybach 57)
Warning!
G
Keep the folding table closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, you could be
injured by the table or by objects flying off
the table during
1 Storage compartment
2 Chrome label
왘 Tap lightly on chrome label 2 on the
cover.
Storage compartment 1 opens.
1 Storage compartment
2 Chrome label
왘 Tap lightly on chrome label 2 on the
cover.
Storage compartment 1 opens.
앫
braking
앫
vehicle maneuvers or
앫
an accident.
Always fold the rear center armrest 1
downward while the vehicle is in motion.
Without the armrest 1 folded down, the
rear center armrest could open the storage
compartment in an accident or during
abrupt vehicle maneuvers. Objects stored
there then could be thrown around in the
vehicle interior and cause vehicle damage
and/or personal injury.
263
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening the folding table
4 To pull out the table
5 To swing the table to the side
6 Table
1 To raise the armrest
2 Loop
3 Folding table
왘 Pull table 6 out vertically 4.
왘 Lift up armrest 1.
왘 Swing the table to the side 5.
왘 Pull up folding table 3 vertically, us-
왘 Lower armrest 1.
ing loop 2.
7
8
9
a
Fold out table half
Table half
Move table surface fore and aft
Tilt table surface
왘 Fold out table half 8 from 7.
왘 Press button 9 and adjust the table
fore or aft to the desired position.
왘 Press button a to adjust the table
surface tilt. When you have obtained
the desired tilt, release the button.
264
Controls in detail
Useful features
Closing the folding table
왘 Fold the table halves together.
왘 Swing the table upward vertically.
왘 Press the table until it engages at the
base of the folding table.
왘 If necessary, lift up the armrest.
왘 Swing the folding table back com-
i The refrigerator continues to operate for
up to 2 hours after the ignition has been
switched off. If the on-board voltage falls below the minimum level, the refrigerator will
be turned off automatically.
Refrigerator control
Therefore, do not leave any perishable goods
in the refrigerator.
Do not leave any open groceries in the refrigerator.
pletely.
왘 Lower the armrest.
Refrigerator** in rear center console
Warning!
4
5
6
7
G
Always fold the rear center armrest downward while the vehicle is in motion. Without the armrest folded down, the rear
center armrest could open the storage
compartment in an accident or during
abrupt vehicle maneuvers. Objects stored
there then could be thrown around in the
vehicle interior and cause vehicle damage
and/or personal injury.
Control knob
To increase cooling
To decrease cooling
To turn off the refrigerator
Turning refrigerator on
왘 Turn knob 4 from OFF position 7
clockwise.
1 To release the cover
2 To open the refrigerator
3 Refrigerator
Turning refrigerator off
Opening the refrigerator
왘 Turn knob 4 counterclockwise to
! In especially humid regions, water can
왘 Lift up the rear center armrest up-
condense inside the refrigerator. For this reason, wipe out the refrigerator regularly. For
more information on vehicle care
(컄 page 342).
왘 Reach into the opening and lift up re-
ward.
The refrigerator is on.
OFF position 7. Make sure the rotary
control is turned fully counterclockwise, until an audible “click” is heard.
lease catch 1.
왘 Open cover 2.
265
Controls in detail
Useful features
Regulating the temperature
왘 Turn knob 4 to the desired position.
! When setting max. cooling, the temperature in the refrigerator may fall below freezing point. Objects stored in the refrigerator
such as water bottles may burst.
Closing the refrigerator
왘 Press the lid down until it engages.
Power outlets
1 Socket in the rear center console
(vehicles with a rear center seat*)
1 Socket in the front passenger footwell (vehicles with non-smokers package*)
The power outlet can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
(e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a
maximum of 180 W.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Flip up cover.
1 Socket in the rear center console
1 Socket in the trunk
266
i Make sure the override switch is not activated (컄 page 100). The socket in the rear
center console will not function if the override
switch is activated.
! Make sure no fluids come into contact
with the socket, as this could cause a short circuit.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Battery charge socket
The vehicle is equipped with a battery
charge socket. The socket allows for the
connection of the Maybach battery
charger* designed to charge the vehicle
consumer battery or to maintain the existing charge in the vehicle consumer
battery while the vehicle is parked and
not being driven for long periods of time
(on average approximately 3 weeks or
more). Not driving the vehicle for such
extended periods of time may cause the
charge in the vehicle batteries to drop.
The socket is located in the storage compartment on the left side of the trunk.
Only the Maybach battery charger*
should be connected to this socket.
왘 Turn handle 1 90°.
왘 Swing the cover down.
왘 Connect the Maybach battery charg-
er* to battery charge socket 2. Follow the separate operating
instructions for the Maybach battery
charger*.
i You can obtain the Maybach battery
charger* at any authorized Maybach Studio.
Check with an authorized Maybach Studio for
availability.
Rear window curtain
The driver’s button is in the lower part of
the front center console under the cover
for the cup holders. Depending on vehicle equipment configuration, the button
in the rear is either in the center console
or in the top of the center armrest.
Operating from the cockpit
i If the battery for electrical consumers is
deeply discharged, it may take up to approximately 20 hours for the battery to be charged
using the Maybach battery charger*.
If faster charging is required, a standard battery charger may be needed. Using a standard
battery charger will require that you disconnect and remove the battery for electrical consumers. For more information, see “Practical
hints” (컄 page 417).
Button in cockpit
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
Closing the curtain
왘 Briefly press button 1.
The curtain closes automatically.
1 Handle
2 Battery charge socket
3 Storage compartment
왘 To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
267
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening the curtain
왘 Briefly press button 2.
The curtain opens automatically.
왘 To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Operating from the rear
Rear button (only Maybach 57 without rear
door window curtains* and with rear seat*)
Rear button (example illustration from vehicles with rear door window curtains*)
1 To close/open the curtain
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
Closing the curtain
왘 Briefly press button 1.
The curtain closes automatically.
Rear button (only Maybach 57 without rear
door window curtains*)
1 To close/open the curtain
왘 To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Opening the curtain
왘 Briefly press button 1.
The curtain opens automatically.
왘 To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
268
왘 Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest (컄 page 255).
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening the curtain
Operating from the cockpit
왘 Lightly press button 2 to resistance
point.
The curtain will open until you release the button.
Fully closing the curtain (Express-close)
왘 Press button 1 past the resistance
point and release.
The curtain closes completely.
Rear button (example illustration from vehicles with rear door window curtains* and
with rear center seat*)
왘 To stop the procedure, press the but-
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
Fully opening the curtain (Express-open)
왘 Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest (컄 page 256).
Closing the curtain
왘 Lightly press button 1 to resistance
point.
The curtain will close until you release the button.
ton again.
Button in cockpit
왘 Press button 2 past the resistance
point and release.
The curtain opens completely.
왘 To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Rear door window curtains*
The driver’s switches are in the lower
part of the front center console under
the cover for the cup holders. Depending
on equipment, the button in the rear is
either in the center console or in the top
of the center armrest.
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
3 Button for rear left door window curtain
4 Button for rear right door window
curtain
i If you open a rear door window without
rear door window curtain completely open,
the curtain will open first.
Closing the curtain
왘 Briefly press upper part 1 of
button 3 or 4.
The respective curtain closes.
왘 To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
269
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening the curtain
Operating from the rear
왘 Briefly press lower part 2 of
button 3 or 4.
The respective curtain opens.
왘 To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Warning!
G
When operating the curtains, make sure
there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the opening or closing procedure.
The opening or closing procedure can be
immediately halted by pressing the respective button again.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
270
Rear button (vehicles with rear center seat*)
Rear button
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
3 Button for rear left door window curtain
4 Button for rear right door window
curtain
왘 Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest (컄 page 255).
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
3 Button for rear left door window curtain
4 Button for rear right door window
curtain
왘 Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest (컄 page 256).
Controls in detail
Useful features
Closing the curtain
왘 Lightly press upper part 1 of
Warning!
G
button 3 or 4 to resistance point.
The respective curtain will close until
you release the button.
Opening the curtain
왘 Lightly press lower part 2 of
button 3 or 4 to resistance point.
The respective curtain will open until
you release the button.
Fully closing the curtain (Express-close)
왘 Press upper part 1 of
button 3 or 4 past the resistance
point and release.
The curtain closes completely.
왘 To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Fully opening the curtain (Express-open)
왘 Press lower part 2 of button 3 or 4
When operating the curtains, make sure
there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the opening or closing procedure.
The opening or closing procedure can be
immediately halted by releasing the respective button or, if button was pressed
past the resistance point and released, by
pressing the respective button 3 or 4
again.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Partition*
Operating the partition
Warning!
G
When operating the partition, make sure
there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the opening or closing procedure.
The opening or closing procedure can be
immediately halted by releasing the button or, if the button was pressed past the
resistance point and released, by pressing
the respective button again.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
past the point of resistance and release.
The curtain opens completely.
왘 To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
271
Controls in detail
Useful features
Button in cockpit
Button in rear passenger compartment
1 To close the partition
2 To open the partition
1 To close the partition
2 To open the partition
i Closing the partition from the rear is not
possible if you activate the override switch
(컄 page 100).
왘 Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest (컄 page 255).
272
Button in rear passenger compartment
(vehicles with rear center seat*)
1 To close the partition
2 To open the partition
왘 Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest (컄 page 256).
Controls in detail
Useful features
Closing the partition
Operating the partition curtain
왘 Lightly press button 1 to resistance
point.
The partition will close until you release the button.
Opening the partition
왘 Lightly press button 2 to resistance
point.
The partition will open until you release the button.
Fully closing the partition
(Express-close)
왘 Press button 1 past the resistance
point and release.
The partition closes completely.
왘 To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Warning!
G
When operating the curtains, make sure
there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the opening or closing procedure.
The opening or closing procedure can be
immediately halted by releasing the button or, if the button was pressed past the
resistance point and released, by pressing
the respective button again.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch,
take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Button in cockpit
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
Fully opening the partition
(Express-open)
왘 Press button 2 past the point of re-
sistance and release.
The partition opens completely.
왘 To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Button in rear passenger compartment
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
왘 Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest (컄 page 255).
273
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening the curtain
왘 Lightly press button 2 to resistance
point.
The curtain will open until you release the button.
Signaling a connection request from the
cockpit
The button is located on the lower part
of the front center console.
Fully closing the curtain (Express-close)
왘 Press button 1 past the resistance
point and release.
The curtain closes completely.
Button in rear passenger compartment
(vehicles with rear center seat*)
1 To close the curtain
2 To open the curtain
왘 Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest (컄 page 256).
Closing the curtain
왘 Lightly press button 1 to resistance
왘 To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
Fully opening the curtain (Express-open)
왘 Press button 2 past the resistance
point and release.
1 On/off button
The curtain opens completely.
왘 Press button 1.
왘 To stop the procedure, press the but-
ton again.
point.
The curtain will close until you release the button.
Two-way intercom* (Maybach 62:
standard with partition*)
With the partition closed, you can communicate between the cockpit and the
rear passenger compartment using the
two-way intercom.
You can only initiate a voice connection
from the rear passenger compartment.
The driver can only signal a connection
request from the cockpit.
274
A gong sounds in the rear passenger
compartment, and the indicator lamp
on the button comes on.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating a voice connection from the
rear
In Maybach 62 with a rear center seat* in
the storage compartment/drawer in rear
center console the buttons are on the
rear center console.
In Maybach 62 with a rear center seat*
the buttons are in the storage compartment/drawer in the rear center console.
Adjusting the volume
왘 Turn thumbwheel 1 until the de-
sired volume has been set.
Ending the voice connection
왘 Press button 2 again in the rear pas-
senger compartment.
1 Volume control
2 Speak button
Maybach 62 with rear center seat*
1 Volume control
2 Speak button
왘 Press button 2.
A gong sounds in the cockpit, and a
voice connection is established between the cockpit and the rear passenger compartment.
275
Controls in detail
Useful features
External communication
(special order equipment)
With the communication system, you can
communicate with persons outside the
vehicle over a loudspeaker and an outside microphone, without having to
open a door or window.
Listening
downward.
Heated steering wheel
The steering wheel heating warms up
the leather area of the steering wheel.
You will hear what is being said outside of the vehicle.
The stalk is located on the lower lefthand side of the steering wheel.
왘 Push microphone switch-over 5
Speaking
왘 Press speak button 1 and keep it
pressed.
You can speak as long as you keep
button 1 pressed.
왘 Adjust volume with the volume con-
trol button 2.
1
2
3
4
5
Speak button for inside microphone
Volume control
Loudspeaker for outside microphone
Inside microphone
Microphone switch-over
왘 Take the control unit out of the glove
box.
276
1 Switching on
2 Indicator lamp
3 Switching off
Controls in detail
Useful features
Switching on
i Indicator lamp 2 flashes or switches off
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
앫
in case of power surge or undervoltage
앫
in case of a steering wheel heating malfunction
왘 Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc-
tion of arrow 1.
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
i The steering wheel heating is temporarily
suspended while indicator lamp 2 remains
on when
앫
the temperature of the vehicle interior is
above 86°F (30°C)
앫
the temperature of the steering wheel is
above 79°F (26°C)
i The steering wheel heating switches off
automatically when you remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch or, on vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO**, when you switch off the ignition (컄 page 60) and open the driver’s door.
G
Switching off
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna
(i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while
the engine is running. Doing so could lead
to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic
system, possibly resulting in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
The steering wheel heating is
switched off. Indicator lamp 2 goes
out.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile telephone while driving a
vehicle.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System)1 if road,
weather and traffic conditions permit.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable
telephone or a citizens band unit, should
only be used inside the vehicle if they are
connected to an antenna that is installed
on the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call.
Telephone
Warning!
tion of arrow 3.
Warning!
For information on the steering wheel,
see “Steering wheel” (컄 page 64).
When these conditions do not apply anymore,
steering wheel heating continues.
왘 Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc-
for Maybach vehicles. Please contact an
authorized Maybach Studio for information on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio
transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
277
Controls in detail
Useful features
You can receive and place telephone
calls using the s and t buttons on
the steering wheel. To carry out other
telephone functions, use the control system (컄 page 164).
The functions and services available to
you while using the mobile phone depend on your service provider and the
type of mobile phone you are using.
Once the mobile phone has been inserted in the mobile phone cradle, calls can
only be made via the hands-free system.
Mobile phone in the front
! Do not try to remove the mobile phone
along with the cradle. You could otherwise
damage the mobile phone cradle.
G
왘 Remove the cover for the external an-
Always keep the compartment for the
front telephone closed while the vehicle is
in motion. The protruding telephone could
otherwise cause injury to you and others
during
Opening
앫
braking
앫
vehicle maneuvers or
왘 Press release button 1.
앫
an accident.
Mobile phone cradles for GSM or CDMA
phones can be installed in the cockpit.
These mobile phone cradles can be obtained from an authorized Maybach
Studio.
278
the Information button ¡ (컄 page 285) are
located in the compartment for the front telephone.
Inserting the mobile phone in the mobile
phone cradle
See the separate operating manual
COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual
System for instructions on how to use the
telephone.
Warning!
i The Roadside Assistance button • and
1 Compartment lid release button
2 Compartment lid
tenna connection from the back of
the mobile phone and store it in a
safe place.
Compartment lid 2 opens downward. The telephone handset swings
out.
Closing
왘 Press button 1 to close.
! To prevent any damage, the mobile
phone flap must be folded down before closing the telephone compartment.
1 Insert the mobile phone
2 Connector contact
3 Mobile phone cradle
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘 Slide the lower end of the mobile
phone into connector contact 2 on
cradle 3.
왘 Push the top of the mobile phone in
direction of arrow 1, until the lug on
the mobile phone release button engages.
The mobile phone is connected to the
network via the external antenna.
i When you take the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO** out of the starter switch,
the mobile phone remains switched on for approximately 10 minutes (run-on time). If you
place or receive a call during this time, the mobile phone switches off 10 minutes after the
call has been completed.
Changing the mobile phone cradle
Please contact an authorized Maybach
Studio if you require a different mobile
phone cradle for your GSM or CDMA mobile phone.
Removing an existing mobile phone cradle:
Removing the mobile phone from the
cradle
The mobile phone is linked to the
hands-free device and the multifunction steering wheel.
The battery is charged depending on
its charge status and the position of
the key in the ignition switch. The
charge procedure will be indicated in
the mobile phone’s display.
i GSM mobile phone:
The phone books contained on the SIM card
and in the mobile phone’s memory will be imported. If an identical entry has been stored in
both phone books, the entry will appear twice
in the multifunction display.
You can place or receive phone calls using the t and s buttons in the
steering wheel. You can control other
functions of the mobile phone via the
control system (컄 page 164).
1 Release catch for mobile phone
2 Mobile phone cradle
왘 Press release catch in direction of
arrow 1 and take mobile phone out
of mobile phone cradle 2.
1 To release the mobile phone cradle
2 To remove the mobile phone cradle
3 Mobile phone cradle
왘 Press release button in direction of
arrow 1 and take mobile phone
cradle 3 out in direction of
arrow 2.
279
Controls in detail
Useful features
Installing a different mobile phone cradle:
Mobile phone in the rear
Your vehicle is equipped with
Bluetooth®. The Bluetooth® interface is
located in the rear armrest.
왘 Open the storage compartment in
the rear center armrest (컄 page 255).
Inserting the Bluetooth® interface into
cradle
4 Engage the Bluetooth® interface into
cradle
5 Release button
6 Button with indicator lamp
1 Contact plate
2 Recesses
3 Mobile phone cradle
왘 Push the top of the Bluetooth® inter-
왘 Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into
face in direction of arrow 4, until
the release button 5 engages.
recesses 2 of contact plate 1.
왘 Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward
until it engages.
1 Insert the Bluetooth® interface
2 Contact
3 Cradle
왘 Slide the lower end of the Bluetooth®
interface into contact 2 on
cradle 3.
280
The indicator lamp in the button 6
will flash slowly in blue, to indicate
that the interface is ready for pairing
with a Bluetooth® compatible mobile
phone.
Controls in detail
Useful features
®
Initializing pairing of Bluetooth interface and mobile phone
왘 Enter “0000” (four zeros), when
The indicator lamp in the button 1
will stop flashing and remain illuminated in blue.
The pairing of the Bluetooth® interface with your mobile phone was successful.
i Pairing is only required once for each
handset.
1 Button with indicator lamp
왘 To initialize pairing, press and hold
button 1 on the Bluetooth® interface until the indicator lamp in the
button begins to flash rapidly in blue.
왘 Depending on which Bluetooth® ca-
pable mobile phone you have, conduct a search for “devices within
range”, until you find the Bluetooth®
interface with the symbol
“MB BTUM”.
왘 Select this symbol.
Tele Aid
prompted to enter the passkey.
! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing
the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the Information
button ¡, located in the phone compartment to the left of the glove box. Failure to
complete either of these steps will result in a
system that is not activated.
If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
You will be able to make and receive
hands-free phone calls using the speakers and microphones installed in your vehicle.
The Tele Aid system
You can also switch from hands-free
mode to privacy phone mode.
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
i Please contact an authorized Maybach
Studio for the most recent list of Bluetooth®
capable mobile phones that have been approved for use in your vehicle.
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
앫
automatic and manual emergency
For detailed instructions on how to pair the
Bluetooth® interface with the mobile phone,
please refer to the mobile phone operating
instructions.
앫
Roadside Assistance and
앫
information
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
281
Controls in detail
Useful features
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel
or the volume control on the COMAND.
To raise, press button æ and to lower,
press button ç on the steering wheel
or use the volume knob on your
COMAND head unit.
왘 To activate, press one of the SOS but-
tons, the Roadside Assistance
button • or the Information
button ¡, depending on the type
of response required.
Warning!
G
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
i The SOS button is located in the overhead
control panel (컄 page 284). An additional SOS
button is located in the middle armrest of the
rear seat or, in Maybach 62 vehicles with rear
center seat* and partition* or two-way intercom*, in the storage compartment/drawer in
rear center console.
The Roadside Assistance button • and the
Information button ¡ are located in the
front telephone compartment (컄 page 286).
282
Shortly after the completion of your
Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID and password.
Warning!
i The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle
location. If either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not function
and if this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button • and/
or in the Information button ¡ do not
come on during the system self-check or if
any of these indicators remain illuminated
constantly in red and/or the message
System self-check
Initially, after switching on the ignition,
malfunctions are detected and indicated
(the indicator lamps in the SOS button,
the Roadside Assistance button • and
the Information button ¡ stay on
longer than 10 seconds or do not come
on). The message
TELE AID
INOPERATIVE
appears for approximately 10 seconds in
the multifunction display.
G
TELE AID
INOPERATIVE
is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self-check, a malfunction in
the system has been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest authorized Maybach Studio as
soon as possible.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatically following an accident in which the
emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) or
airbags deploy.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover in the
overhead control panel labeled SOS,
then briefly pressing the button located
under the cover. An additional SOS button is located in the middle armrest of
the rear seat or, in Maybach 62 vehicles
with rear center seat* and partition* or
with rear center seat* and two-way intercom*, in the storage compartment/
drawer in rear center console.
For instructions on initiating an emergency call manually (컄 page 284).
Once the emergency call is in progress,
the indicator lamp in the SOS button will
begin to flash. The message CONNECTING
CALL appears in the multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message CALL CONNECTED appears in the
multifunction display.
All information relevant to the emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location
system), vehicle model, identification
number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the
vehicle will be established automatically
soon after the emergency call has been
initiated. The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the
nature of the emergency provided they
can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.
The Tele Aid system is available if:
앫
it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services,
connection and cellular air time.
앫
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the Response
Center.
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals
from the GPS satellite network and pass the
information on to the Response Center.
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is illuminated continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message CALL FAILED appears in
the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.
283
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually
For Maybach 57 with rear center seat*:
the additional SOS button is located in
the rear center console.
SOS button* in the rear center console
SOS button in the rear center console
SOS button in the overhead control panel
1 Cover
2 SOS button
284
1 Cover
2 SOS button
1 Cover
2 SOS button
Controls in detail
Useful features
For Maybach 62 with rear center seat*:
the additional SOS button is located in
the storage compartment/drawer.
왘 Briefly press on the cover of the
emergency call button 1 with the
inscription SOS.
The cover will open.
Roadside Assistance button •
The Roadside Assistance button • is
located in the front telephone compartment.
왘 Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
flashes until the emergency call is
concluded.
왘 Wait for a voice connection to the Re-
sponse Center.
왘 Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.
Warning!
SOS button* in the storage compartment/
drawer
1 Cover
2 SOS button
G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in
the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location),
please do not wait for voice contact after
you have pressed the emergency button.
Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a
safe location. The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle’s approximate
location if they receive an automatic SOS
signal and cannot make voice contact with
the vehicle occupants.
1 Compartment lid release
2 Compartment lid
왘 Press button 1.
The compartment lid 2 opens downward.
285
Controls in detail
Useful features
When the connection is established, the
message CALL CONNECTED appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color
and location (subject to availability of
cellular and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established.
왘 Describe the nature of the need for
1 Compartment lid release
2 Information button ¡
3 Roadside Assistance button •
왘 Press and hold Roadside Assistance
button • (for longer than
2 seconds).
A call to a Maybach Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The button • flashes while the
call is in progress. The message
CONNECTING CALL will appear in the
multifunction display and the audio
system is muted.
286
assistance.
The Maybach Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Maybach technician or arrange to tow
your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Maybach Studio. For services such as labor and/or towing, charges may apply.
Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual
for more information.
The following is only available in the
USA:
앫
Sign and Drive services: Services such
as a jump start, a few gallons of fuel
or the replacement of a flat tire with
the vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
i The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button • remains illuminated in red
for approximately 10 seconds during the system self-check after switching on ignition
(together with the SOS button and the Information button ¡).
See system self-check (컄 page 282) when the
indicator lamp does not come on in red or
stays on longer than approximately
10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button • is illuminated continuously
and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid
system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone
network is not available). The message CALL
FAILED appears in the multifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the
respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND head unit.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button ¡
The Information button ¡ is located
in the front telephone compartment
(컄 page 286).
왘 Press and hold Information
button ¡ (for longer than
2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance
Center will be initiated. The
button ¡ flashes while the call is in
progress. The message CONNECTING
CALL will appear in the multifunction
display and the audio system is muted.
When the connection is established, the
message CALL CONNECTED appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color
and location (subject to availability of
cellular and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and
the occupants of the vehicle will be established. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest
authorized Maybach Studio or
Maybach USA products and services is
available to you.
i The indicator lamp on the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system
self-check after switching on ignition (together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button •).
See system self-check (컄 page 282) when the
indicator lamp does not come on in red or
stays on longer than approximately
10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp on the Information
button ¡ is illuminated continuously and
there was no voice connection to the Response Center has been established, then the
Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message CALL
FAILED appears in the multifunction display.
Information calls can be terminated using the
t button on the multifunction steering
wheel or the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the COMAND head unit.
! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing
after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid
system has detected a malfunction or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit your Maybach Studio and
have the system checked or contact the
Maybach Assistance Center at
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada) as soon as possible.
Call priority
If other service calls such as a Roadside
Assistance call or Information call are active, an Emergency call is still possible. In
this case, the Emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls.
i The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls
can only be terminated by a Response Center
or Customer Assistance Center representative
except Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by pressing
button t on the multifunction steering
wheel or the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the COMAND head unit.
! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or
the system does not reset, contact the
Maybach Assistance Center at
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the COMAND system audio is muted and the
selected mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The
mobile phone switches off. If it is necessary for
you to use this phone, then the vehicle must
be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and
place the call. The COMAND navigation system (if engaged) will continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is available for
use and spoken commands are only available
by pressing the button on the COMAND
unit. A pop-up window will appear in the
COMAND display to indicate that a Tele Aid
call is in progress.
287
Controls in detail
Useful features
i The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is
available.
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
The SOS button flashes and the message
CALL CONNECTED will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command.
왘 Report the incident to the police.
ter at
1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or
1-888-881-6611 (in Canada).
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist will attempt to establish voice
contact with the vehicle occupants.
왘 Pass this number on to the Maybach
You will be asked to provide your
password which you provided when
you completed the subscriber agreement.
If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for
more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you must wait 15 minutes before pulling
the trunk recessed handle.
Remote door unlock
In case that you have locked your vehicle
unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), and the reserve SmartKey is not
mobile phone:
왘 Contact the Maybach Assistance Cen-
왘 Then return to your vehicle and pull
the trunk recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing.
The message CALL CONNECTED appears
in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the
completion of your acquaintance call.
The Response Center will then unlock
your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature.
288
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
The police will issue a numbered incident report.
Response Center along with your
password issued to you when you
subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the
vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location
will only be provided to law enforcement.
i When the anti-theft alarm or the towaway alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds,
a call is initiated automatically to the Response Center. See anti-theft alarm system
(컄 page 110) and tow-away alarm
(컄 page 111).
Controls in detail
Useful features
Garage door opener
The integrated remote control is capable
of operating up to three separately controlled devices. It provides a convenient
way to replace up to three hand-held remote controls used to operate devices
such as garage door openers, gate openers, or other devices compatible with
HomeLink® or some other systems.
Before the integrated remote control
can be used, it must be programmed to
the garage door opener, gate operator
or other device you wish to operate. See
the following instructions for programming information.
Warning!
G
Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or
gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to
prevent potential harm or damage. When
programming a garage door opener, the
door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or
closes.
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote control
1
Indicator lamp
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
Needed for programming (not part of
vehicle equipment):
5
6
Hand-held remote control of
garage door opener, gate operator or other device
Hand-held remote control button
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards
(this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door that cannot detect an object – signaling the door to stop and reverse – does not meet current U.S. federal
safety standards.
When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage.
Do not run the engine while programming
the integrated remote control. Inhalation
of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health.
All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
289
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming or reprogramming the
integrated remote control
Step 1:
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
Step 2:
Step 3:
Step 5:
왘 Hold the end of hand-held remote
왘 After indicator lamp 1 changes from
control 5 of the device you wish to
train approximately 2 to 5 in
(5 to 12 cm) away from the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be
programmed, while keeping indicator lamp 1 in view.
왘 If you have previously programmed a
signal transmitter button and wish to
retain its programming, proceed to
step 3.
If you are programming the integrated remote control for the first time,
press and hold the two outer signal
transmitter buttons 3 and 4 and release them only when indicator
lamp 1 begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds (do not hold the
button for longer than 30 seconds).
This procedure erases any previous
settings for all three channels and initializes the memory.
If you later wish to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two signal transmitter
buttons, do not repeat this step and
begin directly with step 3.
290
Step 4:
왘 Using both hands, simultaneously
press hand-held remote control button 6 and the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
release the buttons until step 5 is
completed.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the
first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start
flashing after 20 seconds.
a slow to a rapidly flashing light, release the hand-held remote control
button and the signal transmitter
button.
Step 6:
왘 Press and hold the just-trained signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
observe indicator lamp 1.
If indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly, programming is complete and
your device should activate when the
respective signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4) is pressed and released.
i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for
about 2 seconds and then turns to a constant
light, continue with programming steps 8
through 12 as your garage door opener may
be equipped with the “rolling code” feature.
Step 7:
왘 To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rolling code programming
Step 10:
Gate operator/Canadian programming
To train a garage door opener (or other
rolling code devices) with the rolling
code feature, follow these instructions
after completing the “Programming”
portion (steps 1 through 6) of this text.
(A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier.)
왘 Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or
quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for
the integrated signal transmitter to pick
up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate
operators are designed to “time-out” in
the same manner.
Step 8:
왘 Locate “training” button on the ga-
rage door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener
brand. Depending on manufacturer,
the “training” button may also be referred to as “learn” or “smart” button. If there is difficulty locating the
transmitting button, refer to the garage door opener Operator’s Manual.
hold for 2 seconds and release the
programmed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Step 11:
왘 Press, hold for 2 seconds and release
same signal transmitter button a second time to complete the training
process.
i Some garage door openers (or other rolling code equipped devices) may require you
to press, hold for 2 seconds and release the
same signal transmitter button a third time to
complete the training process.
Step 4:
Step 12:
왘 Confirm the garage door operation
by pressing the programmed signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Step 9:
Step 13:
왘 Press the “training” button on the
왘 To program the remaining two signal
garage door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator (regardless of where you live) by using the programming procedures,
replace step 4 with the following:
왘 Press and hold the signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
this button until it has been success컄컄
fully trained.
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the following two steps.
291
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄 왘 While still holding down the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4),
“cycle” your hand-held remote control button 6 as follows: Press and
hold button 6 for 2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds, and again press
and hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this
sequence on the hand-held remote
control until the frequency signal has
been learned. Upon successful training, indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then rapidly after several
seconds.
왘 Proceed with programming step 5
and step 6 to complete.
i Upon completion of programming the integrated remote control, make sure you retain the hand-held remote control that came
with the garage door opener, gate operator
or other device. You may need it for use in
other vehicles, for future programming of an
integrated remote control, or simply for continued use as a hand-held remote control to
operate the respective device in other situations.
292
Reprogramming a single signal transmitter button
Erasing the remote control memory
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
왘 Simultaneously press and hold outer
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
signal transmitter buttons 3 and 4,
for approximately 20 seconds, until
indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do
not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Press and hold the desired signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do
not release the button.
왘 Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing
the signal transmitter button, proceed with programming starting with
step 3.
Operation of integrated remote control
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of
all three channels.
Programming tips
If you are having difficulty programming
the integrated remote control, here are
some helpful tips:
앫
Check the frequency of the handheld remote control 5 (typically located on the reverse side of the remote). The integrated remote control
is compatible with radio-frequency
devices operating between
280-390 MHz.
앫
Put a new battery in hand-held remote control 5. This will increase the
likelihood of the hand-held remote
control sending a faster and more accurate signal to the integrated remote control.
왘 Select and press the appropriate inte-
grated signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4) to activate the remote
controlled device.
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
Controls in detail
Useful features
앫
While performing step 3, hold handheld remote control 5 at different
lengths and angles from the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you
are programming. Attempt varying
angles at the distance of 2 to 5 in
(5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle
at varying distances.
앫
If another hand-held remote control
is available for the same device, try
the programming steps again using
that other hand-held remote control.
Make sure new batteries are in the
hand-held remote control before beginning the procedure.
앫
Straighten the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This
may help improve transmitting and/
or receiving signals.
Infrared reflecting windshield
1 5.1 in (13 cm)
2 26 in (66 cm)
3 Infrared transparent area
(pass-through for electronic signals)
Your vehicle is equipped with infrared
reflecting glass which reduces the
amount of radiated heat entering the interior through the windows.
The infrared reflecting glass also prevents the transmission of signals through
the glass by in-vehicle electronic devices
(e.g. electronic toll collection devices).
To allow the use of these devices in the
vehicle, one infrared transparent area 3
is placed in the windshield.
293
294
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
295
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section, you will find
detailed information on operating,
maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break-in period, the more
satisfied you will be with its performance
later on.
앫
Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫
During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive
engine speeds (no more than 2⁄3 of
maximum rpm in each gear).
앫
Avoid accelerating by kickdown.
앫
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever.
앫
Select gear positions 3, 2 or 1 only
when driving at moderate speeds
(for hill driving).
앫
Select C as the preferred shift program (컄 page 183) for the first
1000 miles (1500 km).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine
speeds to the permissible maximum.
296
! All of the above instructions, as may apply
to your vehicle type, also apply when driving
the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine or the rear differential has been replaced.
i Always obey applicable speed limits.
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating
conditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫
Keep tires at the recommended tire
inflation pressures.
앫
Remove unnecessary loads.
앫
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
앫
Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.
앫
Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in
the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). Contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
Fuel consumption is also increased by
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
traffic, on short trips and in hilly area.
Drinking and driving
Warning!
Power assistance
G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you
drink or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.
Pedals
Warning!
G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of
all obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
pedals still have sufficient clearance.
Warning!
G
The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake
system operation and switch it into its
emergency operation mode. In such a case,
the red brake warning lamp (컄 page 360)
and warning messages in the instrument
cluster come on while driving
(see page 380 to page 381). To brake, the
driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the
pedal much further to obtain the expected
braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may only
be applied to the front wheels. Stopping
distance is increased!
If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that
the vehicle be transported with all wheels
off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar
must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing
methods and the vehicle requires towing
with all four wheels on the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is only permissible for distances up
to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
컄컄
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
297
Operation
Driving instructions
컄컄 For more information, refer to “Towing
the vehicle” (컄 page 423).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to
keep in mind that a considerably higher
degree of effort is necessary to brake and
steer the vehicle.
Brakes
Warning!
G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through
water deep enough to wet brake components, the first braking action may be
somewhat reduced and increased pedal
pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in a safe location in sufficient time
to avoid an accident.
298
! Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine and ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 0
or 1) when testing the brakes on a brake test
dynamometer and such testing should be no
longer than 10 seconds.
Active braking action through ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system
which is not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces (particularly salted roads), it is advisable to brake
the vehicle with considerable force prior
to parking. The heat generated serves to
dry the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking pressure at higher speeds. This will
also enhance the grip of the brake pads.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 104).
If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in
the reservoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system
may be the reason for low brake fluid
level in the reservoir.
The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
be too low if the brake warning lamp in
the instrument cluster comes on and an
acoustic warning sounds although the
parking brake is released (컄 page 360).
Observe additional messages in the multifunction display that may appear
(컄 page 381).
Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Only install brake pads and brake fluid
recommended by us for use on Maybach
vehicles.
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended
brake fluid is used, the braking properties
of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident.
! When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of
the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to
drive on for some time, rather than immediately park the vehicle, so that the
air stream can cool down the brakes faster.
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off. Perform this procedure
only when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been
reached.
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP® switched off. Doing
so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain
which is not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
i Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature
brake and drivetrain wear.
Parking
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
damage to the vehicle drivetrain, as a result of vehicle movement, before turning
off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO** to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button
(컄 page 61).
앫
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO** with you and lock
vehicle when leaving.
299
Operation
Driving instructions
Tires
Warning!
Warning!
G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning
flashers, carefully slow down, and drive
with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest authorized Maybach Studio or
tire dealer for repairs.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required
by law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1⁄16 in (1.6 mm), at which
point the tire is considered worn and
should be replaced.
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.
300
G
Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1⁄16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
As tread depth approaches 1⁄8 in (3 mm),
the adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Specified tire inflation pressures must be
maintained. This applies particularly if
the tires are subject to extreme operating conditions (e.g. high speeds, heavy
loads, high ambient temperatures).
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
For more information, see “Tires and
wheels” (컄 page 313).
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water
layer on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with new
tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track
grooves in the road and apply brakes
cautiously in the rain.
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered
or icy road is always lower than on a dry
road.
You should pay particular attention to
the condition of the road whenever the
outside temperatures are close to the
freezing point.
Warning!
G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Operation
Driving instructions
We recommend winter tires
(컄 page 338) for the winter season for all
four wheels to insure normal balanced
handling characteristics. On packed
snow, they can reduce your stopping distance in comparison to summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise
appropriate caution. Refer to “Rims and
tires” in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 436) for a listing of winter tires
approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles.
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire rating, local speed
limits should be obeyed. Use prudent
driving speeds appropriate to prevailing
conditions.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which
is not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of:
앫
Maybach 57, Maybach 62,
Maybach 62 S:
155 mph (250 km/h)
앫
Maybach 57 S:
171 mph (275 km/h)
The factory equipped tires on your
vehicle may have a tire speed rating
above the maximum speed permitted by
the electronic speed limiter.
Make sure your tires have the required
tire speed rating as specified for your
vehicle in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 436), for example when
purchasing new tires.
For information on how to identify the
tire speed rating on a tire’s sidewall,
see “Tire size designation, load and
speed rating” (컄 page 326).
If you are uncertain about the correct
reading of the information given on a
tire’s sidewall, any authorized Maybach
Studio will be glad to assist you.
i For more Information, see “Tire speed rating for winter tires” (컄 page 337).
For additional general information on tire
speed markings on tire sidewall, see “Tire
speed rating” (컄 page 328).
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or
icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise
control system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move gear selector lever to
position N. Try to keep the vehicle under
control by corrective steering action.
i For more Information on driving with
snow chains, see “Snow chains” (컄 page 338).
301
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This
could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS
will not prevent this type of control loss.
Road salts and chemicals can adversely
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
Warning!
G
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
and from around the vehicle with the engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the
vehicle not facing the wind.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency back to normal.
Warning!
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above
the freezing point do not guarantee that
the road surface is free of ice.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.
G
For more information, see “Winter driving” (컄 page 337).
Standing water
! Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth. Before driving
through water, determine its depth. Never accelerate before driving into water. The bow
wave could force water into the engine and
auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water,
drive slowly to prevent water from entering
the passenger compartment or the engine
compartment. Water in these areas could
cause damage to electrical components or
wiring of the engine or transmission, or could
result in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake causing severe internal
engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty.
Passenger compartment
Warning!
G
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
302
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving abroad
Abroad, there is an extensive Maybach
service network at your disposal. If you
plan to drive into areas which are not
listed in the index of your Maybach
Studio directory, you should request pertinent information from an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Control and operation of radio transmitters
COMAND, radio and telephone
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road, weather and traffic
conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
Telephones and two-way radios
Warning!
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e.
without being connected to an external
antenna) from inside the vehicle while the
engine is running. Doing so could lead to a
malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/
or personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable
telephone or citizens band unit should
only be used inside the vehicle if they are
connected to an antenna that is installed
on the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.
Catalytic converter
Your Maybach is equipped with monolithic-type catalytic converters, an important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial
control of the pollutants in the exhaust
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our
recommended maintenance instructions
as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.
! To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded gasoline
in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be dealt with promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the
catalytic converter, causing it to overheat and
potentially start a fire.
Warning!
G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
303
Operation
Driving instructions
Emission control
Certain parts of the engine and the
emission control system serve to keep the
toxic components of the exhaust gases
within permissible limits required by law.
These systems will function properly only
when maintained strictly according to
factory specifications. Any adjustments
to the engine should therefore be
carried out only by qualified Maybach
Studio authorized technicians.
Engine adjustments should not be
altered in any way. Moreover, the
specified service procedures must be
carried out regularly according to
Maybach servicing requirements. For
details refer to the Maintenance
Booklet.
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive with at least
one window fully open at all times.
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately
248°F (120°C).
! The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F (120°C).
Doing so may cause serious engine damage
which is not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
Warning!
G
앫
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may
have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be
seriously burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away
from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get
out of the vehicle and do not stand near
the vehicle until the engine has cooled
down.
304
Operation
At the gas station
The fuel filler flap is located on the right
hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear.
At the gas station
Refueling
Warning!
open.
왘 Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause
serious injury.
on to it until possible pressure is released.
왘 Take off the cap and set it in the re-
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
cess on the fuel filler flap 2.
왘 To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors can damage your
health.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** automatically locks/
unlocks the fuel filler flap.
the point indicated by the arrow 1.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
왘 Push up the fuel filler flap to fully
G
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin or clothing contact, extinguish all smoking materials.
왘 Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
1 Push to open the fuel filler flap
2 Set the fuel cap
왘 Turn the engine off
앫
by using the SmartKey, remove
the SmartKey from the starter
switch
앫
by pressing the KEYLESS-GO**
start/stop button (컄 page 61),
open the driver’s door (with the
driver’s door open, starter switch
is now in position 0, same as
SmartKey removed from the starter switch).
왘 Only fill your tank until the filler noz-
zle unit cuts out – do not top off or
overfill.
Warning!
G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
pressure in the system which could cause a
gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
spray back out when removing the fuel
pump nozzle, which could cause personal
injury.
왘 Replace fuel cap by turning it clock-
wise until it audibly engages.
왘 Close the fuel filler flap.
컄컄
305
Operation
At the gas station
컄컄 i Use only premium unleaded gasoline with
a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91
(average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Check regularly and before a long trip
For more information, see “Coolant level” (컄 page 310) and see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” (컄 page 440).
Information on gasoline quality can normally
be found on the fuel pump.
For more information on gasoline, see the
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet
(USA only) or contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system
For more information on refilling the reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 311).
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the ? lamp to illuminate.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 361).
1 Brake fluid electro-hydraulic brake
system only
2 Coolant level
3 Brake fluid
4 Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system
i Opening hood (컄 page 307).
Brake fluid
! If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system
checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Maybach
Studio immediately. Do not add brake fluid as
this will not solve the problem. For more information, see “Practical hints” (컄 page 360).
306
Coolant
Engine oil level
For more information, see “Engine oil”
(컄 page 309).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs,
see “Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 406).
See also the section on the exterior lamp
switch (컄 page 142).
Tire inflation pressure
For more information on tire inflation
pressure (컄 page 321).
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Warning!
Hood
Warning!
G
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood
could be forced open by passing air flow.
G
You could be injured when the hood is
open – even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot.
To prevent burns, let the engine cool off
completely before touching any
components on the vehicle. Comply with
all relevant safety precautions.
This could cause the hood to come loose
and injure you and/or others.
Warning!
Opening
Warning!
G
If you see flames or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, or if the coolant
temperature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open the hood.
Move away from vehicle and do not open
the hood until the engine has cooled. If
necessary, call the fire department.
G
Warning!
G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high
voltage it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets,
diagnostic socket) of the ignition system
앫
with the engine running
앫
while starting the engine
앫
if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear
of moving parts when the hood is open
and the engine is running.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or even restart
after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
1 Release lever
왘 Pull release lever 1 in direction of ar-
row.
The hood is unlocked.
컄컄
307
Operation
Engine compartment
왘 Let the hood drop from a height of
Closing
approximately 1 ft (30 cm).
Warning!
G
When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
2 Handle for opening the hood
컄컄 왘 Lift hood slightly.
Handle 2 will extend out of the radiator grille.
! Do not pull up the hood on handle 2.
To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or
hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms
are folded forward away from the windshield.
왘 Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radi-
ator grille.
왘 Lift bottom of hood at edge of radia-
tor grille.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height.
308
Make sure that the hood is securely engaged before driving off. Do not continue
driving if the hood can no longer engage
after an accident, for example. The hood
could otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in motion and endanger you and/or
others.
The hood will lock audibly.
왘 Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let
it drop with somewhat greater force.
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including driving style. Higher oil consumption
can occur when
앫
with the engine not at operating
temperature yet, the vehicle must
have been stationary for at least
30 minutes with the engine turned
off
앫
ADD 1.5 QTS. TO
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL
(Canada: 1.5 LITERS)
앫
ADD 2.0 QTS. TO
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL
앫
the vehicle is new
앫
You can check the engine oil level on the
multifunction display.
the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
i If you want to interrupt the checking pro-
The standard display (컄 page 162)
should appear in the multifunction display.
cedure, press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel.
Engine oil consumption checks should
only be made after the vehicle break-in
period.
! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
as these may damage the drive assemblies. Using special additives not approved by us for
use on Maybach vehicles may cause damage
not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
왘 Press button k or j on the
steering wheel until the following
message is seen in the multifunction
display:
(Canada: 2.0 LITERS)
왘 If necessary, add engine oil.
For adding oil (컄 page 310).
For more information on engine oil, see
“Technical data” (컄 page 440) and
(컄 page 441).
Other display messages
More information on this subject is available
at any Maybach Studio.
If the ignition is not switched on, the following message will appear:
Checking engine oil level with the control system
FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL
SWITCH IGNITION ON
When checking the oil level
앫
앫
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground
with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the
engine turned off
One of the following messages will
subsequently appear in the indicator:
왘 Switch on the ignition.
앫
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
OK
PERFORM SERV ON TIME
앫
ADD 1.0 QTS. TO
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL
If you see the message:
왘 If engine is at operating temperature,
wait 5 minutes before repeating
check procedure.
컄컄
(Canada: 1.0 LITER)
309
Operation
Engine compartment
컄컄 왘 If engine is not at operating temper-
ature yet, wait 30 minutes before repeating check procedure.
If you see the message:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
NOT WITH ENGINE ON
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 If the engine is at operating tempera-
ture, wait 5 minutes before checking
oil.
왘 If the engine is not at operating tem-
perature yet, you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil.
If there is excessive engine oil with the
engine at normal operating temperature, the following message will appear:
Adding engine oil
! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance
System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles).
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet (USA only) in your vehicle
literature portfolio, or contact an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for
the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS
(Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil
filter at change intervals longer than those
called for by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) will result in
engine or emission control system damage
not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
REDUCE OIL LEVEL
off. Contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
! Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the engine and
catalytic converter not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
310
neck.
왘 Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. Avoid environmental damage
caused by oil entering the ground or water.
! Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the engine and
catalytic converter not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
왘 Screw the filler cap 1 back on the
filler neck.
For more information on engine oil, see
“Technical data” (컄 page 440) and
(컄 page 441).
Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not
need to be checked. If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, have an authorized Maybach
Studio check the automatic transmission.
왘 Have excess oil siphoned or drained
For more information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine
oil, see “Practical hints” (컄 page 388).
왘 Unscrew the filler cap 1 from filler
1 Filler cap
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
Operation
Engine compartment
Warning!
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system
The windshield washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment.
G
In order to avoid any potentially serious
burns:
앫
Use extreme caution when opening
the hood if there are any signs of
steam or coolant leaking from the
cooling system, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
앫
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid
and is under pressure.
앫
앫
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess
pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown
out under pressure.
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene
glycol which may burn if it comes into
contact with hot engine parts.
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine compartment.
1 Coolant expansion tank
2 Cap
3 Cold coolant level mark
왘 Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly ap-
proximately one half turn counterclockwise to release any excess
pressure.
왘 Continue turning cap 2 counter-
clockwise and remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
앫
for cold coolant: reaches the
marking 3 inside coolant reservoir
앫
for warm coolant: is approximately
0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
1 Cap for windshield washer reservoir
Fluid for the windshield washer system
and the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir. It has a capacity of approximately
7.1 US qt (6.7 l).
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to
water. Premix the windshield washer flu컄컄
id in a suitable container.
왘 Add coolant as required.
왘 Replace and tighten cap 2.
For more information on coolant, see
“Technical data” (컄 page 443).
311
Operation
Engine compartment
컄컄
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it
may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.
왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Wind-
shield Washer Concentrate and water
(or commercially available pre-mixed
windshield washer solvent/
antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures).
312
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below freezing
point. Failure to do so could result in damage
to the washer system/reservoir.
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
For more information, see “Windshield
and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio” (컄 page 446).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels
When replacing rims, use only Genuine
Maybach wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result
in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident.
See an authorized Maybach Studio for
information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter
operation. They can also offer advice
concerning tire service and purchase.
Warning!
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by us for use on Maybach vehicles,
since previous damage cannot always be
recognized on retreads. The operating
safety of the vehicle cannot be assured
when such tires are used.
G
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown
on the original part. See an authorized
Maybach Studio for further information. If
incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted:
앫
The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged.
앫
The correct operating clearance of the
wheels and the tires are no longer
guaranteed.
See an authorized Maybach Studio for
information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter
operation.
앫
Important guidelines
Only use sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫
Tires must be of the correct size for
the rim.
G
앫
Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
앫
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire inflation pressure loss and
damage to the tire beads.
Warning!
앫
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as
required.
앫
Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths of less than 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with samesized wheels all around).
Tire care and maintenance
Warning!
G
Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation
pressure, (컄 page 319).
313
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire inspection
Warning!
Every time you check your tire inflation
pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
앫
excessive treadwear (컄 page 314)
앫
cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber
앫
bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Replace the tire if you find any of the
above conditions.
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation.
Spare tires will age and become worn
over time even if never used, and thus
should be inspected and replaced when
necessary.
Life of tire
The service life of a tire is dependent
upon varying factors including but not
limited to:
앫
Driving style
앫
Tire inflation pressure
앫
Distance driven
G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after 6 years, regardless of the remaining
tread.
Tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads
are sharply reduced at tread depths of
less than 1/8 in (3 mm).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required
by law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which
point the tire is considered worn and
should be replaced.
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor
safety laws consider a tire to be worn
when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm),
the adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Recommended minimum tire tread
depth:
앫
Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)
앫
Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)
1 TWI (TreadWear Indicator)
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.
314
Operation
Tires and wheels
Storing tires
! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and
gasoline.
Cleaning tires
! Never use a round nozzle to powerwash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Direction of rotation
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you
must make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation (spinning)
of the tire.
i Spare wheels may be mounted against
the direction of rotation (spinning) even with
a unidirectional tire for temporary use only
until the regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced. Always observe and follow
applicable temporary use restrictions and
speed limitations indicated on the spare
wheel.
Loading the vehicle
Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry.
1) The Tire and Loading Information
placard can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar. This placard tells you
important information about the
number of people that can be in the
vehicle and the total weight that can
be carried in the vehicle. It also contains information on the proper size
and recommended tire inflation pressures for the original equipment tires
on your vehicle.
2) The certification label, also found on
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you
about the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo. The certification label also tells you about the
front and rear axle weight capacity,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by
a single axle (front or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either
the front axle or rear axle.
1 Driver’s door B-pillar
Following is a discussion on how to work
with the information contained on the
placard with regards to loading your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information
Warning!
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the
tires can also result in handling or steering
problems, or brake failure.
315
Operation
Tires and wheels
i Data shown on placard example are for illustration purposes only. Load limit data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the illustration below. Refer to
placard on vehicle for actual data specific to
your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information placard
왘 Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kilograms
or XXX lbs.” on this placard.
The combined weight of all
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue load (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced
in that statement.
Seating capacity
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
and rear seating capacity. The Tire and
Loading Information placard showing
the seating capacity is located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 315).
i Data shown on placard example are for il1 Load limit information on the Tire
and Loading Information placard
The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
lustration purposes only. Load limit data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the illustration below. Refer to
placard on vehicle for actual data specific to
your vehicle.
1 Seating capacity information on the
Tire and Loading Information placard
Steps for determining correct load limit
The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers
under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety
Act of 1966”.
Step 1
왘 Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
316
Operation
Tires and wheels
Step 2
Step 5
왘 Determine the combined weight of
왘 Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
Step 3
왘 Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
step 4.
Step 6 (if applicable)
The following table shows examples on
how to calculate total and cargo load
capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load
limit of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
purposes only. Make sure you are using
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle’s placard (컄 page 316).
왘 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
Step 4
왘 The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lbs. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs.)
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle
(컄 page 319).
317
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined
weight limit
of occupants
and cargo
from placard
Number of Seating
occupants
configura(driver and tion
passengers)
Occupants weight
Combined
Available cargo/luggage and trailer
weight of all tongue weight (total load limit mioccupants
nus combined weight of all occupants)
1
5
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
750 lbs
1500 lbs – 750 lbs = 750 lbs
540 lbs
1500 lbs – 540 lbs = 960 lbs
150 lbs
1500 lbs – 150 lbs = 1350 lbs
1500 lbs
front: 2
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
rear: 3
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
2
1500 lbs
3
front: 1
Occupant 1: 200 lbs
rear: 2
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
3
1500 lbs
1
front: 1
The higher the weight of all occupants,
the less cargo and luggage load capacity
is available.
For more information, see “Trailer
tongue load” (컄 page 319).
318
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label
Trailer tongue load
Even after careful determination of the
combined weight of all occupants, cargo
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) (컄 page 319) as to not exceed the
permissible load limit, you must make
sure your vehicle never exceeds the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the
certification label. The certification label
can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical data” (컄 page 432).
The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the load you can carry in your
vehicle. If a trailer is towed, the tongue
load must be added to the weight of all
occupants riding and any cargo you are
carrying in the vehicle. The tongue load
typically is 10 percent of the trailer
weight and everything loaded in it.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo, and the trailer tongue
load (컄 page 319) must never exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The
total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and
rear axle), have the loaded vehicle (including driver, passengers and all cargo
and, if applicable, trailer fully loaded)
weighed on a suitable commercial scale.
Your Maybach has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo.
We not recommend trailer towing with
your vehicle.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire
and Loading Information placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 315).
The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
319
Operation
Tires and wheels
In addition to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel filler flap for any
additional information pertaining to
special driving situations. For more information, see “Important notes on tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 320).
i Data shown on placard example are for illustration purposes only. Load limit data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the illustration below. Refer to
placard on vehicle for actual data specific to
your vehicle.
The Tire and Loading Information placard lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded
vehicle weight. The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as
original equipment.
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure
Warning!
G
If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly
drops:
1 Tire and Loading Information placard
with recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
320
앫
Check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects.
앫
Check to see whether air is leaking
from the valves or from around the
rim.
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving, depending on the driving speed and the
tire load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow,
consult the placard on the inside of the
fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold
tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure, excessive
heat can build up and result in sudden
tire failure.
i Driving comfort may be reduced when
the tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the
value for speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) as
specified on the placard located on the inside
of the fuel filler flap.
Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have supplemental
tire inflation pressure information for
vehicle loads less than the maximum
loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on
the placard located on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F
(10°C) of air temperature change. Keep
this in mind when checking tire inflation
pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month.
Check and adjust the tire inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. The
tires can be considered cold if the vehicle
has been parked for at least 3 hours or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
If you check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has
been driven for several miles or sitting
less than 3 hours), the reading will be
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not
let air out to match the specified cold tire
inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire
will be underinflated.
Warning!
G
Follow recommend tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 315). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout.
Checking tire inflation pressure
manually
Follow the steps below to achieve correct
tire inflation pressure:
왘 Remove the cap from the valve on
one tire.
왘 Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
valve.
왘 Read tire inflation pressure on tire
gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 315). If necessary, add air to
achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure.
i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire
inflation pressure by pushing the metal stem
of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire
gauge.
왘 Install the valve cap.
왘 Repeat this procedure for each tire.
321
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure
electronically
The tire inflation pressure monitor only
functions on wheels that are equipped
with the proper electronic sensors. It
monitors the tire inflation pressure, as
selected by the driver, in all four tires. A
warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in tire inflation pressure in one or
more of the tires.
You can call up the tire inflation pressure
monitoring display using the control
system (컄 page 157).
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
until the current tire inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display.
(1) This device may not cause interference,
and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i After you have reactivated the tire inflation pressure monitor, the current tire inflation pressures will only be shown after a few
minutes’ driving time.
During this time, you will see the following
message in the multifunction display:
TIRE PRES. DISPLAY
APPEARS AFTER
DRIVING A FEW
MINUTES
i Possible differences between the readings
of a tire inflation pressure gauge of an air
hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the vehicle’s control system can occur. The readings
issued by the control system are more precise.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu
appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 162).
322
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
Warning!
G
When the tire inflation pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more
of your tires is significantly underinflated.
You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper tire inflation pressure as indicated
on the vehicle’s tire information placard.
Driving on a significantly underinflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability. Each tire, including the
spare, should be checked monthly when
cold and set to the recommended tire inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and owner’s manual.
Operation
Tires and wheels
i The recommended tire inflation pressures
for your vehicle can be found on the tire placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 315). The tire inflation pressures are
not listed in the owner’s manual.
Warning!
G
The tire inflation pressure monitor does
not indicate a warning for wrongly selected tire inflation pressures. Always adjust
tire inflation pressure according to the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if
available, the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The tire inflation pressure monitor is not
able to issue a warning due to a sudden
dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
i Operating radio transmission equipment
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or
near the vehicle could cause the tire inflation
pressure monitor to malfunction.
Reactivating the tire inflation pressure
monitor
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the current tire inflation
pressures for each tire appear in the
multifunction display or the following message appears in the multifunction display:
The tire inflation pressure monitor must
be reactivated in the following situations:
앫
if you have changed the tire inflation
pressure
앫
if you have replaced the wheels or
tires
앫
if you have installed new wheels or
tires
왘 Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or, if available, the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure
the tire inflation pressure of all four
tires is correct.
왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu
appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 157).
TIRE PRES. DISPLAY
APPEARS AFTER
DRIVING A FEW
MINUTES
i If you are transporting a deflated tire in
the vehicle, do not activate the tire inflation
pressure monitor until
앫
the deflated tire is no longer in the vehicle
앫
you have inflated the tire to the correct
tire inflation pressure
왘 Press the reset button J in the instrument cluster (컄 page 154).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
MONITOR CURRENT
TIRE
PRESSURES?
컄컄
323
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 왘 Press the æ button.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
REACTIVATED
The tire inflation pressure monitor
will now monitor the tire inflation
pressure values of all four tires.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
TIRE PRES. DISPLAY
APPEARS AFTER
DRIVING A FEW
MINUTES
This display appears until the individual tire inflation pressure values are
matched with the tires. The individual values are then displayed
(컄 page 322).
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘 Press the ç button.
If one of the following messages appears
in the multifunction display:
앫
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
REACTIVATE AFTER
CORRECTING PRESSURE
앫
TIRE PRESSURE
PLEASE CORRECT
324
왘 Check the tire inflation pressures and
correct them if necessary.
Warning!
G
왘 Reactivate the tire inflation pressure
monitor.
Flat tire
If a tire is deflating the message:
CAUTION-TIRE DEFECT
appears in the multifunction display.
If a tire inflation pressure is low the
message:
CHECK TIRE
appears in the multifunction display.
Additional warning messages may also
appear in the multifunction display.
Read and observe the warning messages
in the multifunction display and follow
the instructions for each message. See
the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 374)
and (컄 page 396) for a listing of warning
messages and instructions.
Driving with underinflated or damaged
tire(s) produces worse than normal and unexpected vehicle operational characteristics. Overriding the speed limitation is
potentially dangerous as higher speeds
and quick acceleration, as produced by
your depressing the accelerator pedal fully
and briskly, may intensify adverse vehicle
handling characteristics.
Warning!
G
You should pull over immediately. The vehicle no longer has steering stability and
may skid. Change the wheel.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires
Warning!
Underinflated tires
Underinflated tires can:
앫
cause excessive and uneven tire wear
앫
adversely affect fuel economy
앫
lead to tire failure from being
overheated
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
G
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Overinflated tires
Overinflated tires can:
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
앫
cause uneven tire wear
앫
be more prone to damage from road
hazards
앫
adversely affect ride comfort
앫
increase stopping distance
325
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire labeling
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings can be found on a tire.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards
(컄 page 331)
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(컄 page 329)
3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 330)
4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 331)
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material (컄 page 333)
7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄 page 326)
8 Load identification (컄 page 329)
9 Tire name
Tire size designation, load and speed rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may
vary from data shown in above illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
(컄 page 436).
1
2
3
4
5
6
Tire width
Aspect ratio in %
Radial tire code
Rim diameter
Tire load rating
Tire speed rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may
vary from data shown in above illustration.
326
Operation
Tires and wheels
General:
Tire code
Depending on the design standards
used, the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation.
The tire code 3 (컄 page 326) indicates
the tire construction type. The “R” stands
for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter
“B” means belted-bias ply construction.
No letter preceding the size designation
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire
based on European design standards.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation: Passenger car tire based on U.S. design standards.
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation: Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation: Temporary spare tires which are
high pressure compact spares designed
for temporary emergency use only.
Tire width
The tire width 1 (컄 page 326) indicates
the nominal tire width in mm.
Aspect ratio
The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 326) is the
dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width and is
expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height
by section width.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any
tire with a speed capability above
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a “ZR”
in the size designation (for example: 245/
40 ZR 18). For additional information,
see “Tire speed rating” (컄 page 328).
Rim diameter
The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 326) is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the
diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter
is indicated in inches (in).
Tire load rating
The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 326) is a
numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lb
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
See also “Maximum tire load”
(컄 page 330) where the maximum load
associated with the load index is indicated in kilograms and lb.
Warning!
G
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR (컄 page 334) of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and/or
serious injury to you or others.
Always replace rims and tires with the
same designation, manufacturer and type
as shown on the original part.
Warning!
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the
placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 315). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in
handling or steering problems, or brake
failure.
For additional information on tire load
rating, see “Load identification”
(컄 page 329).
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 326) and tire
speed rating 6 (컄 page 326) are also referred
to as “service description”.
327
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire speed rating
Summer tires
The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 326)
indicates the approved maximum speed
for the tire.
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
(Y)
above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 326) and tire
speed rating 6 (컄 page 326) are also referred
to as “service description”.
328
앫
At the tire manufacturer’s option,
any tire with a speed capability above
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a
“ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine
the maximum speed capability of the
tire, the service description for the
tire must be referred to. The service
description is comprised of the tire
load rating 5 (컄 page 326) and the
tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 326).
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
designation and no service
description 5 and 6 (컄 page 326) is
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed capability.
If a service description 5 and 6
(컄 page 326) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
In this example, “97Y” is the service
description. The letter “Y” designates the speed rating and the speed
capability of the tire is limited to
186 mph (300 km/h).
앫
Any tire with a speed capability
above 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR” in the size designation
AND the service description must be
placed in parenthesis.
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y).
The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis
designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above 186
mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire.
Operation
Tires and wheels
All-season and winter tires
Index
Load identification
Speed rating
Q
M+S1
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T
M+S1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations require each new
tire manufacturer or tire retreader to
mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of
each tire produced.
H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
1
or M+S.for winter tires
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special
winter performance. Make sure the tires you
use show M+S and the mountain/snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall. These
tires meet specific snow traction performance
requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers
Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association
of Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions.
C, D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry
at a specified pressure.
1 Load identification
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may
vary from data shown in above illustration.
In addition to tire load rating, special
load identification 1 may be molded
into the tire sidewall following the letter
designating the tire speed rating 6
(컄 page 326).
The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or
other safety matters concerning tires and
gives purchasers the means to easily
identify such tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire
type code” and “Date of manufacture”.
No specification given: absence of any
text (like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
XL (Extra Load): designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
Light Load: designates a light load tire.
329
Operation
Tires and wheels
Manufacturer’s identification mark
Maximum tire load
The manufacturer’s identification
mark 2 denotes the tire manufacturer.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four
symbols. For more information on retreaded tires (컄 page 313).
Tire size
1
2
3
4
DOT
Manufacturer’s identification mark
Tire size
Tire type code (at the option of the
tire manufacturer)
5 Date of manufacture
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may
vary from data shown in above illustration.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
A tire branding symbol 1 which denotes
the tire meets requirements of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
The code 3 indicates the tire size.
Tire type code
The code 4 may, at the option of the
manufacturer, be used as a descriptive
code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture 5 identifies
the week and year of manufacture.
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first
full week of the calendar year. The second two figures represent the year.
For example, “3106” represents the 31st
week of 2006.
330
1 Maximum tire load rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may
vary from data shown in above illustration.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
Warning!
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the
placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 315). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in
handling or steering problems, or brake
failure.
Operation
Tires and wheels
For more information on tire load rating
(컄 page 328).
For information on calculating total and
cargo load capacities (컄 page 316).
Maximum tire inflation pressure
Warning!
G
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (U.S. vehicles)
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance
factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
1 Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may
vary from data shown in above illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.
1 Treadwear
2 Traction
3 Temperature resistance
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may
vary from data shown in above illustration.
Always follow the recommended tire
inflation pressure (컄 page 319) for proper tire inflation.
331
Operation
Tires and wheels
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
Treadwear Traction
Temperature
200
A
AA
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition
to these grades.
Traction
Temperature
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades
represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning!
G
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as
well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
332
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Warning!
G
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire ply material
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced)
of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
1 Plies in sidewall
2 Plies under tread
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may
vary from data shown in above illustration.
This marking tells you about the type of
cord and number of plies in the sidewall
and under the tread.
Bar
Another metric unit for air pressure.
There are 14.5038 pounds per square
inch (psi) to 1 bar; there are
100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires
wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire
onto the rim.
Air pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or
bars.
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least 3 hours or
driven no more than 1 mi (1.6 km).
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width
expressed in percentage.
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if
so equipped, air conditioning and additional optional equipment, but without
passengers and cargo.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
A tire branding symbol which denotes
the tire meets requirements of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
333
Operation
Tires and wheels
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Maximum load rating
Production options weight
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
each axle must never exceed the GAWR
for the front and rear axle indicated on
the certification label located on the
driver’s door B-pillar.
The maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing
over 5 lb (2.3 kilograms) in excess of
those standard items which they replace,
not previously considered in curb weight
or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
installed accessories, passengers and
cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
load. The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(weight of the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if
applicable, trailer tongue load). It is indicated on certification label located on
the driver’s door B-pillar.
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There
are 6.9 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 psi; another
metric unit for air pressure is bars. There
are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
334
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory
weight, total load limit, and production
options weight.
Maximum tire inflation pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the
tire under normal driving conditions.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lb).
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
at their designated seating positions.
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for air pressure -> bar, kilopascal (kPa).
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Recommended tire inflation pressure
listed on Tire and Loading Information
placard located on driver’s door B-pillar
for normal driving conditions. Provides
best handling, tread life and riding comfort.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and
tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Operation
Tires and wheels
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Total load limit
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety
matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such
tires. The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”,
“Tire type code” and “Date of manufacture”.
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity.
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire
manufacturers using government testing
procedures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Tire load rating
Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Tire ply composition and material used
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric
in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall, which
include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road
via the tires. The amount of grip provided.
Tread
The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the maximum loaded vehicle
weight and dividing it by two.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called
“wear bars” that show across the tread
of a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of
tread remains.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
335
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rotating tires
Warning!
G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the
tires are of the same dimension.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
rear), tire rotation is not possible.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all
around. If your vehicle is equipped with
tires of the same dimension all around,
tires can be rotated, observing a frontto-rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation (spinning) direction of the tire (컄 page 315).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible.
336
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to
the tire manufacturer’s recommended
intervals in the tire manufacturer’s
warranty pamphlet located in your
vehicle literature portfolio. If none is
available, tires should be rotated every
3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km),
or sooner if necessary, according to the
degree of tire wear. The same rotation
(spinning) direction must be maintained
(컄 page 315).
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
wear on front tires and tread center
wear on rear tires).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure, activating the tire inflation
pressure monitor if necessary.
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Only use Genuine Maybach wheel bolts
specified for your vehicle’s rims.
! Your vehicle is equipped with a tire inflation pressure monitor. Electronic components
are built into the wheel.
Do not use mounting tools in the area of the
valve as they could damage the electronic
components.
To prevent damage or incorrect installation,
have the tires changed at an authorized
Maybach Studio.
For information on wheel change, see
the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 400)
and (컄 page 413).
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Maybach Studio. This service includes:
앫
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫
Addition of cleaning concentrate to
the water of the windshield and
headlamp cleaning system. Add MB
Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” to a pre-mixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze
which is formulated for temperatures
below freezing point (컄 page 445).
앫
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature. A well-charged battery helps to
make sure the engine can be started
even at low ambient temperatures.
앫
Tire change.
Tire speed rating for winter tires
If you install winter tires, have an authorized Maybach Studio limit the speed of
your vehicle to the speed rating of the
winter tires installed.
When the speed limitation is activated,
the segments up to the set speed limitation are illuminated, for example,
130 mph (210 km/h) as in the illustration
below.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If
the maximum speed for which your tires
are rated is below the speed rating of
your vehicle, you must place a notice to
this effect where it will be seen by the
driver. Such notices are available from
your tire dealer or from any authorized
Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
Vehicle speed limitation for winter tires in
speedometer
337
Operation
Winter driving
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use show
the mountain/snowflake.marking on
the tire sidewall. These tires meet specific
snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber
Association of Canada (RAC) and have
been designed specifically for use in
snow conditions. Use of winter tires is
the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and the ESP® in
winter operation.
For safe handling, make sure all mounted winter tires are of the same make and
have the same tread design.
Warning!
G
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
0.16 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are
no longer suitable for winter operation.
338
Warning!
G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware
that the difference in tire characteristics
may very well impair turning stability and
that overall driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized Maybach
Studio.
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
앫
Using snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations
(컄 page 436).
앫
Use snow chains in pairs and on rear
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.
! If snow chains are mounted to the front
wheels, they may scrape against the body or
axle components. The tires or the vehicle
could be damaged as a result.
앫
select the raised level of the vehicle level control system (컄 page 234). Other settings may
result in damage to your vehicle.
Use only snow chains that are
approved by us for use on Maybach
vehicles. Any authorized Maybach
Studio will be glad to advise you on
this subject.
앫
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on
roads without snow.
Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
i When driving with snow
chains, you may
®
Snow chains
! When driving with snow chains, always
wish to deactivate the ESP (컄 page 106) before setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve the vehicle‘s traction.
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by an authorized
Maybach Studio, in accordance with the
Maintenance Booklet at the times called
for by the maintenance service indicator
display.
'A' SERVICE
IN XXX DAYS
i Vehicles equipped with FSS (Flexible Service System) only (Canada vehicles, depending
on vehicle production date):
'A' SERVICE
IN X DAY
앫
FSS evaluates engine temperature, oil level, vehicle speed, engine speed, distance
driven and the time elapsed since the last
service and calculates other maintenance
service work required.
앫
The interval between maintenance services depends on your driving habits.
A gentle driving style, moderate engine
speeds and the avoidance of short-distance trips will lengthen the interval between services.
'A' SERVICE DUE NOW
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and maintenance service indicator at
the designated times /mileage will result
in vehicle damage not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
Maintenance service indicator message
The maintenance service indicator message will notify you when the next maintenance service is due.
Starting approximately 1 month before
the next maintenance service is due, one
of the following messages will appear in
the multifunction display while you are
driving or when you switch on the ignition (example service A):
'A' SERVICE
IN XXXXX MI
The type of maintenance service due is
indicated in the multifunction display:
9
Basic service (A)
´
Extended service (B)
i Vehicles equipped with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles. Canada vehicles, depending on vehicle production date):
The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks
distance driven and the time elapsed since the
last maintenance service and calculates other
maintenance service work required.
(Canada: IN XXXXX KM)
339
Operation
Maintenance
Clearing the maintenance service indicator message
The maintenance service indicator message is automatically cleared after approximately 30 seconds when you switch
on the ignition or when reaching the
maintenance service threshold while
driving.
You can also clear it yourself.
Maintenance service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested
maintenance service term, you will see
the following message in the multifunction display example service A):
'A' SERVICE
EXCEEDED BY
XXXX MI
(Canada: XXXXX KM)
'A' SERVICE
EXCEEDED BY
XXX DAYS
'A' SERVICE
EXCEEDED BY
X DAY
In addition, a signal sounds when the
message appears.
1 Reset button J
왘 Press reset button J 1 on the instru-
ment cluster.
The maintenance service indicator
message is cleared and the standard
display appears in the multifunction
display (컄 page 157).
340
Any authorized Maybach Studio will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance
service.
Calling up the maintenance service indicator display
You can call up the maintenance service
indicator display at any time to check
when the next maintenance service is
due.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display appears in
the multifunction display
(컄 page 157).
왘 Press button k or j until the
maintenance service indicator display
with the service symbol 9 or ´
and the service deadline appear in
the multifunction display.
i If the battery is disconnected, the days of
disconnection will not be included in the
count shown by the maintenance service indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline, you will need to subtract these
days from the days shown in the maintenance
service indicator display.
Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator :.
Operation
Maintenance
Resetting the maintenance service indicator
In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by
an authorized Maybach Studio, you can
have the maintenance service indicator
reset. The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service
will find the information for resetting
the maintenance service indicator in the
maintenance-relevant information for
your vehicle. Such information is available from either your authorized
Maybach Studio or directly from
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
i If the maintenance service indicator was
inadvertently reset, have an authorized
Maybach Studio correct it.
Only reset if the proper maintenance service
has been performed. Resetting the system
without performing the proper service as
called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and/or other
vehicle damage not covered by the Maybach
Limited Warranty.
341
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle
Regular and proper care will help to
maintain the value of your vehicle. The
best way to protect your vehicle from
harmful environmental influences is to
wash it and use protective treatments
regularly.
Warning!
G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow the instructions on the
particular container. Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning
the inside.
While in operation, even while parked,
your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked,
can attack the paintwork as well as the
vehicle underbody and cause lasting
damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions,
but also by:
앫
Air pollution
앫
Road salt
앫
Tar
앫
Gravel and stone chipping
To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:
앫
Grease and oil
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
앫
Fuel
Always lock away cleaning products and
keep them out of reach of children.
앫
Coolant
앫
Brake fluid
앫
Bird droppings
앫
Insects
앫
Tree resins, etc.
i Your authorized Maybach Studio offers a
high-end care product case* to ensure that
your Maybach receives optimal care at all
times and at any location.
342
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
앫
near the ocean
앫
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
앫
during winter operation
You should check your vehicle from time
to time for stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be repaired as
soon as possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a
thorough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be
re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the
body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production
treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by us for use on Maybach vehicles because of the possibility of
incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others applied later.
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology. You can obtain car-care products approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles
at an authorized Maybach Studio.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion
or damage due to negligent or incorrect
care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car-care products recommended here. In such cases it is best to
seek aid at an authorized Maybach
Studio.
Power washer
Paintwork, painted body components
! Follow the instructions provided by the
power washer manufacturer on maintaining a
distance between the vehicle and the nozzle
of the power washer.
! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape
or similar materials to painted body components may damage the paintwork.
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires.
The intense jet of water can result in damage
to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving across
the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical
parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other
rubber parts.
The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as well as
references to car-care products approved
by us for use on Maybach vehicles.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
If an outside door handle is hit by a strong jet
of water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately
3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be
inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Refrigerator**
Tar stains
Clean out the refrigerator regularly with
a vinegar-and-water solution. Mix the
solution in a ratio of 1 part vinegar to
10 parts water. Allow the refrigerator to
dry before using it again.
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove.
A tar remover is recommended.
Paint Care approved by us for use on
Maybach vehicles should be applied
when water drops on the paint surface
do not “bead up”. This should normally
be done every 3 to 5 months, depending
on climate and washing detergent used.
Paint Cleaner approved by us for use on
Maybach vehicles should be applied if
the paint surface shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or
wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or
if the hood is still hot.
왘 Use the appropriate Touch-Up Stick
approved by us for use on Maybach
vehicles for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e.
chips from stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
343
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning
Vehicle washing
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical
components and connectors from contact with water and cleaning agents.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all
traces of road salt as soon as possible.
Corrosion protection, such as Anticorrosion Wax approved by us for use on
Maybach vehicles, should be applied to
the engine compartment after every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should
be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all
pulleys should be protected from any
wax.
When washing the vehicle underbody,
do not forget to clean the inner sides of
the wheels.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
If an outside door handle is hit by a strong jet
of water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately
3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be
inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Hand-wash
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight.
왘 Only use a mild car wash detergent,
such as Car Shampoo approved by us
for use on Maybach vehicles.
왘 Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle. Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a
dry cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
paint.
Automatic car wash
You can have your car washed in an automatic car wash from the start. Automatic car washes without brushes are
preferable.
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
touchless car wash which uses caustic spray.
Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the
paint or ornamental moldings.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before running it through the automatic
car wash.
diffused jet of water.
! Make sure the windshield wiper switch is
Direct only a very weak spray towards
the ventilation intake.
set to 0 (컄 page 74). Otherwise, e.g. the rain
sensor could activate and cause the wipers to
move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle
damage.
왘 Use plenty of water and rinse the
sponge and chamois frequently.
왘 Rinse with clean water and thorough-
ly dry with a chamois.
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry
on the finish.
344
! Do not use scouring agents on these
parts.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors.
Operation
Vehicle care
i After running the vehicle through an au-
Ornamental moldings
tomatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the
windshield (컄 page 347). This will prevent
smears and reduce wiping noise which can be
caused by residual wax on the windshield.
For regular cleaning and care of ornamental moldings, use a damp cloth.
When leaving the car wash, make sure the
mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may vibrate.
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
moldings. Although ornamental moldings
may have chrome appearance, they could be
made of anodized aluminum that will be
damaged when cleaned with chrome cleaner.
Instead, use a damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings.
For very dirty ornamental moldings of which
you are sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome
cleaner. If in doubt whether an ornamental
molding is chrome-plated, contact an authorized Maybach Studio.
Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
turn signal lenses
왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such
as Car Shampoo approved by us for
use on Maybach vehicles, with plenty
of water.
! Only use window cleaning solutions that
are suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window
cleaning solutions which are not suitable may
damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that contain solvents.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a
dry cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
lens surface.
345
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Distronic** system sensor
cover
Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors
! Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor covers. Applying strong pressure may damage the sensor covers.
Follow the instructions provided by the power
washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of
the power washer.
! To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth
when cleaning the sensors. Do not attempt to
wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.
1 Distronic system sensor cover
1 Parktronic system sensors in front
bumper
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such
왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such
as Car Shampoo approved by us for
use on Maybach vehicles, with plenty
of water and a non-scratching cloth
to clean sensor cover 1.
! To prevent scratches or damage, never
apply strong force and only use a soft, nonscratching cloth when cleaning the sensor
cover 1. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors
with a dry cloth or sponge.
왘 Restart the engine after cleaning sen-
sor cover 1.
346
as Car Shampoo approved by us for
use on Maybach vehicles, with plenty
of water and a soft, non-scratching
cloth to clean sensors 1 on the
bumpers.
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning of the Parking Assist System
(PAS) camera lens
The camera is in the license plate recess
next to the handle for the luggage compartment lid.
! Do not clean the camera and the area
around the camera:
앫
with a high-pressure cleaner
앫
with a dry cloth and high pressure
앫
with aggressive cleaning agents
You could otherwise damage the camera.
Cleaning the windows and the wiper
blades
! The windshield wipers must be in a vertical position before folding them away from
the windshield. They could otherwise damage
the hood.
왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until
they snap into place.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
They could tear.
왘 Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
왘 Only use clean water and a soft, non-
왘 Turn combination switch to wiper
setting II (컄 page 75).
camera lens 1 when waxing the vehicle. If necessary, remove the wax using Car Shampoo approved by us for
use on Maybach vehicles with plenty
of water.
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: Make sure the
vehicle’s on board electronics have
status 0) before cleaning the windshield
and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
왘 Make sure the hood is fully closed.
1 Camera lens
왘 Be careful not to apply wax to the
G
Never open the hood when the wiper arms
are folded forward.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
scratching cloth to clean the camera
lens 1.
Warning!
왘 With wiper arms in vertical position,
switch off the ignition (컄 page 60).
clean cloth and detergent solution.
왘 Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win-
dow cleaning solution on all outside
and inside glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
the windshield before turning the SmartKey
in the starter switch or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button (vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO**).
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the impact
from the tensioning spring could crack the
windshield.
347
Operation
Vehicle care
! To clean the window interior, do not use
a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners containing solvents. Do not touch the inside of
the front, rear or side windows with hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so
may damage the windows.
Plastic and rubber parts
Hard plastic trim items
왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent
왘 Use Interior Care approved by us for
or mild detergent for delicate fabrics
as a washing solution.
왘 Wipe with a cloth moistened in a
Light alloy wheels
lukewarm solution.
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
The surface may temporarily change
color. If this is the case, wait for it to
dry.
왘 Use Wheel Care approved by us for
use on Maybach vehicles, a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water
for cleaning the light alloy wheels.
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid may cause corrosion or damage the clear
coat.
! The vehicle should not be parked for an
extended period of time immediately after it
has been cleaned, especially not after the
wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel rim
cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corrosion of the brake disks and brake
pads. Non-approved wheel cleaners may also
damage the wheel paint if the car is not driven after cleaning. Therefore, the vehicle’s
brake system should always be warmed-up
before it is parked after cleaning. To do so,
please drive your vehicle for several minutes
to allow the brakes to dry.
When applying Tire Care and Wheel Care
products approved by us for use on Maybach
vehicles, take care not to spray them on the
brake disks.
348
Warning!
G
Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
containing solvents to clean the cockpit or
the steering wheel. Cleaners containing
solvents will make the surface porous and
vehicle occupants could suffer serious injuries from plastic parts coming loose in the
event of air bag deployment.
use on Maybach vehicles onto a soft
lint-free cloth and apply with light
pressure.
! Never apply strong force and only use a
soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the
surface. Do not attempt to wipe the surface
with a dry cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the surface.
Instrument cluster and front cup holders
왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent
or mild detergent for delicate fabrics
as a washing solution.
왘 Wipe with a cloth moistened in a
lukewarm solution.
! To prevent scratches, do not use scouring
agents.
! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents on
these parts.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface. Do not attempt to wipe the surface with
a dry cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the surface.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
왘 Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor-
oughly or clean with Leather Care approved by us for use on Maybach
vehicles.
Operation
Vehicle care
Carpets
왘 Use Carpet and Fabric Care approved
by us for use on Maybach vehicles for
cleaning the carpets.
Rear cup holder/bottle holder
For cleaning purposes, you can push back
the cover plate of the cup holder.
왘 Press button 2.
The cup holder opens.
왘 Push one of the release catches 3
upward and, at the same time, press
release catch 1 for the cup/bottle
holder.
왘 Push the cover plate 4 back.
왘 Only use clear, lukewarm water and
soap.
! The seat belts must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat
belts at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in
direct sunlight.
왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent
or mild detergent for delicate fabrics
as a washing solution.
왘 Wipe with a cloth moistened in a
lukewarm solution.
! To prevent scratches, do not use scouring
agents.
왘 After cleaning, close the cup/bottle
holder.
The next time the holder is opened, the
cover plate slides out with it.
Example illustration from Maybach 57
Headliner and shelf below rear window
1
2
3
4
왘 Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-sham-
Release catch for cup/bottle holder
Release catch for cup holder
Release catch for cover plate
Cover plate
Seat belts
poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
Warning!
G
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Upholstery
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give
off coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may
cause the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats
with a proper intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be prevented.
Roof lining
왘 Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-sham-
poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
349
Operation
Vehicle care
Warning!
G
Only use seat or head restraint covers
which have been tested and approved by
Maybach for your vehicle model. Using
other seat or head restraint covers may interfere with or prevent the activation of
the active head restraints. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for availability.
Leather upholstery
Please note that leather upholstery is a
natural product and is therefore subject
to a natural aging process. Leather upholstery may also react to certain ambient influences such as high humidity or
high temperature by showing wrinkles
for example.
왘 Wipe leather upholstery with a damp
cloth and dry thoroughly or clean
with Leather Care approved by us for
use on Maybach vehicles.
! Wipe with light pressure to avoid damage
to the upholstery.
Exercise particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside
should not become wet.
Nubuck leather
Electrotransparent roof*
The nubuck leather upholstery is treated
with a protective coating.
You can lower the inside panel of the
electrotransparent roof.
왘 Wipe nubuck leather upholstery with
damp microfiber cloth to remove
dust and other light stains.
왘 Carefully dab nubuck leather uphol-
stery with a dry microfiber cloth to remove oil stains.
! Do not use Leather Care approved by us
for use on Maybach vehicles on nubuck leather or any solvents to clean nubuck leather.
Warning!
Make sure no passengers are sitting in the
rear passenger compartment when the inside panel of the electrotransparent roof is
being lowered. The passengers could otherwise be injured by the panel.
Avoid hard scrubbing on nubuck leather.
Lowering the inside panel
If in doubt about cleaning any nubuck
stain, please consult your Maybach
Studio for assistance.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
Wood trims
왘 Dampen cloth using water and use
damp cloth to clean wood trims in
your vehicle.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these
may be abrasive.
왘 Make sure the vehicle is stationary
and that the gear selector lever is in
position P.
왘 Pull the switch for the electrotrans-
parent roof on the overhead control
panel backward (to close the screen)
(컄 page 218). At the same time, push
the switch for the rear interior lighting (컄 page 148).
왘 Press and pull both switches until you
see the message PANORAMA ROOF UNLOCKED appear in the multifunction
display.
The inside panel is unlocked.
350
G
Operation
Vehicle care
왘 Push the switch for the electrotrans-
parent roof on the overhead control
panel forward (to open the screen).
The inside panel of the electrotransparent roof is lowered and the screen
is opened.
! Make sure the rear passenger compartment is empty and that the inside panel does
not come into contact with any objects left in
the rear compartment.
Do not lean against the lowered inside panel.
왘 You can clean the glass panels with a
commercially available glass cleaner
and a moist cloth.
Closing the inside panel
왘 After cleaning, pull the switch for the
electrotransparent roof on the overhead control panel backward (to
close the screen) until the screen is
completely closed.
Push the inside panel upward until it
engages.
Warning!
G
No passengers may ride in the rear passenger compartment if the inside panel has
not been or cannot be locked. Have the inside panel repaired immediately by an authorized Maybach Studio.
왘 The message disappears from the
multifunction display.
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0.
! Do not clean the screen! Allow the
cleaned surfaces to dry before closing the
electrotransparent roof.
351
352
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Batteries
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
353
Practical hints
What to do if …
What to do if …
General information:
Lamps in instrument cluster
If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during
Problem
v
Possible cause/consequence
®
the lamp self-check when switching on
ignition, have it checked and replaced if
necessary.
Suggested solution
®
The yellow ABS/ESP
The ESP has been switched off.
왘 Switch the ESP® back on (컄 page 107).
warning lamp comes on Risk of accident!
Exceptions: (컄 page 106).
while the engine is run왘 If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt
®
When the ESP is switched off it will not
ning.
your speed and driving to the prevailstabilize the vehicle if the system
ing road and weather conditions.
recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or
If the ESP® cannot be switched on:
that a wheel is spinning.
The cruise control and the Distronic** sys- 왘 Observe additional messages in the
multifunction display.
tem are deactivated and cannot be
switched on.
왘 Continue driving with added caution.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
354
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
v
Possible cause/consequence
ABS/ESP®
The yellow
warning lamp flashes
while driving.
Suggested solution
ESP®,
The
ABS or traction control has come 왘 When driving off, apply as little throtinto operation because of detected tractle as possible.
tion loss in at least one tire.
왘 While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
The cruise control and the Distronic** system are deactivated and cannot be
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the
switched on.
prevailing road and weather conditions.
왘 Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions (컄 page 106).
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
The yellow fuel tank re- The fuel level has dropped below the reserve warning lamp
serve mark.
comes on while driving.
왘 Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 305).
355
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
l
Only vehicles with
You are too close to the vehicle in front of 왘 Apply the brakes immediately to inDistronic**: The red dis- you to maintain selected speed.
crease the following distance.
tance warning lamp
comes on while driving.
l
Only vehicles with
앫 You are gaining too rapidly on the vehi- 왘 Apply the brakes immediately.
Distronic**: The red discle ahead of you.
왘 Carefully observe the traffic situation.
tance warning lamp
앫 The distance warning system has recogYou may need to brake or maneuver
comes on while driving
nized a stationary obstacle on your
to avoid hitting an obstacle.
and you hear a warning
probable line of travel.
sound.
-
The yellow ABS indicator The ABS has detected a malfunction and
왘 Continue driving with added caution.
lamp comes on while
has switched off. The BAS and the ESP® are
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
also switched off (see messages in display).
driving.
reducing steering capability.
왘 Observe additional messages in the
The brake system is still functioning normultifunction display.
mally but without the ABS, the BAS and the
ESP® available.
왘 Have the system checked at an authoIf the ABS control unit is malfunctioning,
rized Maybach Studio as soon as possiother systems such as Parktronic,
ble.
Distronic**, the navigation system and the Failure to follow these instructions inautomatic transmission can also malfunc- creases the risk of an accident.
tion.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the ABS has switched off.
The batteries may not be sufficiently
charged.
왘 When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again
and the ABS indicator lamp should go
out.
If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:
왘 Have the generator (alternator) and
the batteries checked.
356
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
<
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The red seat belt telltale The seat belt telltale reminds you and your 왘 Fasten your seat belt.
comes on for a maxipassengers to fasten your seat belts before
Regardless of whether the seat belts
mum of 6 seconds after driving off.
are fastened or not, the seat belt tellstarting the engine.
tale always comes on and remains lit
for 6 seconds after starting the engine.
You hear a warning
You have forgotten to fasten your seat
chime for a maximum of belt.
6 seconds after starting
the engine.
왘 Fasten your seat belt.
The warning chime stops sounding.
The red seat belt telltale You and/or your front passenger have for- 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
comes on while the vehi- gotten to fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
cle is standing still and
the engine is running or
during driving.
There are items placed on the front passen- 왘 Remove the items from the front pasger seat and therefore the system senses
senger seat and put them in a safe
the front passenger seat as being occupied.
place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
357
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
<
Possible cause/consequence
During driving the red
seat belt telltale flashes
and you additionally
hear an intermittent
warning chime with increasing intensity.
Suggested solution
The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph 왘 Fasten your seat belt.
(25 km/h) and you and/or your front pasThe seat belt telltale goes out and the
senger have forgotten to fasten your seat
warning chime stops sounding.
belts.
There are items placed on the front passen- 왘 Remove the items from the front pasger seat and therefore the system senses
senger seat and put them in a safe
the front passenger seat as being occupied.
place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the
warning chime stops sounding.
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat
belt the warning chime stops sounding and
the seat belt telltale illuminates continuously.
The seat belt telltale will only go out if both,
the driver and front passenger’s seat belt are
fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a
front door is opened.
358
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
H
Possible cause/consequence
The yellow warning
lamp for the tire inflation pressure monitor
comes on.
Suggested solution
The tire inflation pressure monitor detects 왘 Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
a rapid or significant loss of pressure in at
abrupt steering and braking maneuleast one tire.
vers. Observe the traffic situation
around you.
왘 Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display.
1
Warning!
The red SRS indicator
lamp comes on while
driving.
G
In the event that a malfunction of the SRS
is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Maybach Studio immediately to
have the system checked; otherwise the
SRS may not be activated when needed in
an accident, which could result in serious
or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could result in an accident and/or injury to you or
to others.
There is a malfunction in the restraint sys- 왘 Drive with added caution to the neartems. The airbags or Emergency Tensioning
est authorized Maybach Studio.
Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly
or fail to activate in an accident.
Warning!
G
When the tire inflation pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each
tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s
manual.
i The recommended tire inflation pressure
for your vehicle can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar or, if available, the inside of the
fuel filler flap, not in the owner’s manual.
359
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
;
(USA only)
3
Possible cause/consequence
The red brake warning
lamp comes on while
driving and you hear a
warning sound.
Suggested solution
You are driving with the parking brake set. 왘 Release the parking brake
(컄 page 72).
(Canada only)
The red brake warning 앫 There is a malfunction in the electro-hy- 왘 Observe the message in the multifunclamp comes on when
draulic brake system.
tion display (컄 page 379).
the engine is running
Risk of accident!
앫 There is insufficient brake fluid in the
and you hear a warning
reservoir.
왘 Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe losound.
cation or as soon as it is safe to do so
and notify an authorized Maybach
Studio. Do not add brake fluid! This
will not solve the problem.
Warning!
G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately if
the brake warning lamp stays on. Do not
add brake fluid before checking the brake
system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
fire. You can be seriously burned.
360
! If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system
checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
?
The yellow engine mal- There is a malfunction in:
function indicator
앫 The fuel management system
lamp comes on while
앫 The ignition system
driving.
±
앫 The emission control system
(Canada only)
앫 Systems which affect emissions
(USA only)
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp-home (emergency operation) mode.
Your fuel tank is empty.
Suggested solution
왘 Have the vehicle checked as soon as possi-
ble by an authorized Maybach Studio.
An on-board diagnostic connector is used
by the service station to link the vehicle to
the shop diagnostics system. It allows the
accurate identification of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic
trouble codes. It is located in the front left
area of the footwell next to the parking
brake pedal.
왘 After refuelling, start, turn off, and re-
start the engine three or four times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not
need to have your vehicle checked.
i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop immediately as soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
Check local requirements.
361
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console
Lamp
Problem
PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF
The front passenger front airbag The system is malfunctioning.
off indicator lamp illuminates and
remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual
on the front passenger seat.
Warning!
Possible cause/consequence
G
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp illuminates and remains illuminated
with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the
front passenger seat, do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until
the system has been repaired.
362
Suggested solution
왘 Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized Maybach
Studio.
왘 Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display and follow
corrective steps (컄 page 369).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF
The indicator lamp does not illu- The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Make sure that there is nothing between
minate and/or does not remain ilseat cushion and child seat and check inluminated with the weight of a
stallation of the child seat.
typical 12-month-old child in a
왘 Make sure that no objects applying supstandard child restraint or less on
plemental weight onto the seat are
the front passenger seat.
present.
왘 Make sure that no objects which apply
forces to the seat are present (e.g. objects
such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head restraints
pushing against roof etc.). The system
may recognize such forces as supplemental weight.
왘 If the light remains out, have the system
checked as soon as possible by an authorized Maybach Studio. Do not transport a
child on the front passenger seat until the
system has been repaired.
왘 Read and observe messages in the multi-
function display and follow corrective
steps (컄 page 369).
Warning!
G
less on the front passenger seat, do not
transport a child on the front passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp does not illuminate or remains out
with the weight of a typical 12-month-old
child in a standard child restraint or
363
Practical hints
What to do if …
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located
in the instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given
in this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system
(컄 page 169) displays both cleared and
uncleared messages. If the message
memory menu is not displayed, there are
no messages.
High-priority messages appear in the
multifunction display with in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display using reset button J (컄 page 154)
or button j, k, ÿ, or è on the
multifunction steering wheel
(컄 page 158).
Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be
cleared from the multifunction display
using reset button J (컄 page 154) or
button j, k, ÿ, or è on the
multifunction steering wheel
(컄 page 158). They are then stored in the
vehicle status message memory
(컄 page 169). Remember that clearing a
message will only make the message disappear. Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the
message to appear.
Warning!
G
All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken
note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an
authorized Maybach Studio.
Failure to repair condition noted may
cause damage not covered by the Maybach
Limited Warranty, or result in property
damage or personal injury.
Warning!
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
364
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions,
such as speed or outside temperature,
warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/
warning messages or the failure of any systems. Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Bring the vehicle to
your authorized Maybach Studio as soon
as possible.
i Switching on the ignition causes all instrument cluster lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the
lamps and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may
appear in the malfunction display.
High priority messages appear in red
color.
For your convenience the messages are
divided into two sections:
앫
Text messages (컄 page 365)
앫
Symbol messages (컄 page 376)
Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
Display
ABS
Possible cause/consequence
ABS, ESP INOPERATIVE
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
Possible solution
The ABS and the ESP® have switched 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
off due to a malfunction.
Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
The BAS is also switched off.
The electro-hydraulic brake system is 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
still functioning normally but without
®
the ABS, the ESP , and the BAS avail- Failure to follow these instructions increases
able.
the risk of an accident.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as Parktronic,
Distronic**, the navigation system
and the automatic transmission may
also malfunction.
The ABS and the ESP® are not avail- 왘 Drive a short distance with added caution
able due to a malfunction. The BAS is
at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph
also deactivated.
(20 km/h).
The system’s self-diagnosis may not
be completed yet.
When the message disappears, the ABS,
the ESP®, and the BAS are available again.
The electro-hydraulic brake system is If the message does not disappear:
still functioning normally but without 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
the ABS, the ESP®, and the BAS availWheels may lock during hard braking, reable.
ducing steering capability.
If the ABS control unit is malfunction- 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
ing, other systems such as Parktronic,
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
Distronic**, the navigation system
Failure
to follow these instructions increases
and the automatic transmission may
the risk of an accident.
also malfunction.
365
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
ABS
Possible cause/consequence
ABS, ESP INOPERATIVE
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
ESP®
The ABS and
were deactivated
because of insufficient power supply.
The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts.
Possible solution
When the voltage is above this value again,
the ABS and ESP® are operational again and
the message in the multifunction display
should disappear.
The BAS is also switched off.
If the message in the multifunction display
The electro-hydraulic brake system is does not disappear:
still functioning normally but without 왘 Have the generator (alternator) and the
battery checked.
the ABS, the ESP®, and the BAS available.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as Parktronic,
Distronic**, the navigation system
and the automatic transmission may
also malfunction.
REPLACE
AIR CLEANER
The air filter is clogged.
왘 Have the air filter checked by an autho-
COMFORT
FUNCTIONS
CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE
The battery for electrical consumers
has insufficient voltage and can no
longer supply the convenience functions such as seat ventilation*.
As soon as the on-board voltage is sufficient,
you will see the following message in the multifunction display: COMFORT FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE AGAIN. The electrical consumers are
switched on again.
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
Distronic** is malfunctioning or the
display is malfunctioning.
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
Distronic** is switched off and is tem- 왘 Try activating Distronic** again later.
porarily unavailable.
DISTRONIC
366
rized Maybach Studio.
soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
DISTRONIC
Possible cause/consequence
CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
Possible solution
왘 Clean if necessary the Distronic** cover in
the front bumper (컄 page 346).
the Distronic** cover in the front
왘 Restart the vehicle.
bumper is dirty.
Distronic** is switched off because:
앫
앫
the functionality is impaired due
to heavy rain or thick fog.
or
Distronic** becomes operational again without re-starting the engine if:
앫
dirt comes off during driving (e.g. slush or
snow)
앫
the system recognizes full sensor availability (due to lessening rain or the road surface
drying)
앫
the message disappears from the multifunction display
앫
you see the speed last stored blink in the
multifunction display for 5 seconds.
You can now use Distronic** normally.
Warning!
G
Distronic** cannot take weather conditions into account. Switch off Distronic**
or do not turn it on if the sensor is dirty or
visibility is diminished as a result of snow,
rain or fog. The distance control may be
impaired even before the system is able to
detect a dirty sensor.
The message
DISTRONIC
CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
will be displayed in the multifunction display and Distronic** will be turned off.
367
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
ESP
Possible cause/consequence
INOPERATIVE
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
Possible solution
ESP®
The
detected a malfunction and 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
switched off.
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
The ABS may not be operational.
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
The electro-hydraulic brake system is Failure to follow these instructions increases
still functioning normally but without the risk of an accident.
the ESP® available.
ESP
CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
The ESP® is deactivated because the
power supply has been interrupted.
왘 Synchronize the ESP®: With the vehicle sta-
tionary and the engine running, turn the
steering wheel completely to the left and
The electro-hydraulic brake system is
then to the right.
still functioning normally but without
the ESP® available.
If the ESP® message does not go out:
왘 Continue driving with added caution.
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
! When synchronizing the ESP®, make sure
you can turn the steering wheel in both directions as far as it will go without the wheels hitting any objects, e.g. a curb.
368
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
FRONT PASSENGER
AIRBAG ENABLED
SEE
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Front passenger front airbag is activated while driving even though a
child, small individual, or object below the system’s weight threshold is
on the front passenger seat, or the
front passenger seat is empty. Objects
on the seat or forces acting on the
seat may make the system sense supplemental weight.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check
the front passenger seat for the following:
왘 Apply the parking brake.
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Open the front passenger door.
왘 Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat
and properly secure the child in rear seat employing the child
restraint if necessary.
왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are
present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof
etc.). The system may recognize such forces as supplemental
weight and sense that an occupant on the front passenger
seat is of a greater weight than actually present.
왘 Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and
turn on the ignition (컄 page 60).
(Continued on next page)
369
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Monitor the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 25) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 24) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the center
console should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating
that the OCS (컄 page 88) has deactivated the front passenger
front airbag.
앫
the message FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ENABLED SEE OPERATOR’S
MANUAL or the message FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLED SEE
OPERATOR’S MANUAL should not appear in the multifunction
display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least
60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check
cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the
multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger
seat again. Depending on the front passenger classification
sensed by the OCS (컄 page 88), the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Maybach Studio.
370
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
FRONT PASSENGER
AIRBAG DISABLED
SEE
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Front passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving even though an
adult or someone larger than a small
individual is occupying the front passenger seat. Forces acting on the seat
may make the system sense a decrease in weight.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check
the front passenger seat for the following:
왘 Apply the parking brake.
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 60).
왘 Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.
왘 Adjust the seat in a height position (컄 page 63).
왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are
present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged underneath, behind or around the seat). Such forces may cause
the system to sense that an occupant of a lesser weight than
actually present is on the front passenger seat.
왘 Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and
turn on the ignition (컄 page 60).
(Continued on next page)
371
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Monitor the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 25) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 24) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the center
console should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating
that the OCS (컄 page 88) has deactivated the front passenger
front airbag.
앫
the message FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG ENABLED SEE OPERATOR’S
MANUAL or the message FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLED SEE
OPERATOR’S MANUAL should not appear in the multifunction
display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least
60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check
cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the
multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger
seat again. Depending on the front passenger classification
sensed by the OCS (컄 page 88), the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp remains illuminated with an
372
adult occupant on the front passenger seat
even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use
the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
MOVE SELECTOR LEVER
TO P
You have tried to turn off the engine 왘 Place the gear selector lever in position P.
with the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop
button (컄 page 61) with the gear selector lever not in P.
SRS
MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP
The system is malfunctioning.
왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest
TELE AID
MALFUNCTION
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
One or more main functions of the
Tele Aid system are malfunctioning.
왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by an au-
authorized Maybach Studio.
thorized Maybach Studio.
373
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
REACTIVATE AFTER
CORRECTING PRES.
There was a tire inflation pressure
warning message.
왘 Reactivate the tire inflation pressure moni-
The yellow warning lamp for the tire
inflation pressure monitor lights up
and you have not reactivated the system since the last tire inflation pressure check.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 60).
TIRE PRESSURE
DISPLAY ONLY
AVAILABLE WHEN
IGNITION IS ON
The tire inflation pressure monitor is
using the current pressure values as
the basis for monitoring.
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
REACTIVATED
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
374
tor after correcting the tire inflation pressure values (컄 page 323).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE
The tire inflation pressure monitor is 왘 Remove the additional wheel sensor from
temporarily inoperative because
the vehicle.
an additional wheel sensor is in
the vehicle
앫
a radio source is causing interference
앫
unrecognized wheel sensors are
installed
As soon as the causes of the malfunction have
been removed, the tire inflation pressure mon앫 the maximum temperature of the itor automatically becomes active again.
wheel sensor has been exceeded
The tire inflation pressure monitor or 왘 Have the tire inflation pressure monitor
the wheel sensor is malfunctioning.
checked by an authorized Maybach Studio.
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
NOT OPERATIONAL
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
Warning!
앫
Possible solution
A wheel without proper sensor was
installed.
왘 Have the wheels checked.
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
375
Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
Display
P
AIRMATIC
STOP, CAR TOO LOW
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The vehicle level is too low.
왘 Wait until the vehicle level has been adjust-
ed.
The message then disappears.
The vehicle level control is malfunctioning. In addition, the following
message appears:
왘 Stop and press the vehicle level control but-
AIRMATIC
MALFUNCTION
왘 Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid
ton to select a higher vehicle level
(컄 page 234).
damaging the front fenders.
왘 Listen for scraping noises.
왘 Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.
376
AIRMATIC
MALFUNCTION
The Airmatic system has only limited 왘 Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
operation.
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
The display for Airmatic or the Airsoon as possible.
matic system itself is malfunctioning.
AIRMATIC
VEHICLE RISING
Your vehicle is adjusting to your level
selection.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
#
BATTERY/ALTERNATOR
STOP VEHICLE
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The battery, the alternator or the
electrical system control unit is malfunctioning.
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
The electro-hydraulic brake system
requires electrical energy and therefore has only limited operation. Considerably greater brake pedal force is
required and the stopping distance is
increased.
왘 Notify an authorized Maybach Studio.
The battery is no longer charging.
왘 Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon
Possible causes:
it is safe to do so. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of accident.
왘 Read and observe messages about the elec-
tro-hydraulic brake system in the multifunction display.
as it is safe to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
앫
alternator malfunctioning
If it is broken:
앫
broken poly-V-belt
왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the en-
gine will overheat due to an inoperative waDo not forget that the brake system
ter pump which may result in damage to the
requires electrical energy and may be
engine. Notify an authorized Maybach
operating with restricted capability.
Studio.
Considerably greater brake pedal
If it is intact:
force is required and the stopping
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest authorized
distance is increased.
Maybach Studio. Adapt driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness.
왘 Read and observe messages about the elec-
tro-hydraulic brake system in the multifunction display.
!
RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE
You are driving with the parking
brake engaged.
왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 72).
377
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
T
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The electro-hydraulic brake system is 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
in the emergency operation mode.
it is safe to do so.
Considerably greater brake pedal
왘 Apply the parking brake (컄 page 77).
force is required and the stopping
왘 Do not drive any further.
distance is increased.
왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
The maximum speed is limited to
blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other
55 mph (90 km/h).
sizable, heavy objects (컄 page 414).
BRAKE MALFUNCTION
STOP VEHICLE
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio or call
for Roadside Assistance (컄 page 285).
Warning!
G
Driving while these messages are displayed
can result in an accident. Have your brake
system checked immediately.
If the electro-hydraulic brake system enters
its emergency operation mode, the driver
must apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further than normal to obtain braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the
front wheels.
Stopping distance is increased!
378
If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that
the vehicle be transported with all wheels
off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar
must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing
methods and the vehicle requires towing
with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not
to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
For more information, see “Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 423).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
;
(USA only)
Possible cause/consequence
REDUCED BRAKE POWER
START ENGINE
Possible solution
The battery has insufficient voltage 왘 Start the engine.
and cannot supply sufficient power
The message disappears when sufficient voltto the electro-hydraulic brake system.
age is available.
3
(Canada only)
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive with at least
one window fully open.
379
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
;
(USA only)
Possible cause/consequence
REDUCED BRAKE POWER
VISIT WORKSHOP
3
(Canada only)
Possible solution
The electro-hydraulic brake system is 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
in the emergency operation mode.
왘 Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced
Considerable greater brake pedal
braking responsiveness.
force is required and the stopping
왘
Drive immediately to the nearest authorized
distance is increased.
Maybach Studio.
왘 Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of accident.
Warning!
G
Driving while these message is displayed
can result in an accident. Have your brake
system checked immediately.
If the electro-hydraulic brake system enters
its emergency operation mode, the driver
must apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further than normal to obtain braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the
front wheels.
Stopping distance is increased!
380
If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that
the vehicle be transported with all wheels
off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not
to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
For more information, see “Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 423).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
;
(USA only)
BRAKES OVERHEATED
DRIVE CAREFULLY
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The brake system is overheated due
to an excessive load on the brakes.
왘 Relieve the load on the brake system.
왘 Drive more smoothly and think ahead to
avoid unnecessary braking.
3
왘 When driving down slopes, shift into a lower
(Canada only)
gear to use the engine’s braking power
(컄 page 182).
왘 Cautiously continue driving so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes.
SERVICE BRAKE
VISIT WORKSHOP
There are malfunctions, but the elec- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
tro-hydraulic brake system is operatsoon as possible.
ing normally.
BRAKE FLUID
PLEASE CHECK LEVEL
There is insufficient brake fluid in the 왘 Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle in a safe loreservoir.
cation and notify an authorized Maybach
Studio. Do not add brake fluid! This will not
solve the problem.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of accident.
Warning!
G
Driving with the message BRAKE FLUID
PLEASE CHECK LEVEL displayed can result in
an accident. Have your brake system
checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking
the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid
on hot engine parts and the brake fluid
catching fire. You can be seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system
checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
Low brake fluid in the reservoir may cause
the braking system to fail!
381
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
2
BRAKE PAD
WEAR
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The brake pads have reached their
wear limit.
왘 Have the brake pads replaced as soon as pos-
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
Warning!
G
Have brake pad replacement and other
work on the electro-hydraulic brake system carried out by qualified technicians
only. Contact your Maybach Studio for further information. The electro-hydraulic
brake system must be deactivated prior to
working on the system. High pressure is intermittently built up in the system as part
of its automatic self-test. In addition, the
system is automatically activated when the
vehicle is unlocked by remote control,
when the driver or passenger door is
opened, when the SmartKey in the starter
switch is turned to position 1, when the
brake pedal is depressed or when the parking brake is released.
Failure to deactivate the system prior to
maintenance will cause brake pistons to
extend and brake fluid to leak, which may
result in injuries (contusions and acid
burns), see “Electro-hydraulic brake system” (컄 page 107).
382
sible at an authorized Maybach Studio.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
B
TOP UP COOLANT
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The coolant level is too low.
왘 Add coolant (컄 page 310).
Comply with all warnings while doing so.
왘 If you have to add coolant frequently, have
the cooling system checked by an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You could be seriously
burned.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious
engine damage not covered by the Maybach
Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without a sufficient amount of
coolant in the cooling system. The engine will
overheat, causing major engine damage.
383
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
D
COOLANT
STOP, TURN ENG. OFF
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The coolant is too hot.
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
Among other possible causes, the
poly-V-belt could be broken.
as it is safe to do so.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the en-
gine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the
engine. Contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
If it is intact:
왘 Wait for the message to disappear before re-
starting the engine.
Doing otherwise could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
(Continued on next page)
384
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
왘 Observe the coolant temperature gauge
(컄 page 23).
If the coolant temperature rises again:
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
soon as possible.
Warning!
G
앫
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may
have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be
seriously burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it.
During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately
248°F (120°C).
! The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C).
Doing so may cause serious engine damage
which is not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away
from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get
out of the vehicle and do not stand near
the vehicle until the engine has cooled
down.
385
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
D
The cooling fan for the coolant is mal- 왘 Observe the coolant temperature gauge
functioning.
(컄 page 155).
왘 Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
왘 Have cruise control or Distronic** checked by
Î
CRUISE CONTROL
INOPERATIVE
Cruise control or Distronic** is malfunctioning.
±
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP
Certain electronic systems are unable 왘 Have the electronic systems checked by an
to relay information to the control
authorized Maybach Studio.
system. The following systems may
have failed:
VISIT WORKSHOP
G
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP
앫
Coolant temperature display
앫
Tachometer
앫
Cruise control display
There may be a malfunction in the:
앫
Fuel injection system
앫
Ignition system
앫
Exhaust system
앫
Fuel system
an authorized Maybach Studio.
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
soon as possible.
The displays for several systems have 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
malfunctioned. Some systems them- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
selves may also have malfunctioned.
soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of accident.
386
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
N
Possible cause/consequence
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
VISIT WORKSHOP
Possible solution
The engine oil has dropped to a criti- 왘 Check the engine oil level (컄 page 309) and
cal level.
add oil as required.
왘 If you must add engine oil frequently, have
the engine checked for possible leaks.
There is water in the oil.
When the message:
ADD 1.0 QT. OIL
AT GAS STATION
(Canada: 1.0 LITER)
appears while the engine is running and
at operating temperature, the engine oil
level has dropped to approximately the
minimum level.
왘 Have the oil checked.
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on
if the oil level drops further.
If no oil leaks are noted, continue to
drive to the nearest service station where
the engine oil should be topped to the
required level with an approved engine
oil.
For information on approved engine oils,
refer to the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact
an authorized Maybach Studio.
! The engine oil level warnings should not
be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Maybach
Limited Warranty.
387
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
N
ADD 1.0 QT. OIL
AT GAS STATION
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The engine oil level is too low.
왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 310) and check the
engine oil level (컄 page 309).
(Canada: 1.0 LITER)
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
REDUCE OIL LEVEL
You have added too much engine oil. 왘 Have oil siphoned or drained off. Observe all
There is a risk of damaging the enlegal requirements with respect to its disposgine or the catalytic converter.
al.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
STOP, TURN ENG. OFF
There is no oil in the engine. There is 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as
a danger of engine damage.
possible.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Add engine oil.
_
Y
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CANNOT BE MEASURED
The measuring system is malfunction- 왘 Have the measuring system checked by an auing.
thorized Maybach Studio.
ENTRY POSITION
DO NOT DRIVE
Seat, mirrors and steering wheel have 왘 Wait until the seat, mirrors and steering
not yet moved to their preset driving
wheel have moved to their driving positions.
positions.
The message will disappear.
You are driving with the hood open. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
it is safe to do so.
왘 Close the hood (컄 page 307).
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
Ê
V
388
The trunk is open.
왘 Close the trunk.
You are attempting to drive with one 왘 Close the doors.
or more doors open.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
F
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
KEY
CHECK BATTERY
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
batteries are discharged.
왘 Replace the batteries (컄 page 405).
KEY
NOT RECOGNIZED
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
not recognized while the engine is
it is safe to do so.
running because
왘 Search for the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**.
앫 the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally
is not in the vehicle
locked nor can the engine be started again
after the engine is stopped.
앫 there is strong radio-frequency interference
KEY
NOT RECOGNIZED
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is 왘 Change the position of the SmartKey with
momentarily not recognized.
KEYLESS-GO** in the vehicle.
왘 Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** in the starter switch if necessary.
왘 Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** out
KEY
STILL IN VEHICLE
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
left in the vehicle was recognized
while locking the vehicle from the
outside.
AUTOM. LIGHT ON
REMOVE KEY
SmartKey in starter switch position 1 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
or 2.
switch.
LIGHTS OFF OR
REMOVE KEY
The exterior lamp switch is set to U 왘 Switch off the headlamps (컄 page 142).
and you have forgotten to take out or
the SmartKey. The parking lamps re왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
main switched on.
switch.
of the vehicle.
389
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
F
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
You have forgotten to remove the
SmartKey.
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
REPLACE KEY
The SmartKey is malfunctioning.
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
AUTO-LIGHT
INOPERATIVE
The light sensor is malfunctioning.
The headlamps switch on
automatically.
왘 In the control system, set lamp operation to
manual (컄 page 173).
REMOVE KEY
switch.
soon as possible.
.
왘 Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp
switch.
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
soon as possible.
390
TURN OFF LIGHTS
You have removed the SmartKey
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
from the starter switch, opened the
(컄 page 142).
driver’s door and left the headlamps
on or removed the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** from the vehicle and
left the headlamps on.
ACTIVE HDLMP MALF.
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps have 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
malfunctioned several times in sucsoon as possible.
cession.
ACTIVE HEADLAMPS
UNOPERATIVE
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps are
malfunctioning.
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
HIGH BEAM
LEFT
The left high beam flasher lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
HIGH BEAM
RIGHT
The right high beam flasher lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
LOW BEAM
LEFT
The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning.
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
LOW BEAM
RIGHT
The right low beam lamp is malfunc- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
tioning.
soon as possible.
FOGLAMP
LEFT
The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
FOGLAMP
RIGHT
The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
TURN SIGNAL
LEFT SIDE MIRROR
The turn signal in the left exterior
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
rear view mirror is malfunctioning.
soon as possible.
This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped
working.
TURN SIGNAL
RIGHT SIDE MIRROR
The turn signal in the right exterior 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
rear view mirror is malfunctioning.
soon as possible.
This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped
working.
soon as possible.
soon as possible.
soon as possible.
soon as possible.
soon as possible.
391
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
.
MARKER LAMP
FRONT LEFT
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The left front side marker lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 407) or contact an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 407) or contact an authorized
MARKER LAMP
FRONT RIGHT
The right front side marker lamp is
malfunctioning.
PARKING LAMP
LEFT
The left front standing lamps are mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
functioning.
(컄 page 407) or contact an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
PARKING LAMP
RIGHT
The right front standing lamps are
malfunctioning.
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 407) or contact an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
CORNERING LAMP
LEFT
The left corner-illuminating lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 407) or contact an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
392
CORNERING LAMP
RIGHT
The right corner-illuminating lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
malfunctioning.
(컄 page 407) or contact an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL, L
The left front turn signal lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
functioning.
(컄 page 407) or contact an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL, R
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The right front turn signal lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 407) or contact an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
BRAKE LAMP-LEFT
AUXILIARY LAMP ON
The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.
BRAKE LAMP-RIGHT
AUXILIARY LAMP ON
The right brake lamp is malfunction- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
ing. A substitute bulb is being used.
soon as possible.
3RD BRAKE LAMP
The high mounted brake lamp is mal- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
functioning.
soon as possible.
REAR FOGLAMP
The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
soon as possible.
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
LEFT
The left license plate lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
tioning.
(컄 page 407) or contact an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
RIGHT
The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
soon as possible.
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 407) or contact an authorized
Maybach Studio as soon as possible.
REVERSE LAMP
LEFT
The left reverse lamp is malfunction- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
ing.
soon as possible.
REVERSE LAMP
RIGHT
The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning.
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
soon as possible.
393
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
.
394
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
PARKING LAMP-LEFT
AUXILIARY LAMP ON
The left rear standing lamps are mal- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
functioning. A substitute bulb is besoon as possible.
ing used.
PARKING LAMP-RIGHT
AUXILIARY LAMP ON
The right rear standing lamps are
malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is
being used.
TAIL LAMP-LEFT
AUXILIARY LAMP ON
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
substitute bulb is being used.
soon as possible.
TAIL LAMP-RIGHT
AUXILIARY LAMP ON
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
A substitute bulb is being used.
soon as possible.
REAR TURN SIGNAL, L
AUXILIARY LAMP ON
The left rear turn signal lamp is mal- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
functioning. A substitute bulb is besoon as possible.
ing used.
REAR TURN SIGNAL, R
AUXILIARY LAMP ON
The right rear turn signal lamp is mal- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
functioning. A substitute bulb is besoon as possible.
ing used.
왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
_
STEERING GEAR OIL
PLEASE CHECK
The steering oil has dropped to a crit- 왘 Contact an authorized Maybach Studio as
ical level.
soon as possible.
L
TELE AID BATTERY
INOPERATIVE
The emergency power battery for the 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by an auTele Aid system is malfunctioning. If
thorized Maybach Studio.
the vehicle battery is also discharged,
Tele Aid will not be operational.
TELE AID
NOT ACTIVATED
You do not have a Tele Aid service
contract or you have not extended
your existing one.
FUEL FILLER FLAP
OPEN
A loss of pressure has been detected 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 305).
in the fuel system. The fuel cap may If it is not closed properly:
not be closed properly or the fuel sys왘 Close the fuel cap.
tem may be leaky.
If it is closed properly:
\
왘 Obtain a Tele Aid service contract or have
your existing one extended in an authorized
Maybach Studio.
왘 Have the fuel system checked by an autho-
rized Maybach Studio.
W
WASHER FLUID
PLEASE TOP UP
The fluid level has dropped to about 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 311).
1/ of total reservoir capacity.
3
395
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
H
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
TIRE PRESSURE
PLEASE CORRECT
The pressure is low in one or more
tires.
왘 Check and correct tire inflation pressure as
required (컄 page 321).
TIRE PRESSURE
CAUTION, TIRE PRES.
One or more tires is deflating.
왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘 Change the damaged wheel (컄 page 413).
왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
placed at an authorized Maybach Studio.
The tire pressure in one or more tires 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
is already below the minimum value.
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
The tire pressure in one or more tires
TIRE PRESSURE
CHECK TIRES
is low.
왘 Check the tires. If no damage visible, check
and correct tire inflation pressure as required.
왘 If necessary, change the damaged wheel
(컄 page 413).
왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
placed at an authorized Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire
affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
396
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
H
TIRE PRESSURE, LF
CAUTION, TIRE PRES.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The left front tire is deflating.
왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 413).
왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
placed at an authorized Maybach Studio.
The left front tire inflation pressure is 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
low.
왘 Check the tires. If no damage visible, check
and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(컄 page 321).
TIRE PRESSURE, LF
CHECK TIRES
왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 413).
왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
placed at an authorized Maybach Studio.
TIRE PRESSURE, RF
CAUTION, TIRE PRES.
The right front tire is deflating.
왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 413).
왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
placed at an authorized Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire
affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
397
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
H
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The right front tire inflation pressure 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
is low.
왘 Check the tires. If no damage visible, check
and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(컄 page 321).
TIRE PRESSURE, RF
CHECK TIRES
왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 413).
왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
placed at an authorized Maybach Studio.
TIRE PRESSURE, LR
CAUTION, TIRE PRES.
The left rear tire is deflating.
왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 413).
왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
placed at an authorized Maybach Studio.
The left rear tire inflation pressure is 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
low.
왘 Check the tires. If no damage visible, check
and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(컄 page 321).
TIRE PRESSURE, LR
CHECK TIRES
왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 413).
왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
placed at an authorized Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire
affects the ability to steer or
398
brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
H
TIRE PRESSURE, RR
CAUTION, TIRE PRES.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The right rear tire is deflating.
왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 413).
왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
placed at an authorized Maybach Studio.
The right rear tire inflation pressure is 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
low.
왘 Check the tires. If no damage visible, check
and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(컄 page 321).
TIRE PRESSURE, RR
CHECK TIRES
왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 413).
왘 Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
placed at an authorized Maybach Studio.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire
affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
399
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
The first aid kit is stored in the storage
compartment under the front passenger
seat.
Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage
bowl, spare wheel
The spare wheel, the vehicle tool kit and
the luggage bowl are stored in the compartment underneath the trunk floor.
왘 Fold the cover forward.
1
2
3
4
5
왘 Remove first aid kit.
왘 Lift up the trunk floor cover and en-
1 Tabs
왘 Press tabs 1 together.
i Check expiration dates and contents for
completeness at least once a year and replace
missing/expired items.
400
Wheel chock
Spare wheel
Luggage bowl
Vehicle tool kit
Vehicle jack
gage trunk floor handle in upper
edge of trunk.
You can now remove the tools and
accessories.
! To prevent damage, always disengage
trunk floor handle from trunk edge and lower
trunk floor before closing the trunk.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
앫
One pair of universal pliers
앫
Two open-end wrenches
앫
One hex-socket wrench
앫
One interchangeable slot/Phillips
screwdriver
앫
One towing eye bolt
앫
One wheel wrench
앫
One alignment bolt
앫
One fuse extractor
앫
One fuse chart
앫
Spare fuses
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Removing the mechanical key
Unlocking the driver’s door
Unlocking the vehicle
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle
using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**,
open the driver’s door and the trunk using the mechanical key, see “Anti-theft
alarm system” (컄 page 110).
i Unlocking the vehicle with the mechanical key and opening the driver’s door or the
trunk with the mechanical key will trigger the
anti-theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm: Insert the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** in the starter
switch.
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
1
왘 Move locking tab 1 in direction of
2 Mechanical key
Unlocking
arrow.
왘 Slide mechanical key 2 out of the
housing.
왘 Insert mechanical key 2 into the
driver’s door lock until it stops.
왘 Turn the mechanical key 2 counter-
clockwise to position 1 until the locking knob moves up.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
왘 Pull the door handle to open the driv-
er’s door.
401
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking and opening the trunk
A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft
(1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
! The trunk lid swings open automatically.
Always make sure there is sufficient overhead
clearance.
왘 If necessary, lock the trunk with the
mechanical key (컄 page 127).
Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle should now be locked.
왘 Turn the mechanical key 1 back and
remove it from the trunk lid lock.
Locking the vehicle
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, do the following:
왘 Close the front passenger door, the
rear doors and the trunk.
1 Mechanical key
2
Unlocking in an emergency
3 Handle
왘 Insert the mechanical key 1 into the
trunk lid lock until it stops.
왘 Turn the mechanical key 1 counter-
clockwise to position 2.
The trunk unlocks.
왘 Pull on handle 3.
The trunk opens.
402
i If you cannot close the trunk with the remote trunk opening/closing switch, lower the
trunk lid manually and close it with hands
placed flat on the trunk lid until it is engaged
in its lock.
왘 Press the central locking switch on
the center console (컄 page 129).
왘 Check to see whether the locking
knobs on the doors have moved
down.
왘 If necessary, push them down manu-
ally.
왘 Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (컄 page 401).
왘 Check whether the trunk is locked.
1
Locking
2 Mechanical key
왘 Insert the mechanical key 2 into the
driver’s door lock until it stops.
왘 Turn the mechanical key 2 clockwise
to position 1 until the locking knob
moves down.
The driver’s door is locked.
i This procedure does not arm the antitheft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel
filler flap.
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 57)
You can open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof manually should an electrical malfunction occur.
The tilt/sliding sunroof roof drive is located behind the cover on the overhead
control panel.
Vehicles with SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO**:
왘 Remove crank 2 from the Operator’s
왘 Turn off the engine by pressing the
왘 Insert crank 2 through hole.
KEYLESS-GO** button on the gear selector lever once (컄 page 78).
왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts the
starter switch in position 0, same as
with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch). The driver’s door then
can be closed again.
왘 Pull cover 1 off at the location
marked by the arrow.
Manual pouch.
왘 Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
앫
slide roof closed
앫
raise roof at the rear
왘 Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:
앫
slide roof open
앫
lower roof at the rear
i Turn crank 2 slowly and smoothly.
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized
after being operated manually (컄 page 213).
1 Cover
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the start-
er switch.
2 Crank
403
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 62)
Removing the T-handle crank
The key for emergency operation is
included in the vehicle tool kit.
Operating the power tilt/sliding sunroof
manually
왘 Pull cover 2 off of the rear center in-
The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located
behind cover 2 in the roof lining with
the rear passenger compartment instruments.
왘 Insert crank 1 inclined through hole.
strument.
왘 Turn crank 1 clockwise to:
앫
slide roof closed
앫
raise roof at the rear
왘 Turn crank 1 counterclockwise to:
앫
slide roof open
앫
lower roof at the rear
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized after being operated manually
(컄 page 217).
1 Vehicle tool kit
2 T-handle crank
3 Pipe key
왘 Open the trunk (컄 page 123).
왘 Take out vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 400).
왘 Open pouch.
왘 Pull both parts of T-handle crank 2
out of pipe key 3.
404
1 T-handle crank
2 Cover
왘 Join pieces of T-handle crank 1
together.
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** are discharged, the vehicle can only be locked
or unlocked using the mechanical key
(컄 page 401). It is recommended to have
the batteries replaced at an authorized
Maybach Studio.
Warning!
SmartKey/SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO**
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘 Pull battery compartment 2 out of
the housing in direction of arrow.
왘 Remove the mechanical key out of
the SmartKey/SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** (컄 page 401).
G
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
substances. Therefore keep the batteries
out of reach of children.
3 Battery
4 Contact spring
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
Batteries contain materials that can
harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the
preferred method of disposal. Many
states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
i When inserting the batteries, make sure
they are clean and free of lint.
i When replacing batteries, always replace
both batteries.
The required replacement batteries are available at any Maybach Studio.
왘 Remove the batteries 3.
왘 Using a lint-free cloth, insert new
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
왘 Insert mechanical key 1 in direction
of arrow in side opening.
왘 Using mechanical key 1, push the
gray slide to unlatch battery compartment 2.
batteries 3 under the contact
spring 4 with the plus (+) side facing
up.
왘 Return battery compartment 2 into
the housing until it locks into place.
왘 Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
SmartKey/SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** (컄 page 401).
왘 Check the operation of the SmartKey/
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**.
405
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling. It is
therefore essential that all bulbs and
lamp assemblies are in good working order at all times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. Have headlamps
checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced.
See an authorized Maybach Studio for
headlamp adjustment.
406
i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with the
lights on should clear up the fogging.
i Substitute bulbs will be brought into use
when the following lamps malfunction:
앫
Rear turn signal lamps
앫
Brake lamps
앫
Rear parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
Read and observe the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 393).
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
Rear lamps
Type
1 Additional turn
signal and side
marker lamp
LED
2 Turn signal lamp
SAE J573
2357 A
12.8 V-30CP
Lamp
9 High mounted
brake lamp
Type
LED
a License plate lamp C 5 W
3 Side marker lamp W 5 W
4 Low beam and
high beam lamp
(active headlamps)
Xenon1
D2S-35 W
5 Front fog lamp
H3 55 W
6 Corner-illuminating lamp
H3 55 W
7 Parking and
standing lamp
W 5 W Blue
b Brake lamp
Tail, parking and
standing lamp
LED
LED
Side marker lamp LED
Backup lamp
H 24 W
Rear fog lamp,
LED
(driver’s side only)
Turn signal lamp
LED
8 High beam flasher H7-55 W
1
Bi-Xenon headlamps: For safety reasons
(high voltage), do not replace the Xenon bulb
yourself. See an authorized Maybach Studio.
407
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Notes on bulb replacement
Warning!
G
Bulbs and bulb sockets can get very hot.
Allow the lamp to cool down before
changing a bulb.
앫
If the newly installed bulb does not
come on, contact an authorized
Maybach Studio.
앫
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first:
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Maybach Studio:
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 142).
앫
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas.
A bulb can explode if you
Additional turn signal lamp and
side marker lamp in the exterior
rear view mirrors
앫
Backup lamp
앫
touch or move it when hot
앫
Bi-Xenon lamp
앫
drop the bulb
앫
Fog lamps
앫
scratch the bulb
앫
Rear fog lamp
앫
High mounted brake lamp
앫
Brake lamp
앫
Rear side marker lamp
앫
Rear turn signal lamp
앫
Tail lamp
앫
Rear parking and standing lamp
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it
is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair
the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a
qualified technician.
앫
Use only 12-volt bulbs of the same
type and with the specified watt rating.
앫
Switch lights off before changing a
bulb to prevent short circuits.
앫
Always use a clean lint-free cloth
when handling bulbs.
앫
Your hands should be dry and free of
oil and grease.
408
! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You
could otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of
the vehicle. Only have the LEDs replaced by an
authorized Maybach Studio.
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 307) (except
for turn signal and side marker
lamps).
1 Housing cover for corner-illuminating lamp, high beam flasher bulb,
parking and standing lamp
2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
3 Bulb socket for side marker
4 Low beam and high beam (Bi-Xenon)
housing cover
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
High beam flasher bulbs
Corner-illuminating lamps
왘 Twist housing cover 1 (컄 page 408)
왘 Twist housing cover 1 (컄 page 408)
counterclockwise and pull out.
왘 Twist bulb socket 5 counterclock-
wise and pull out.
왘 Push bulb into socket, turn counter-
clockwise and remove.
왘 Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
twist clockwise.
5 Bulb socket for high beam flasher
bulb
6 Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp
7 Bulb socket for corner-illuminating
lamp
twist clockwise.
왘 Align housing cover 1 and twist
clockwise.
Parking and standing lamp bulb
왘 Twist housing cover 1 (컄 page 408)
Low beam and high beam bulbs
Warning!
왘 Reinsert bulb socket 5 in lamp and
counterclockwise and pull out.
G
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the
bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such
work done by a qualified technician.
counterclockwise and pull out.
왘 Press bulb holder for corner-illuminating lamp 7 (컄 page 409) upward
and to the left in direction of arrow.
왘 The bulb holder disengages.
왘 Remove bulb from lamp and pull
white cable out of black cable connector.
왘 Insert cable of new bulb into black ca-
ble connector.
왘 Insert new bulb into lamp and en-
gage bulb holder for corner-illuminating lamp 7 into position.
왘 Align housing cover 1 and twist
clockwise.
왘 Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb.
왘 Pull the bulb out of the bulb
socket 6.
왘 Insert a new bulb in the socket.
왘 Reinstall bulb socket 6.
왘 Align housing cover 1 and twist
clockwise.
409
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front turn signal and side marker lamp
bulb
왘 Turn the wheels so that the wheel at
the housing you need to work on is
turned inward.
This will provide easier access to the
lamp cover.
왘 Secure the vehicle from moving by
applying the parking brake and placing the gear selector lever in
position P.
왘 Make sure the engine and ignition
are turned off.
Warning!
G
왘 Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
twist clockwise.
왘 Reinsert bulb socket 3 in lamp and
Before reaching into the wheel housing,
make sure you have secured the vehicle
from moving by applying the parking
brake and placing the gear selector lever in
position P. Otherwise, the vehicle may
move unexpectedly. Unexpected vehicle
movement while you are working near the
wheel housing may cause serious personal
injury and/or an accident.
twist clockwise.
왘 Replace cover 8 (컄 page 410) and
turn it clockwise.
License plate lamp
Front turn signal bulb
왘 Twist bulb socket 2 (컄 page 408)
counterclockwise and pull out.
왘 Push bulb into socket, turn counter-
clockwise and remove.
왘 Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
twist clockwise.
왘 Reinsert bulb socket 2 in lamp and
twist clockwise.
왘 Replace cover 8 (컄 page 410) and
turn it clockwise.
8 Cover in the wheel housing trim
왘 Turn cover 8 counterclockwise and
remove cover.
Side marker lamp bulb
왘 Twist bulb socket 3 (컄 page 408)
counterclockwise and pull out.
왘 Push bulb into socket, turn counter-
clockwise and remove.
410
1 Screws
2 License plate lamp
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 142).
왘 Loosen both screws 1.
왘 Remove license plate lamp 2.
왘 Replace the bulb.
왘 Reinstall the license plate lamp 2.
왘 Retighten the screws 1.
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Replacing wiper blades
Warning!
! To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper
arms should only be folded forward when in
the vertical position.
Removing wiper blades
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1.
왘 Turn combination switch to wiper
setting II (컄 page 75).
G
they snap into place.
왘 Turn the wiper blade at a right angle
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: Make sure the
vehicle’s on board electronics have
status 0) before cleaning a wiper blades.
Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.
Warning!
to wiper arm.
G
Wiper blades are components that are subject to wear and tear. Change the wiper
blades twice a year, preferably in the
spring and fall. Otherwise the windows
will not be properly wiped. As a result, you
may not be able to observe surrounding
traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
1 Wiper arm vertical
왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until
왘 Slide the wiper blade 2 sideways out
of retainer.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
They could tear.
왘 With wiper arm in vertical
position 1, turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 0.
411
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Installing wiper blades
왘 Slide the wiper blade into the cutout
on the wiper arm.
왘 Rotate the wiper blade into position
parallel to wiper arm.
왘 Fold the wiper arm back so that blade
rests on windshield. Make sure you
hold on to the wiper when folding
the wiper arm back.
! Never open the hood when the wiper arm
is folded forward.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the impact
from the tensioning spring could crack the
windshield.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the
windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted.
Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper
blades may cause windshield damage.
For your convenience, you should have this
work carried out by an authorized Maybach
Studio.
412
Practical hints
Flat tire
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
왘 Park the vehicle in a safe distance
from moving traffic on a hard, flat
surface when possible.
왘 Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
왘 Turn the steering wheel so that the
front wheels are in a straight ahead
position.
왘 Set the parking brake.
i Open the door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
왘 Have any passenger exit the vehicle
at a safe distance from the roadway.
Mounting the spare wheel
The spare wheel rim is mounted with a
full-sized tire of the same type as on the
vehicle, and it is fully functional.
왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 78).
앫
it is not more than 6 years old
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the start-
앫
rim and tire are the same model as
the regular wheels
Vehicles with SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO**:
왘 Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO** button on the gear selector lever once (컄 page 79).
왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts the
starter switch in position 0, same as
with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch). The driver’s door then
can be closed again.
Warning!
왘 Remove the spare wheel.
왘 Place spare wheel in wheel well and
Spare wheel
Vehicles with SmartKey:
er switch.
왘 Turn the luggage bowl counterclockwise (컄 page 400).
Storing the spare wheel
When you replace the vehicle’s tires, you
can use the spare wheel as a regular
wheel if:
왘 Move the gear selector lever to P.
Removing the spare wheel
secure it with luggage bowl.
왘 Turn the luggage bowl clockwise to
its stop.
Preparing the vehicle
왘 Take vehicle tool kit tray and vehicle
jack out of trunk.
왘 Take the spare wheel out of wheel
well.
G
If the spare tire is more than 6 years old or
is not the same model as the regular tires,
have the spare tire replaced with a new
tire at the nearest Maybach Studio.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare tire.
For more information on spare wheel,
see “Technical data” (컄 page 436).
413
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lifting the vehicle
Always try lifting the vehicle using
the jack on a level surface. However,
should circumstances require you to
do so on a hill, place the wheel chock
and the other sizeable, heavy object
as follows:
왘 Place wheel chock 1 and another
sizeable suitable object on the
downhill side blocking both
wheels of the axle not being
worked on.
왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel
chock 1 and another sizable suitable
objects.
When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘 Place wheel chock 1 in front of
414
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack support tube
hole built into the vehicle. To help avoid
personal injury, use the jack only to lift the
vehicle during a wheel change. Never get
beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away
from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block
wheels before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
especially on hills. Always try to use the
jack on level surface. Make sure the jack
arm is fully seated in the jack support tube
hole. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working
under the vehicle.
1 Wheel chock
and another sizeable suitable object behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel
being changed.
Warning!
왘 On wheel to be changed, loosen but
2 Two-piece wheel wrench
왘 Take the two-piece wheel wrench 2
out of the vehicle tool kit tray. Assemble wheel wrench.
do not yet remove the wheel bolts
(approximately one full turn with
wrench).
The tube openings are located directly
behind the front wheel housings and in
front of the rear wheel housings.
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘 Crank ratchet 5 up and down until
the tire is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm)
off the ground.
Warning!
G
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
suited for performing maintenance work
under the vehicle.
3 Jack
4 Jack support tube hole
5 Ratchet
Warning!
ment bolt 6 supplied in the tool kit.
왘 Remove the remaining bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt and
wheel hub threads.
왘 Remove the wheel.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised.
Mounting the new wheel
앫
Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
Removing the wheel
G
against hub and hold it there while installing
first wheel bolt.
Warning!
Insert the jack arm fully into the jack support tube hole up to the stop. Otherwise
the vehicle may fall off the jack and cause
personal injury or damage to the vehicle.
G
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact
an authorized Maybach Studio or call
컄컄
Roadside Assistance.
왘 Take ratchet 5 out of vehicle tool
kit.
왘 Place ratchet 5 on jack 3 so that
you can see the letters UP.
remove.
왘 Replace this wheel bolt with align-
앫
왘 Insert jack 3 fully into tube hole 4
up to the stop.
왘 Unscrew uppermost wheel bolt and
6 Alignment bolt
415
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly
tightened mounting bolts can cause the
wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Make sure you are using the correct
mounting bolts.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle
could fall off the jack.
Lowering the vehicle
왘 Place ratchet on jack so that you can
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque
of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
see the letters DOWN.
왘 Lower vehicle by cranking ratchet up
and down until vehicle is resting fully
on its own weight.
왘 Remove the jack.
왘 Before storing the jack in the trunk, it
should be fully collapsed, with handle
folded in.
왘 Place the wheel bolt wrench, chock,
alignment bolt and jack back in the
trunk.
Replacing jack support tube cover
왘 Slide tongue of cover under the up-
per edge of the tube opening.
왘 Guide the spare wheel onto the
alignment bolt and push it on.
왘 Applying even pressure, press cover
until it snaps into place. Be careful
not to damage the locking tabs or
clamp the plastic retaining strap.
왘 Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
왘 Unscrew the alignment bolt, install
last wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
Warning!
G
Use only Genuine equipment Maybach
wheel bolts. Other wheel bolts may come
loose.
416
1-5
Wheel bolts
왘 Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,
following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are
tight. Observe a tightening torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
! You can also secure the damaged wheel
down into the spare wheel well in the trunk.
Do not activate the tire inflation pressure
monitor (컄 page 321) until the depressurized
tire is no longer in the vehicle.
Practical hints
Batteries
Batteries
Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:
앫
The starter battery (located in the engine compartment)
앫
The battery for electrical consumers
(located in the trunk)
These batteries should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve their
rated service life. Refer to Maintenance
Booklet for battery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for shortdistance trips, you will need to have the
battery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing batteries, always use
batteries approved by us for use on
Maybach vehicles.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time,
consult an authorized Maybach Studio
about steps you need to observe.
G
Warning!
Keep children away.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking
are prohibited when handling
batteries. Avoid creating
sparks.
Follow the instructions in this
Operator’s Manual.
Batteries contain materials that can
harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the
preferred method of disposal. Many
states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
Battery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
Wear suitable protective
clothing, especially gloves,
apron and faceguard.
Wear eye protection.
Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact
a physician if necessary.
1 Negative terminal
2 Starter battery
3 Cover over positive terminal
417
Practical hints
Batteries
As with any other battery, disconnect the consumer battery if you do not intend to operate
your vehicle for an extended period of time to
prevent battery discharge or connect an accessory battery charge unit expressly approved
by us for use on Maybach vehicles to maintain
the battery charge. Contact an authorized
Maybach Studio for further information.
Warning!
4 Cover over positive terminal
5 Battery for electrical consumers
6 Negative terminal
! The consumer battery located in the trunk
is a valve-regulated lead acid (VRLA) battery,
also referred to as “fleece” battery. Such batteries do not require topping-up of the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries therefore do not
have cell caps and the battery cover is non-removable. Do not attempt to open the consumer battery as otherwise the battery will be
damaged.
Even though VRLA batteries do not require
topping-up of the electrolyte level and cannot
be opened to check the electrolyte level, the
battery condition must be checked periodically by performing a battery conductance test.
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery condition testing intervals.
418
G
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal
clamps while the engine is running or the
SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise
the alternator and other electronic components could be severely damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Maybach Studio.
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact an authorized
Maybach Studio for further information.
G
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.
Warning!
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 417).
Do not place metal objects on the battery
as this could result in a short circuit.
Never lean over batteries while connecting, you might get injured.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the
risk of acid burns in the event of an accident.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with
eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water
and seek medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Practical hints
Batteries
Warning!
G
The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake
system operation and switch it into its
emergency operation mode. The same applies if battery is disconnected. To brake,
the driver must then apply significantly
greater brake pedal pressure and depress
the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply
full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are
only applied to the front wheels. Stopping
distance is increased! Adjust your driving
style accordingly. For more information,
refer to “Electro-hydraulic brake system”
(컄 page 107).
Disconnecting the batteries
! Always disconnect the batteries in the order described below, even if you only want to
charge the starter battery, for example. Otherwise, the vehicle’s electronics could be damaged.
i Using the Maybach battery charger*
(컄 page 267), it is only possible to charge or
maintain the existing charge in the battery for
electrical consumers, not the starter battery.
왘 Depress parking brake firmly and
move gear selector lever to
position P.
왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 78).
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘 Remove SmartKey from starter
switch.
왘 In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: Open
Warning!
G
With a disconnected battery
앫
앫
you will no longer be able to turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch and
pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop
button (컄 page 61) on the gear selector lever will have no effect
the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P
the driver‘s door.
왘 Open the trunk (컄 page 123).
왘 Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions (컄 page 417).
왘 Remove trunk floor from right hand
side of the trunk.
The consumer battery is located in
the trunk on the right hand side.
왘 Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions (컄 page 417).
왘 Disconnect negative terminal from
consumer battery.
왘 Open hood.
The starter battery is located in the
engine compartment on the passenger side.
왘 Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions (컄 page 417).
왘 Disconnect negative terminal of start-
er battery.
왘 Remove cover from positive terminal.
왘 Disconnect the positive lead of con-
sumer battery and of the starter battery.
Removing the batteries
Removing the consumer battery
왘 Loosen the screws that hold the con-
sumer battery in the trunk in place.
왘 Remove battery’s support and
bracket.
왘 Pull out the battery ventilation tube
from the battery (depending on battery arrangement in your vehicle
model, the ventilation tube is located
either on the left or right side of the
battery).
왘 Take battery out of trunk.
419
Practical hints
Batteries
Removing the starter battery
왘 Loosen the screw that holds the start-
er battery in the engine compartment in place.
왘 Pull out the battery ventilation tube
from the battery (depending on battery arrangement in your vehicle
model, the ventilation tube is located
either on the left or right side of the
battery).
왘 Swing the bar up and remove bat-
tery.
er battery and of the starter battery
and fasten covers.
왘 Connect negative lead of the starter
battery in the engine compartment.
왘 Charge batteries in accordance with
the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer.
왘 Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
the previously described steps in reverse order.
! The batteries, their filler caps and the venReconnecting the batteries
G
Never charge a battery while still installed
in the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit* approved by us for use on
Maybach vehicles is being used. Gases may
escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
An accessory battery charge unit* specially
adapted for Maybach vehicles and tested
and approved by us is available, permitting
the charging of the battery for electrical
consumers in its installed in its installed position. Contact an authorized
420
왘 Connect positive lead of the consum-
왘 Connect negative lead of the con-
sumer battery in the trunk.
! Never invert the terminal connections.
왘 Reinstall carpet on the right hand
side of the trunk.
왘 Have a Maybach Studio check engine
control units for error messages and
have them erased.
tilation tubes must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation.
Charging and reinstalling
the batteries
Warning!
Maybach Studio for information and availability. Charge battery in accordance with
the separate instructions for the Maybach
battery charger*.
! Always connect the batteries in the order
i The following procedures must be carried
out following any interruption of consumer
battery power (e.g. due to reconnecting):
앫
Set the clock. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers.
앫
Synchronize the ESP® (컄 page 368).
왘 Install starter battery in the designat-
앫
Synchronize side windows (컄 page 210).
ed location in the engine compartment.
앫
Synchronize tilt/sliding sunroof
(컄 page 213) or (컄 page 217).
described below. Otherwise, the vehicle’s
electronics could be damaged.
왘 Install consumer battery in the desig-
nated location in the trunk.
왘 Attach supports and brackets and
tighten screws.
Batteries contain materials that can
harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Large 12-volt storage batteries
contain lead. Recycling of batteries is the
preferred method of disposal. Many
states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
Practical hints
Jump starting
Jump starting
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
If the starter battery is discharged, the
engine can be started with jumper cables
and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:
앫
앫
Do not start the engine if the battery
is frozen. Let the battery thaw out
first.
앫
Only jump start from batteries with
the same voltage rating (12 V). Jump
starting with a higher voltage battery
could damage the vehicle‘s electrical
system, which will not be covered by
the Maybach Limited Warranty.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with
eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water,
and seek medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive.
Keep flames or sparks away from battery,
avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
앫
Use only jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
앫
Always make sure the jumper cables
are not on or near pulleys, fans or
other parts that move when an engine is started or running.
! Jump starting should only be performed
on the starter battery installed in the engine
compartment.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a
battery quick charge unit.
If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it checked at the
nearest authorized Maybach Studio.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the
catalytic converter and may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any
other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery.
Warning!
G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 417).
421
Practical hints
Jump starting
왘 Start engine of the vehicle with the
Jump starting should only be performed
on the starter battery. The starter battery
is located in the engine compartment on
the passenger side.
charged battery and run at idle
speed.
왘 Connect negative terminal 1 of the
왘 Make sure the two vehicles do not
charged battery with negative
terminal 3 of the discharged battery
with the jumper cable. Clamp cable
to charged battery 1 first.
touch.
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers, ex-
cept hazard warning flashers or work
lights.
왘 Start the engine of the disabled vehi-
cle.
왘 Apply parking brake.
왘 Shift gear selector lever to position P.
왘 Open hood (컄 page 307).
1 Negative terminal of charged battery
2 Positive terminal of charged battery
3 Negative terminal of discharged battery
4 Positive terminal of discharged battery
왘 Connect positive terminal 2 of the
charged battery with positive
terminal 4 of the discharged battery
with the jumper cable. Clamp cable
to charged battery 2 first.
! Never invert the terminal connections.
422
Now you can again turn on the electrical
consumers. Do not turn on the lights under any circumstances.
왘 Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 3 and 1 and
then from positive terminals 4
and 2.
You can now turn on the lights.
왘 Have the starter battery checked at
the nearest authorized Maybach
Studio.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
We recommend that Maybach vehicles
be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate
wheel lift/dolly equipment.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment
with SmartKey in starter switch turned to
position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with sling-type equipment over bumpy
roads will damage radiator and supports.
To prevent damage during transport, do not
tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension
parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm (컄 page 111)
and the automatic central locking
(컄 page 176).
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on
the ground or front wheels raised only so
far as necessary to have the vehicle
moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed.
Warning!
G
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫
the engine will not run
앫
there is a malfunction in the electrohydraulic brake system
앫
there is a malfunction in the power
supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
as that will be necessary to adequately
control the towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, make sure the SmartKey is
in starter switch position 2.
Warning!
G
The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake
system operation and switch it into its
emergency operation mode. To brake, the
driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the
pedal much further to obtain the expected
braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal.
Brakes are only applied to the front
wheels. Stopping distance is increased!
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
For more information, refer to “Electro-hydraulic brake system” (컄 page 107).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering system. In this case, it is important to
keep in mind that a considerably higher
degree of effort is necessary to brake and
steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
423
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
! If the vehicle is towed with the front axle
raised, the gear selector lever must be in
position N and the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1).
Active braking action through the ESP® may
otherwise seriously damage the brake system.
i To signal turns while being towed with
the hazard warning flasher in use, switch on
the ignition and activate the combination
switch for the left or right turn signal in the
usual manner – only the selected turn signal
will operate.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, the gear selector lever must be in
position N and the SmartKey must be in starter switch position 2.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard
warning flasher will operate again.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground or the front axle raised, the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to
30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed
30 mph (50 km/h).
! Towing of the vehicle should only be
Installing towing eye bolt
i The gear selector lever will remain locked
in position P and the SmartKey will not turn in
the starter switch if the battery is disconnected or discharged. For more information,
see “Batteries” (컄 page 417) or “Jump starting” (컄 page 421).
1 Cover on right side of front bumper
done using the properly installed towing eye
bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow rope or
tow rod to the vehicle chassis, frame or
suspension parts.
i When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, please note the following:
With the automatic central locking activated
and the SmartKey in starter switch position 2,
or KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button
(컄 page 61) in position 2, the vehicle doors
lock if the left front wheel as well as the right
rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from
locking, deactivate the automatic central
locking (컄 page 176).
424
1 Cover on right side of rear bumper
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Removing cover
Removing towing eye bolt
왘 Pry off cover 1 using lower recess.
왘 Loosen towing eye bolt counterclock-
왘 Lift cover off to reveal the threaded
hole for towing eye bolt.
Installing towing eye bolt
왘 Take towing eye bolt and wheel
wrench out of the vehicle tool kit in
the trunk (컄 page 400).
왘 Screw towing eye bolt clockwise into
wise with wheel wrench.
왘 Unscrew towing eye bolt.
왘 Store towing eye bolt and wheel
wrench in the vehicle tool kit in the
trunk.
Installing cover
왘 Fit cover 1 and snap into place.
its stop and tighten with wheel
wrench.
425
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve
to switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
If a fuse is blown, the component(s) and
systems secured by that fuse will stop operating.
The following aids are available to help
you replace fuses (컄 page 426):
앫
Fuse chart
앫
Spare fuses
앫
Fuse extractor
i Blown fuses must be replaced by like fuses
(recognizable by the color and amperage)
with the amperage recommended in the fuse
allocation chart. A Maybach Studio will be
happy to advise you.
Warning!
G
Only use fuses approved by us for use on
Maybach vehicles and which have the specified amperage for the system in question.
Using other fuses may cause an overload
and lead to a fire, or cause damage to electrical components and/or systems.
! Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown
fuse. Have the cause determined and remedied by an authorized Maybach Studio.
426
! Keep the fuse boxes free by contamination and wetness. Otherwise, electrical parts
or systems could be damaged.
Your vehicle’s electrical fuses are located
in various fuse boxes:
Fuse extractor
The fuse extractor is located in the vehicle tool kit in the trunk (컄 page 400).
Replacing fuses
Before you start to replace fuses, do the
following first:
앫
In the engine compartment on the
driver’s side (컄 page 427)
앫
In the engine compartment on the
passenger side in front of the firewall
(dividing wall between engine compartment and passenger compartment) (컄 page 427)
왘 Park the vehicle.
앫
In the dashboard on the
passenger-side (컄 page 427)
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the start-
앫
In the trunk on the driver’s side
(컄 page 428)
Vehicles with SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO**:
Aids for replacing fuses
Fuse chart
The fuse chart is located in the vehicle
tool kit in the trunk (컄 page 400). The
amperages of the fuses are also given
there.
Spare Fuses
Spare Fuses are located in the vehicle
tool kit in the trunk (컄 page 400).
왘 Switch off all electrical consumers.
Vehicles with SmartKey:
왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 78).
er switch.
왘 Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO** button on the gear selector lever once (컄 page 79).
왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts the
starter switch in position 0, same as
with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch). The driver’s door then
can be closed again.
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse boxes in engine compartment
Opening
Opening
왘 Take crank out of vehicle document
왘 Open the passenger door.
pouch.
왘 Loosen retaining screws with crank.
왘 Remove cover from fuse box.
Closing
왘 Re-attach cover to fuse box.
왘 Make sure the cover fits correctly.
왘 Tighten retaining screws with crank.
1 Fuse box cover, driver’s side
Fuse box in passenger compartment
왘 Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into
the edge of the cover 1 at the position indicated by the arrow.
왘 Loosen cover 1 from dashboard
using lever.
왘 Using your hands, pull cover 1 out
and remove.
Closing
왘 Hook cover 1 into the opening at
the front.
왘 Press cover 1 back on until it engag-
es.
2 Fuse box cover, passenger-side
1 Cover
! Do not use sharp objects such as a screw
driver to open the fuse box cover 1 in the
dashboard, as this could damage it.
427
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in the trunk
Opening
왘 Turn locking knob 1 90°.
왘 Pull trim panel 2 upward and
remove it.
Closing
왘 Attach trim panel 2 into the
opening at the top.
왘 Turn locking knob 1 90°.
1 Locking knob
2 Trim panel
428
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions and weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
429
Technical data
Parts service
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides
the necessary technical data for your vehicle.
All authorized Maybach Studios maintain a stock of Genuine Maybach Parts
required for maintenance and repair
work. In addition, strategically located
parts distribution centers provide quick
and reliable parts service.
Genuine Maybach Parts are subjected to
stringent quality inspections. Each part
has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to
Maybach vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Maybach Parts
should be installed.
430
! The use of non-Genuine Maybach Parts
and accessories not authorized by us for use
on Maybach vehicles could damage the vehicle, which is not covered by the Maybach
Limited Warranty, or could compromise the
vehicle’s durability or safety.
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms
of the warranties printed in the Service
and Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Maybach Studio will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following warranties:
앫
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts,
New York, and Vermont Emission
Control Systems Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Maybach Parts and Accessories warranties, copies of which are
available at any Maybach Studio.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and
Warranty Information booklet, have an
authorized Maybach Studio arrange for
a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
431
Technical data
Identification labels
Identification labels
1 Certification label (on driver’s
B-pillar)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
can be found in the following locations:
앫
on the certification label
앫
embossed under a cover in the trunk
앫
lower edge of windshield
432
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)
Example certification label (Canada vehicles)
2 VIN
3 Paintwork code
2 VIN
3 Paintwork code
i Data shown on certification label are for
illustration purposes only. These data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the illustration. Refer to
certification label on vehicle for actual data
specific to your vehicle.
Technical data
Identification labels
4 VIN
5 Engine number (engraved on engine)
6 VIN (lower edge of windshield)
7 Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission standards
Vacuum line routing diagram label
i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers.
433
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley
8 Air conditioning compressor
9 Idler pulley
a Idler pulley
b Idler pulley
434
Technical data
Engine
Engine
Model
Maybach 57 (240.078) 1
Maybach 62 (240.178) 1
Maybach 57 S (240.079) 1
Maybach 62 S (240.179) 1
Engine
285
285
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
12
12
Bore
3.23 in (82.00 mm)
3.25 in (82.60 mm)
Stroke
3.43 in (87.00 mm)
3.66 in (93.00 mm)
Total piston displacement
336.4 cu in (5513 cm3)
364.9 cu in (5980 cm3)
Compression ratio
9:1
9:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349
1
2
543 hp/5250
rpm 2
604 hp/4800-5100 rpm 2
(405 kW/5250 rpm)
(450 kW/4800-5100 rpm)
664 lb-ft/2300–3000 rpm
738 lb-ft/2000–4000 rpm
(900 Nm/2300–3000 rpm)
(1000 Nm/2000–4000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
5950 rpm
6100 rpm
Firing order
1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9
1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9
Poly-V-belt
2713 mm
2713 mm
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Maybach Studio for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
435
Technical data
Rims and tires
Rims and tires
! Only use tires which have been and tested
and approved for your vehicle by us for use on
Maybach vehicles. Tires approved by us for use
on Maybach vehicles are developed to provide
best possible performance in conjunction with
the driving safety systems on your vehicle such
as ABS or ESP®. Tires specially developed for
your vehicle and tested and approved by us
for use on Maybach vehicles can be identified
by finding the following on the tire’s sidewall:
앫
MO = Maybach Original equipment tires
Using tires other than those approved by us
for use on Maybach vehicles may result in
damage that is not covered by the Maybach
Limited Warranty.
436
! Using tires other than those approved by
us for use on Maybach vehicles can have detrimental effects, such as
앫
poor handling characteristics
앫
increased noise
앫
increased fuel consumption
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by us
for use on Maybach vehicles may, under load,
exhibit dimensional variations and different
tire deformation characteristics that could
cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the tires
or the vehicle may be the result.
i Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized Maybach Studio.
A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar (컄 page 315). Some vehicles may have
supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds (컄 page 320) or
for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition (컄 page 329). If such information is provided, it can be found on the
placard located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap. The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be adjusted
on cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle.
i The following pages also list the
approved wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicles with winter tires. Winter
tires are not available as standard or optional
factory-equipment, but can be purchased
from an authorized Maybach Studio.
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
Model
Maybach 57
Maybach 62
Maybach 57 S
Maybach 62 S
Rims (light alloy)
8 J x 19
8.5 J x 20
Wheel offset
2.64 in (67 mm)
2.64 in (67 mm)
275/50 R19 112W XL (Extra Load)
275/45 R20 110Y XL (Extra Load)
Rims (light alloy)
8 J x 19
8 J x 19
Wheel offset
2.64 in (67 mm)
2.64 in (67 mm)
275/50 R19 112H XL (Extra Load) M+S.
275/50 R19 112H XL (Extra Load) M+S.
Model
Maybach 57
Maybach 62
Maybach 57 S
Maybach 62 S
Rim (light alloy)
8 J x 19
8.5 J x 20
Wheel offset
2.64 in (67 mm)
2.64 in (67 mm)
275/50 R19 112W XL (Extra Load)
275/45 R20 110Y XL (Extra Load)
Summer
Winter
1
2
tires1
tires1,2
Radial-ply tires
Not available as factory equipment.
Spare wheel
Summer
1
tire1
Radial-ply tire
437
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Generator (alternator)
14 V/350 A
Starter motor
12 V/1.8 kW
Starter battery
12 V/40 Ah
Electrical consumer battery
12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs
NGK IFR 6 Q-G
Electrode gap
0.028 in (0.7 mm)
Tightening torque
15–22 lb-ft (20–30 Nm)
438
Technical data
Main dimensions and weights
Main dimensions and weights
Main dimensions
Model
Maybach 57
Maybach 57 S
Maybach 62
Maybach 62 S
Overall vehicle length
225.5 in (5728 mm)
225.5 in (5728 mm)
242.7 in (6165 mm)
Overall vehicle width (exterior rear
view mirrors folded out)
84.0 in (2134 mm)
84.0 in (2134 mm)
84.0 in (2134 mm)
Overall vehicle height
61.9 in (1572 mm)
61.3 in (1557 mm)
61.9 in (1573 mm)
Wheelbase
133.5 in (3390 mm)
133.5 in (3390 mm)
150.7 in (3827 mm)
Track, front
65.9 in (1675 mm)
65.9 in (1675 mm)
65.9 in (1675 mm)
Track, rear
66.7 in (1695 mm)
66.7 in (1695 mm)
66.7 in (1695 mm)
Weights
Roof load maximum
no roof load
Trunk load maximum
220 lb (100 kg)
! To avoid potential damage to the roof,
solar panel* or electrotransparent roof*, roof
rails and any roof-mounted devices must not
be used.
439
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Warning!
Capacities
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore use
only products and approved by us.
Please refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or
inquire at your Maybach Studio.
G
If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
physician immediately.
Comply with all valid regulations with
respect to handling, storing and disposing
of service fluids. Otherwise you could
endanger persons or the environment.
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
children.
For health reasons, you should prevent
service fluids from coming into direct
contact with your skin or clothing.
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine with oil filter
Model
10.5 US qt (10.0 l)
Approved engine oils
Automatic transmission
7.9 US qt (7.5 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear axle
2.1 US qt (2.0 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Power steering
approx. 1.45 (1.65 l)
MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)
Front wheel hubs
approx. 0.35 oz (10 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Cooling system
approx. 18 US qt (17.0 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Maybach 57
Maybach 62
approx. 2.3 US qt (2.2 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Maybach 57 S
Maybach 62 S
approx. 2.59 US qt (2.45 l)
Low temperature cooling system
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
440
29.1 US gal (110.0 l)
3.7 US qt (14.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Minimum Posted Octane 91
(average of 96 RON/86 MON)
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Model
Capacity
Air conditioning system
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system
1
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant
oil (never R-12)
7.1 US qt (6.7 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate 1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing
ratios (컄 page 446).
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for
their suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals. Therefore,
only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS
(Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to
the Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet (USA only), or contact an
authorized Maybach Studio.
! Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for
the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS
(Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil
filter at change intervals longer than those
called for by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) will result in
engine or emission control system damage
not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System
(U.S vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure
to do so will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
Engine oil additives
! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system.
! Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the system
will occur.
Brake fluid
Warning!
G
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere.
Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to
the formation of bubbles in the system,
thus reducing the system’s efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s
Maintenance Booklet for replacement
interval.
Only brake fluid approved by us for use
on Maybach vehicles is recommended.
Your authorized Maybach Studio will
provide you with additional information.
441
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Premium unleaded gasoline
Warning!
G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury.
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin or clothing contact, extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors can damage your
health.
! To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gasoline
must be used. If premium unleaded gasoline is
not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:
앫
Have the fuel tank only partially filled
with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up
with premium unleaded gasoline as soon
as possible.
앫
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.
앫
Do not exceed an engine speed of
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a
light load such as two persons and no luggage.
앫
Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator
pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded
or operating in mountainous terrain.
Fuel requirements
Only use premium unleaded fuel
앫
The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average of both the Research Octane
Number (RON) and the Motor Octane
Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This
is also known as the ANTI-KNOCK
INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA
can be used provided the ratio of any
one of these oxygenates to gasoline does
not exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed
15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must
not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol
is not allowed. Gasohol, which contains
10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used.
These blends must also meet all other
fuel requirements, such as resistance to
spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
442
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by
gasoline. We recommend only the use of
quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake
valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems
such as:
앫
Warm-up hesitation
앫
Unstable idle
앫
Knocking/pinging
앫
Misfire
앫
Power loss
In areas where carbon deposits may be
encountered due to lack of availability of
gasolines which contain these additives,
we recommend only the use of additives
approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Refer to Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact
an authorized Maybach Studio for a listing of approved product(s). Follow directions on product label.
Do not blend other fuel additives with
fuel. This only results in unnecessary cost
and may be harmful to the engine operation.
! Damage or malfunction resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending additional
fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles are
not covered by the Maybach Limited
Warranty.
For a listing of approved products, refer to the
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet
(USA only) or contact an authorized Maybach
Studio.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
앫
Corrosion protection
앫
Freeze protection
앫
Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately -35°F (-37°C)
and corrosion protection.
! Add premixed coolant solution only.
Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/
Antifreeze separately from each other, could
cause engine damage not covered by the
Maybach Limited Warranty.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-35°F (-37°C), the boiling point of the
coolant in the pressurized cooling system
is reached at approximately 266°F
(130°C).
The coolant solution must be used year
round to provide the necessary corrosion
protection and increase in the boil-over
protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval.
443
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Coolant system design and coolant used
determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
solution or other products approved by
us for use on Maybach vehicles of equal
specification are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to
the proper level.
For information on other products
approved by us for use on Maybach
vehicles of equal specification, refer to
the Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet (USA only) or contact an
authorized Maybach Studio.
444
To provide important corrosion protection, the solution must be at least 50%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to
freeze protection to approximately -35°F
[-37°C]). If you use a solution that is more
than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze
(freeze protection to approximately
–49°F [–45°C]), the engine temperature
will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore,
do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
should be used to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for
signs of leakage). Please make sure the
mixture is in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must
meet minimum requirements, which are
usually satisfied by normal drinking water. If you are not sure about the water
quality, consult an authorized Maybach
Studio.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such engines be
specifically formulated to protect the
aluminum parts. Failure to use such
anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service
life.
Therefore, the following product is
strongly recommended for use in your
vehicle: MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/
Antifreeze agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is
also regularly checked each time you
bring your vehicle to an authorized
Maybach Studio for service.
The anticorrosion/antifreeze quantities
listed in the table below are in relation
to total filling capacity.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Approx. freeze protection
All models (main cooling system)
-35°F (-37°C)
-49°F (-45°C)
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
9.9 US qt (9.4 l)
Maybach 57, Maybach 62 (low temperature cooling system) 1.16 US qt (1.1 l)
1.27 US qt (1.2 l)
Maybach 57 S, Maybach 62 S (low temperature cooling
system)
1.37 US qt (1.3 l)
1.27 US qt (1.2 l)
445
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system
Both the windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system are supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir.
The windshield washer reservoir has a capacity of approximately 7.1 US qt (6.7 l).
왘 Refill the reservoir with
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
and water (or concentrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze,
depending on ambient temperatures).
Warning!
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing point,
use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” and water:
앫
(1.34 floz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gal [4.0 l] water)
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
water
For temperatures below freezing point,
use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
앫
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
solvent
(1.34 floz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gal [4.0 l] solvent)
446
Index
A
ABS
Indicator lamp 23, 103, 356
Messages in display 365
ABS/ESP®
Warning lamp 354
Accelerator position, automatic
transmission 181
Accessory weight 333
Accident 76
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps see Headlamps
Adaptive Damping System see ADS
Additional turn signals 407
ADS 233
Air cleaner see Air filter
Air conditioning refrigerant 441
Air conditioning system see Automatic
climate control
Air conditioning, Cooling 200, 208
Air distribution 195, 207
Air filter
Message in display 366
Air pressure 333
Air recirculation mode 196
Air vents 192, 201, 203
Air volume 195, 207
Airbags 83
Children 84
Front, Driver 86
Front, Passenger 86
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp 362
Safety guidelines 85
Side impact 87
Window curtain 87
Airmatic DC 233
Messages in display 376
Setting vehicle level 234
Suspension tuning 233
Alarm system see Anti-theft alarm system
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 400,
415
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 440, 443, 445
Antiglare, Rear view mirrors 186
Antilock Brake System see ABS
Anti-theft alarm systems 110
Immobilizer 110
Indicator lamp 110
Tow-away alarm 111
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
Armrest 255
Ashtrays 260
Aspect ratio 333
Audio menu 162
Auto-dimming, Rear view mirrors 186
Automatic central locking 129
Activating/deactivating, Control
system 176
Automatic climate control 191
Air conditioning refrigerant 441
Air conditioning, Cooling 200, 208
Air distribution 195, 207
Air recirculation mode 196
Air vents 192, 201, 203
Air volume 195, 207
Charcoal filter 198
Control panel, Front 193
Control panel, Rear 206
Front defroster 195
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 196
Overview of front passenger
compartment 192
Overview of rear passenger compartment
Maybach 57 202
Maybach 62 204
Rear window defroster 190
Residual engine heat and
ventilation 200
Setting the temperature 195, 207
Automatic headlamp mode 143
Automatic lighting control, Interior
lighting 148
Automatic locking when driving 129
Automatic shift program 183
447
Index
Automatic transmission 178
Accelerator position 181
Automatic shift program 183
Emergency operation (Limp-Home
Mode) 185
Gear ranges 182
Gear selector lever 178
Gear selector lever position 70, 179
Gear selector lever positions 180
Gear shifting malfunctions 185
Kickdown 181
One-touch gearshifting 184
Program mode selector switch 26, 27,
183
Shifting procedure 179
Transmission fluid level 310
Warning sounds (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO**) 79
AUX sockets 255, 256
B
Backrest
Multicontour seats 136
Power seats 63, 132, 133, 135
Backrest supports
Lumbar region 137
Shoulder region 137
Backup lamps
Replacing bulbs 407
Bar 333
BAS 104
448
Batteries, SmartKey
Checking battery condition 116
Replacing 405
Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
Checking battery condition 121
Replacing 405
Batteries, vehicle 417
Charge socket (Battery for electrical
consumers) 267
Charging 420
Disconnecting 419
For electrical consumers 417
For starter 417
Jump starting 421
Reconnecting 420
Reinstalling 420
Removing 419
Bead 333
Beverage holder see Cup holder
Bi-Xenon see Headlamps
Bottle holder 259
Brake Assist System see BAS
Brake fluid 441
Brake warning lamp 360
Checking 306
Message in display 381
Brake lamp
High mounted 407
Messages in display 393
Replacing bulbs 407
Brake pads
Message in display 382
Brake warning lamp 23, 360
Brakes 298
Warning lamp 360
Break-in the vehicle 296
Bulbs, replacing see Replacing bulbs
C
California retail buyers and lessees, important notice for 11
Can holder see Cup holder
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants 440
Cargo area see Trunk
Cargo tie-down hooks 247
Carpet, Cleaning and care of 349
Catalytic converter 303
CD changer
Compartment for 255, 256
Central locking
Automatic 176
Locking/unlocking from inside 129
Central locking/unlocking
switches 129, 130
Certification label 432
Champagne flute holder 259
Setting down champagne flutes 260
Charcoal filter 198
Index
Children in the vehicle 95
Airbags 84
Blocking of rear window
operation 100
Infant and child restraint systems 96
LATCH-type child seat anchors 99
Override switch 100
Tether attachment points 98
Cigarette lighter 262
Clock 156
In the rear 31, 33, 35, 37
Instrument cluster 23
See separate operating instructions
Cloth upholstery, Cleaning and care
of 349
COMAND see separate operating instructions
Combination switch 74, 145
Control system 157
Control system menus
Audio menu 162
Distronic** menu 167
Navigation menu 166
Settings 170
Standard display 162
Telephone 164
Trip computer 167
Vehicle status message memory 169
Control system submenus
Convenience 177
Instrument cluster 172
Lighting 172
Vehicle
Convenience submenu
Setting automatic locking 176
Coolant 310, 443
Adding 311
Anticorrosion/antifreeze mixing ratio
and quantity 445
Capacities 440, 445
Checking coolant level 310
Messages in display 383, 384
Temperature 304
Temperature gauge 23, 155
Warning lamp 384
Cornering lamp
Messages in display 392
Replacing bulbs 407, 409
Courtesy lighting 153
Cruise control 221
Cruise control lever 227
Cup holder 25, 258
Rear
Cleaning 349
Curb weight 333
Curtains
Partition curtain* 273
Rear side windows* 269
Rear window 267
Delayed switch-off
Exterior lamps 174
Interior lighting 175
Department of Transportation see DOT
Difficulties
While driving 76
While starting 71
Digital clock see Clock
Digital speedometer 162
Dimensions, Vehicle 439
Direction of rotation, Tires 315
Displays
Digital speedometer 162
Maintenance service indicator 339
Messages in display 365
Multifunction display 157
Outside temperature 23, 155
Showing malfunctions 169
Symbol messages 376
Text messages 365
Vehicle status messages 364
Vehicle system settings, Control
system 170
Distance to empty (Range), Trip
computer 168
D
Daytime running lamp mode 144
Setting 173
Deep water see Standing water
Defrosting, Rear 190
449
Index
Distronic** 223
Activating 227
Cleaning system sensor 346
Deactivating 229
Distance warning function** 230
Driving hints 231
Menu 167, 226
Messages in display 366
Sensor cover 346
Warning and indicator lamps 225
Warning sounds 225
Door
Closing the rear doors automatically
from the inside (Maybach 62) 123
Entry lamps 153
Inside door handle 122
Inside door handle, Front 29
Inside door handle, Rear
(Maybach 57) 54
Inside door handle, Rear
(Maybach 62) 55
Locking, SmartKey 80
Locking, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** 80
Message in display 388
Opening from inside 122
Power closing assist for doors 128
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 288
Unlocking the driver’s door, Mechanical key 401
Unlocking, SmartKey 58
450
Door control panel
In the rear
Maybach 57 54
Maybach 62 55
Door handle
Lock button (KEYLESS-GO**) 80
DOT 333
Drink holder see Cup holder
Drinking and driving 297
Driving 68
Abroad 303
Hydroplaning 300
In winter 301
Instructions 297
Problems 76
Safety systems 103
Systems 221
Through standing water
With Distronic** 231
Driving safety systems
ABS 103
BAS 104
Electro-hydraulic brake system 107
ESP® 105
Driving systems
Airmatic DC 233
Cruise control 221
Distronic** 223
Parktronic 237
Vehicle level control 234
Driving tips 181
Accelerator position 181
Kickdown 181
DVD player
Compartment for 39, 41, 45, 255, 256
Storage compartment for 43
E
Easy-entry/exit feature 65, 177
Electrical fuses see Fuses
Electrical outlets see Power outlets
Electrical system, Technical data 438
Electro-hydraulic brake system
Messages in display 378, 379, 381
Self-check 108
Warning lamp 107
Electronic Stability Program see ESP®
Electrotransparent roof lighting* 152
Electrotransparent roof* 218
Cleaning 350
Lowering panel 350
Making opaque/transparent 219, 220
Opening/closing screen 219, 220
Operating from the cockpit 218
Operating from the rear 219
Operating the screen 28, 218
Emergency calls
Tele Aid calls 283
Emergency operation (Limp-Home
Mode) 185
Index
Emergency operations
Locking/unlocking the vehicle 401
Power tilt/sliding sunroof, Manual
operation 403
Remote door unlock 288
Trunk, Releasing from inside 127
Trunk, unlocking 402
Emergency, In case of
Battery, Jump starting 421
First aid kit 400
Flat tire, Changing 413
Fuses 426
Hazard warning flasher 147
Instrument cluster, Indicator
lamps 354
Roadside Assistance 12
Roadside Assistance (Tele Aid) 285
Towing the vehicle 423
Emission control 304
Emission control information label 433
Emission control system warranties 10
Engine
Belt layout 434
Cleaning 344
Compartment 307
Malfunction indicator lamp 23, 361
Number 435
Oils 441
Starting with KEYLESS-GO** 60
Starting with SmartKey 60
Tachometer 23
Technical data 435
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO** 79
Turning off with SmartKey 78
Engine coolant see Coolant
Engine oil 309, 441
Adding 310
Additives 441
Changing 441
Checking level 309
Consumption 309
Display messages 388
Filler neck 310
Messages in display 309, 388
Recommended engine oils and oil
filters 441
Engine oil level see Oil level
ESP® 105
Messages in display 354
Warning lamp 23, 105, 354
ETD 95
Safety guidelines 85
Exterior rear view mirrors 67, 186, 188
Parking position 141, 187
External communication (special order
equipment) 276
F
Filler neck, Engine oil 310
First aid kit 400
Flat tire 324, 413
Jacking up the vehicle 414
Lowering the vehicle 416
Mounting the spare wheel 413
Preparing the vehicle 413
Flexible Service System see FSS
Fluids
Automatic transmission fluid 310
Brake fluid 441
Capacities 440
Engine coolant 310, 440
Engine oil 309, 440, 441
Power steering fluid 440
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system 441, 446
Fog lamps 145, 407
Messages in display 391
Replacing bulbs 407
Folding table* 39, 43, 263
Front airbags 86
Front lamps see headlamps
Front passenger front airbag 86
Front seat head restraints see Head restraints
FSS (Canada vehicles) 339
451
Index
Fuel 306
Additives 443
Capacity, Fuel tank 440
Filling the tank 305
Fuel filler flap and cap 305
Fuel reserve warning lamp 23, 355
Premium unleaded gasoline 306
Requirements, Octane rating 442
Fuel filler flap 305
Locking 305
Unlocking 305
Fuel reserve warning lamp 23, 355
Fuel tank
Capacity 440
Filler flap 305
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacities 440
Fuse box 428
Fuses 426
Aids for replacing fuses 426
Fuse box in engine compartment 427
Fuse box in passenger
compartment 427
Fuse box in trunk 428
Fuse chart 400
Fuse extractor 400
Replacing 426
Spare fuses 400
G
Garage door opener 28, 289
Gasoline see Fuel
GAWR 334
452
Gear range
Automatic transmission 182
Limiting 182
Shifting into optimal 184
Gear selector lever 70, 178
Cleaning 348
Gearshift pattern 178
Lock 70
Message in display 373
Position 179, 180
Position indicator 180
Shifting procedure 179
Glove box 201, 249
Good visibility 186
GPS 282
Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW
GVW 334
GVWR 334
H
Hands-free microphone 28
Hard plastic trim items, Cleaning 348
Hazard warning flasher 147
Head restraints
Adjusting 132, 133
Front seat 64
Rear seats 131
Headlamp cleaning system 21, 186,
306, 311
Headlamp switch-off delay see Delayed
switch-off, Exterior lamps
Headlamps 143
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps 142
Automatic headlamp mode 143
Bi-Xenon 142, 407
Cleaning lenses 345
Cleaning system 186, 311, 446
High beam see High beam flasher
High beam see High beam headlamps
Messages in display 390, 391, 392,
393, 394
Replacing bulbs 408
Switch 73
Headliner and shelf below rear window,
Cleaning and care of 349
Headliner lamps and pillar
uplights* 152
Lighting 48, 49
Headphone jacks 39, 41, 43, 45, 255,
256
Headphones
Storage compartments
In rear doors 251
Heated seats 138
Heated steering wheel 276
Lever 21
Height adjustments
Vehicle level 234
High beam flasher 145, 146
High beam headlamps
Indicator lamp 23
Messages in display 391
Switching 74
Switching on 146
Index
High mounted brake lamp 407
Hood 307
Message in display 388
Opening 307
Horn 21
HVAC see Automatic climate control
Hydroplaning 300
I
Identification labels 432
Identification Number, Vehicle
(VIN) 432, 433
Ignition 60, 71
Immobilizer 110
Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Infant and child restraint systems see
Children in the vehicle
Inflation pressure see Tires
Infrared reflecting windshield 293
Inside door handle 122
Instrument cluster 22, 154
Cleaning 348
Illumination brightness 154
Lamps 354
Messages in display see Multifunction
display
Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster, Illumination brightness
Instrument panel see Instrument cluster
Interior lighting
Delayed switch-off 175
Front 148
Rear 149
Interior rear view mirror 67
Auto-dimming 186
Interior storage spaces see Storage compartments
J
Jack 400, 415
Jacking up the vehicle 414
Jump starting 421
K
Key, Mechanical 401
Key, SmartKey 58, 114
Battery check lamp 114, 121
Checking batteries 121
Factory setting 115
Global locking 116
Global unlocking 115, 116
Locking/unlocking 58, 80, 114
Loss of 121
Messages in display 390
Opening and closing the power tilt/
sliding sunroof 211
Opening and closing the power
windows 211
Opening the trunk 124
Positions in starter switch 60
Remote control 114
Replacing the batteries 405
Restoring to factory setting 116
Selective setting 116
Starting the engine 71
Turning off the engine 78
Key, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** 117
Battery check lamp 117
Checking batteries 121
Factory setting 120
Global locking 120
Global unlocking 120
Locking/unlocking 59, 80, 117
Loss of 121
Messages in display 389
Opening and closing the power tilt/
sliding sunroof 211
Opening and closing the power
windows 211
Opening the trunk 124
Remote control 117
Replacing the batteries 405
Restoring to factory setting 121
Selective setting 120
Starting the engine 60
Turning off the engine 79
Kickdown 181
Kilopascal 334
453
Index
L
Labels 432, 433
Certification 432
Emission control information 433
Vacuum line routing diagram
label 433
Lamp sensor
Message in display 390
Lamps, exterior
Message in display 390
Rear 407
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 23, 356
Anti-theft alarm systems 110
454
Battery (SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO**) 121
Battery (SmartKey) 121
Brakes 23, 360
CHECK ENGINE 361
Coolant 383
Distronic** 23, 225, 356
Electro-hydraulic brake system 107
Engine diagnostics 361
Engine malfunction 23, 361
ESP® 23, 105, 354
Fuel reserve 355
High beam headlamp 23
Instrument cluster 354–355
Parktronic 238
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF 25, 362
Restraint system 23
Seat belt telltale 23
Seat belts 357, 358
SRS 83
Tire inflation pressure 23, 359, 396
Tow away alarm 110
Turn signals 23
Language, Setting 172
LATCH-type child seat anchors see Children in the vehicle
Leather upholstery, Cleaning and care
of 349
Level control
Airmatic DC 236
Level control system
Airmatic DC 233
License plate lamp
Messages in display 393
Replacing bulbs 407, 410
Light alloy wheels, Cleaning 348
Light sensor 390
Lighter see Cigarette lighter
Lighting, Exterior and interior 142
Limp-Home Mode 185
Loading see Vehicle loading
Locator lighting 145
Lock button
Door handle 80
SmartKey 114
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 117
Trunk 121
Locking knob 122
Loss of
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet 431
SmartKey 121
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 121
Low beam headlamps 142
Messages in display 391
Replacing bulbs 407
Switching on 73
Lowering
Vehicle 416
Lubricants 440
Index
M
Maintenance 11, 339
Calling up service indicator
display 340
Clearing service indicator
message 340
FSS (Canada vehicles) 339
Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) 339
Resetting service indicator 341
Service indicator 339
Service term exceeded 340
Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) 339
Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps
Massage function (PULSE, Multicontour
seats) 137
Maximum load rating, Tires 334
Maximum loaded vehicle weight 334
Maximum tire inflation pressure 334
Maybach battery charger* 267
Maybach 62 with partition*
Storage pocket 37, 254
Maybach 62 without partition*
Storage pocket 254
Mechanical key 401
Loss of 121
Memory function 140
Menus see Control system menus
Messages in display see Multifunction
display messages
Microphone
External communication 276
Hands-free 28
Mirrors 66
Adjusting 66
Auto-dimming 186
Exterior rear view mirror parking
position 187
Exterior rear view mirrors 67
Interior rear view mirror 67
Mobile phone see Telephone
MON 306
MP3-CD operation
Selecting tracks 164
Multicontour seats 137
Multifunction display 23, 24, 157, 158,
162
Selecting language 172
Standard display 161, 162
Multifunction display messages 365
ABS 365
Air filter 366
Airmatic DC 376
Battery 366, 377
Brake fluid 381
Brake lamps 393
Brake pads 382
Check engine 361
Coolant 384
Coolant level 383
Cruise control 386
Distronic** 366
Doors 388
Electro-hydraulic brake system 378,
379, 381
Engine oil 309, 387, 388
Engine oil level 388
ESP® 368
Fog lamps 391, 393
Fuel cap 395
Gear selector lever 373
Headlamps 390, 391, 392, 393, 394
Hood 388
Parking brake 377
SmartKey 390
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 389
Steering oil 395
Tele Aid 373
Tires 375, 396–399
Trunk 388
Washer fluid 395
455
Index
Multifunction steering wheel 21, 24,
158
Button operation 158
N
Navigation system
Operating 166
See separate COMAND operating instructions
Navigation system DVD drive 256
Neutral gear position 70
Neutral gear position, Automatic
transmission 178, 180
New vehicle break-in 296
Night security illumination 145, 174
Non-smokers equipment* 263
Normal occupant weight 334
Number, vehicle identification
(VIN) 432, 433
O
Occupant distribution 334
Occupant safety 82
Airbags 83
Children and airbags 84
Children in the vehicle 95
Fastening the seat belts 68
Infant and child restraint systems 98
LATCH-type child seat anchors 99
Seat belts 68, 92
Odometer 23, 157
Oil see Engine oil
456
One-touch gearshifting
Automatic transmission 184
Gear selector lever 184
Operating safety 15
Ornamental moldings, Cleaning 345
Outside microphone 276
Outside temperature indicator 23, 31,
33, 35, 37, 155
Overdue maintenance service 340
Overhead control panel 28
P
Paintwork, Cleaning 343
Panic alarm 102
Panic button 102
Parking 77, 299
Parking Assist System (PAS) 240
Camera 241, 347
Cleaning of the camera lens 347
Parallel parking 244
Parallel parking button 26, 27
Reverse parking (back-in
parking) 243
Switching on 242
Parking brake 77
Message in display 377
Parking lamps
Messages in display 392, 394
Replacing bulbs 407, 409
Parking position
Exterior rear view mirrors 141, 187
Gear position 70
Parktronic 237
Activating/deactivating 240
Cleaning system sensors 346
Malfunctioning 240
Minimum distance 238
Range of the sensors 238
Sensors 238
Warning indicator 21, 39, 41, 43, 45,
238, 239
Warning sound 240
Partition* 271
Opening/Closing 273
Parts service 430
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
Indicator lamp 25, 362
Passenger compartment 302
Fuse box 427
Interior rear view mirror 67
Passenger safety see Occupant safety
Passenger seat
Adjusting from the rear 54
Pedals 297
Plastic and rubber parts, Cleaning 348
Poly-V-belt drive 434
Layout 434
Power assistance 297
Power closing assist for doors and trunk
lid 128
Power folding exterior rear view
mirrors 188
Power outlets 266
Power tilt/sliding sunroof 212
Index
Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57)
Opening/closing 212
Opening/closing in an
emergency 403
Stopping 213
Synchronizing 213
Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62)
Opening/closing 214, 215
Opening/closing in an
emergency 404
Operating from cockpit 215
Operating from the rear passenger
compartment 216
Stopping 215, 217
Synchronizing 217
Power washer 343
Power windows 209
Cleaning 347
Operating 209
Rear door window, Blocking
operation 100
Synchronizing 210
Practical hints 354
Premium unleaded gasoline 442
Problems
While driving 76
With vehicle 16
Product information 9
Production options weight 334
Program mode see Automatic transmission, Automatic shift program
Program mode selector switch
Automatic shift program 183
PSI 334
PULSE function (Massage function) 137
Push-start see Tow-start
R
Radial-ply tires
Summer tires 437
Radio
Selecting stations 163
Selecting stations, Satellite radio
(USA only) 163
Station selection setting, Control
system 176
Radio transmitters 303
Range (distance to empty) 168
Reading lamps
Front 148
Rear 149
Rear bench seat
Maybach 57 with rear center seat* 40
Maybach 62 with rear center seat* 44
Rear center console 46
Maybach 57 46, 47
Maybach 62 with electrotransparent
roof* 51, 52
Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding
sunroof 48, 49
Rear door windows
Blocking operation 100
Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear passenger compartment
Control panel
Maybach 57 30, 32
Maybach 62 34
Maybach 62 with partition* 36
Maybach 62 without partition* 34
Rear seat head restraints see Head restraints
Rear seats 131
Adjusting
Head restraint tilt 131
Adjustment 131
Extending and retracting rear seat
head restraints 134
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window curtain 267
Rear window defroster 190
Recommended tire inflation
pressure 334
Recovery services, Stolen vehicle
(Tele Aid) 288
Refrigerant, Air conditioning 441
Refrigerator** 265
Cleaning 343
Controlling temperature 265
Opening 265
Rear center armrest 255
Switching on/off 265
Refueling 305
Regular checks 306
Remote control
SmartKey 114
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 117
457
Index
Remote door unlock 288
Remote rear door closing 123
Remote trunk opening/closing
switch 124, 125
Replacing bulbs 406
Additional turn signals 408
Backup bulbs 408
Brake lamp 408
Cornering lamp 409
Fog lamps 408
Front turn signal bulb 410
High beam flasher bulb 409
High mounted brake lamp 408
License plate lamp 410
Parking lamps 409
Side marker bulb 410
Standing lamps 409
Turn signal lamps 407
Reporting safety defects 17
Reset button, In instrument
cluster 154, 170
Residual engine heat and
ventilation 200
Restraint system
See Children in the vehicle
Reverse gear position 70, 73
Reverse gear position, Automatic
transmission 178, 180
Rims 334, 437
Rims (light alloy) 437
Roadside Assistance 12, 285
RON 306
Rubber parts, Cleaning 348
458
S
Safety
Driving safety systems 103
Occupant 82
Reporting defects 17
Safety belts see Seat belts
Satellite radio (USA only) 163
Seat belts 92
Children in the vehicle 95
Cleaning 349
Fastening 68
Force limiter 95
Proper use of 69, 93
Safety guidelines 85
Telltale 23, 357, 358
Warning sounds 92
Seating capacity 316
Seats 62
Adjustment 63
Adjustment, Rear seat
(Maybach 57) 132
Adjustment, Rear seat
(Maybach 62) 133
Heating 138
Memory function 141
Multicontour 136
Setting from rear 135
Ventilation* 139
Securing cargo 247
Selector lever see Gear selector lever
Self-test
Tele Aid 282
Service and warranty information 10
Service intervals see Maintenance, Service indicator
Service life, Tires 314
Service see Maintenance
Service system see FSS (Canada vehicles)
or Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles)
Service, Parts 430
Settings
Control system menus 161
Control system submenus 161
Factory, SmartKey 115
Factory, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** 120
Individual, SmartKey 116
Individual, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** 120
Individual, Vehicle 170
Resetting all, Control system 170
Selective, SmartKey 116
Selective, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO** 120
Shelf below rear window, Cleaning and
care of 349
Shift program mode, Automatic
transmission 183
Shifting, Automatic transmission 178
Side impact airbags 87
Side marker lamps 407
Cleaning lenses 345
Messages in display 392
Replacing bulbs 407, 410
Side windows see Power windows
Sidewall 334
Index
SmartKey see Key, SmartKey
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** see Key,
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**
Snow chains 338
Snow tires 338
Solar panel* 208
Spare fuses 400
Spare wheel 437
Mounting 413
Speed settings
Cruise control 222
Distronic** 228
Speedometer 23, 225
In the rear 31, 33, 35, 37
SRS 82
Indicator lamp 23, 359
Message in display 373
Standing lamps
Replacing bulbs 407
Standing water, Driving through 302
Starter battery 417
Starter switch 21
Positions 60
Starting difficulties, Engine 71
Starting, Engine 70
Steering column 65
Steering gear oil
Message in display 395
Steering wheel 64
Adjusting 64
Buttons 158
Cleaning 348
Heated 276
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 288
Stopping
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 57) 213
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
(Maybach 62) 215
Windows 210
Storage compartment/drawer
Between the front seats (Maybach 62
with partition*) 252
Storage compartments 248
Armrest, Front 263
Between rear seats 255
For wireless surround sound
headphones 251
Between the front seats (Maybach 62
with partition*) 252
Compartment for the front
telephone 250
For CD changer 255, 256
For DVD player 255, 256
Front doors 250
Glove box 249
Rear center armrest 263
Rear center console 252
Rear doors, Maybach 57 251
Rear doors, Maybach 62 251
Refrigerator** 255
Telephone 250, 255
Under the driver’s seat 251
With navigation system DVD
drive 256
Storage pocket
Maybach 62 with partition* 37, 254
Maybach 62 without partition* 254
Storing tires 315
Submenus see Control system submenus
Summer opening feature 211
Sun visors 189
Sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Symbols used in this operator’s
manual 14
T
Tachometer 23, 155
Overspeed range 155
Tail lamps
Cleaning lenses 345
Messages in display 394
Replacing bulbs 407
Tar stains 343
459
Index
Technical data
Air conditioning refrigerant 441
Brake fluid 441
Capacities fuels, coolants, lubricants,
etc. 440
Coolant 440, 443
Electrical system 438
Engine 435
Engine oil additives 441
Engine oils 440, 441
Fuel requirements 440, 442
Gasoline additives 443
Main dimensions and weights 439
Premium unleaded gasoline 440, 442
Rims and tires 436
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system 441
Windshield washer system 446
Tele Aid 281
Call priority 287
Emergency calls 283
Hands-free microphone 28
Information 287
Initiating an emergency call
manually 284
Messages in display 373
Remote door unlock 288
Roadside Assistance 285
SOS button 284
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 288
System self-check 282
460
Telephone 277
Answering/ending a call 166
Compartment in the front 250, 278
Compartment in the rear 255, 256,
280
Hands-free microphone 28
In the front 278
In the rear 280
Operation 277
Phone book 165
Redialing 166
Telephone cradle
Changing 279
Temperature
Interior temperature 207
Outside indicator 155
Tether attachment points see Children in
the vehicle
Tie-down hooks, Trunk 247
Tightening torque, Wheel bolts 416
Tilt/sliding sunroof see Power tilt/sliding
sunroof
TIN 335
Tire and Loading Information
Placard 315
Tire and loading terminology 333
Tires 313
Care and maintenance 313
Chains 338
Checking tire inflation pressure 321
Cleaning 315
Direction of rotation 315
Driving instructions 300
Important notes, Tire inflation
pressure 320
Inflation pressure 321
Inspection 314
Load rating 335
Messages in display 375, 396–399
Index
Ply composition and material
used 335
Problems under-/overinflation 325
Retreads 313
Rims and tires 436
Rotating 336
Service life 314
Sizes 436
Snow 337
Spare wheel 400, 413
Speed rating 301, 328, 335, 337
Storing 315
Temperature 320, 332
Terminology 333
Tire Identification Number see TIN
Traction 300
Tread 335
Tread depth 314, 338
Treadwear indicators 335
Vehicle maximum load on 335
Wear pattern 336
Winter 338
Tools 400
Top tether
Children in the vehicle 98
Tow-away alarm 111
Towing eye bolt 400
Towing the vehicle 423
Tow-start 423
Traction 183, 335
Transmission see Automatic transmission
Traveling abroad 303
Tread 335
Tread depth 314
Treadwear indicators 335
Trip computer 167
Trip odometer 155
Trunk
Closing 125
Emergency release 127
Fuse box 428
Lighting 153
Message in display 388
Opening 123, 124
Power closing assist for trunk lid
Tie-down hooks 247
Valet locking 127
Trunk lid see Trunk
Tumbler holder see Cup holder
Turn signal lamps
Cleaning lenses 345
Messages in display 393
Replacing bulbs 410
Turning off engine 78
Two-way intercom* 274
Adjusting volume 275
Operating 274
Switching on/off 274
U
Umbrella 257
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards 335
Units, Settings
Speedometer 172
Unleaded gasoline, Premium 306, 440,
442
Upholstery, Cleaning and care of 349
Useful features 248
128
V
Vacuum line routing diagram label 433
Valet locking 127
Vanity mirror
In the rear 248
In the sun visor 248
Opening/closing 248
Vehicle
Batteries 417
Breaking-in the vehicle 296
Care 342
Control system, Settings menu 170
Dimensions 439
Locking/unlocking 58, 79, 114
Locking/unlocking in an
emergency 401, 402
Lowering 416
Modifications and alterations, Operating safety 15
Towing 423
Washing 344
Weights 439
Vehicle jack 400, 415
Vehicle level
Setting
Automatic 236
Vehicle level control see Airmatic DC
Vehicle lighting 142, 306
461
Index
Vehicle loading 247
Cargo tie-down hooks 247
Instructions 247
Load limit 316
Terminology 315, 333
Vehicle maximum load on the tire 335
Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen
(Tele Aid) 288
Vehicle status message memory 169
Vehicle tool kit 400
Vehicle washing 344
Voice control system
Hands-free microphone 28
Lever 21
W
Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function** 230
Distronic** 225
Exterior lamps 143
Parking brake 73, 360
Parktronic 240
Seat belt telltale 92
Switching off headlamps 80
Warranty coverage 10, 431
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washing the vehicle 342
Wear pattern, Tires 336
Weights, Vehicle 439
462
Wheel
Bolts 416
Change 413
Removing 415
Sizes 326, 437
Spare 400, 413
Tightening torque 416
Tires and wheels 313
Window curtain airbags 87
Windows see Power windows
Windshield
Cleaning 75
Cleaning wiper blades 347
Defogging 195
Windshield washer fluid 311
Message in display 395
Mixing ratio 446
Refilling 311, 446
Wiping 75
Windshield wipers 21, 74
Cleaning wiper blades 347
Replacing wiper blades 411
Winter driving 337
Snow chains 338
Tires 338
Winter driving instructions 301
Winter tires 338
Wood trims, Cleaning 350
